Manual ALCATEL DWDM

Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Title page
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) |

Release 4.0
Product Information and Planning Guide
PIPG
8DG60913AAAATQZZA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1
July 2011
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2011 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside
Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.
Software
Legal Notices applicable to any software distributed alone or in connection with the product to which this document pertains, are contained in files within the
software itself located at:
• the software distribution DVD available with the product at /Licenses
• the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC web page, accessible via the menu item Online Library → Legal Notice.
See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS User Provisioning Guide for additional information about how to access the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC.
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Contents
About this document

Purpose ........................................................................................................................................................................................... xxi
xxi
Documented feature set ............................................................................................................................................................ xxi

xxi
Safety information ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxi

xxi
Optical safety .............................................................................................................................................................................. xxii

xxii
Intended audience .................................................................................................................................................................... xxiii

xxiii
Conventions used .................................................................................................................................................................... xxiii

xxiii
Related information ................................................................................................................................................................ xxiv

xxiv
Technical support ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxv

xxv
How to comment ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxvi

xxvi
1 Introduction
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1-1
Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-2

1-2
The Alcatel-Lucent optical networking products family ............................................................................................ 1-4

1-4
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) profile ................................................................................... 1-8

1-8
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) network solutions .......................................................... 1-14
1-14
2 Features
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2-1
Physical interfaces
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-3

2-3
OTN interfaces ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-4

2-4
SDH/SONET interfaces .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-5

2-5
Data interfaces ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-6

2-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Alcatel-Lucent – Internal iii
8DG60913AAAATQZZA Release 4.0 Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 July 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Timing interfaces ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2-7
Operations interfaces ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-8

2-8
Power interfaces and grounding ........................................................................................................................................ 2-10

2-10
Transmission features
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-11

2-11
Supported mappings .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-12

2-12
Cross-connection features ................................................................................................................................................... 2-14

2-14
Ethernet features ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-15

2-15
Forward error correction ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-20

2-20
Path protection ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-21

2-21
Overhead access and monitoring ...................................................................................................................................... 2-22

2-22
Equipment features
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-24

2-24
Environment, ecology, and safety .................................................................................................................................... 2-25

2-25
Equipment protection ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-26

2-26
Optical interface modules .................................................................................................................................................... 2-27

2-27
Equipment reports .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-28

2-28
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning features
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-29

2-29
Operation and management ................................................................................................................................................ 2-30

2-30
Monitoring and diagnostic functions .............................................................................................................................. 2-32

2-32
Stability ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-35

2-35
External communications features ................................................................................................................................... 2-36

2-36
Control plane features
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-37

2-37
The control plane concept ................................................................................................................................................... 2-38

2-38
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv Alcatel-Lucent – Internal 1830 PSS
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction 8DG60913AAAATQZZA Release 4.0
Issue 1 July 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
List of features ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-40
2-40
Port types ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-42

2-42
Standardized network interfaces ....................................................................................................................................... 2-44

2-44
3 Topologies and configurations
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3-1
Backbone applications ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-2

3-2
Metro core/regional applications ......................................................................................................................................... 3-4

3-4
Interworking and interoperability ....................................................................................................................................... 3-7

3-7
4 Product description
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4-1
System configuration ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-3

4-3
Part lists ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-6

4-6
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack (S3T8) ..................................................................................................... 4-11

4-11
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack (CMSHF) ............................................................................................... 4-14

4-14
Fan Unit (FAN3T8) ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-17

4-17
PSS-64 Bus Termination Cards (BT3T8, BTC3T8) .................................................................................................. 4-21

4-21
PSS-36 Bus Termination Card (BT36) ........................................................................................................................... 4-23

4-23
PSS-64 Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8) ..................................................................... 4-25
4-25
PSS-36 Power filter card (PFC) ........................................................................................................................................ 4-28

4-28
PSS-64 High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP) ................................................................... 4-31
4-31
PSS-36 Power Distribution Unit (PDU1C, PDU2C) ................................................................................................ 4-33

4-33
First-Level Controller (FLC) .............................................................................................................................................. 4-34

4-34
Agnostic matrix cards (MT960C, MT1T9) .................................................................................................................. 4-39

4-39
10 × 10G ANY Port Unit (10XANY10G) ..................................................................................................................... 4-45

4-45
10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit (10XOTH10G) ................................................................................................................ 4-52

4-52
10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit (10XETH10G) .............................................................................................................. 4-58

4-58
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Alcatel-Lucent – Internal v
Issue 1 July 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 × 40G ANY Port Unit (2XANY40G) .......................................................................................................................... 4-63
4-63
24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit (24XANYMR) ........................................................................................................... 4-68

4-68
24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit (24XETH1G) ................................................................................................................... 4-73

4-73
Available optical modules ................................................................................................................................................... 4-77

4-77
Synchronization ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-79

4-79
PSS-64 Power distribution concept ................................................................................................................................. 4-80

4-80
PSS-36 Power distribution concept ................................................................................................................................. 4-83

4-83
Control architecture ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-86

4-86
External communications: ECC ........................................................................................................................................ 4-91

4-91
External communications: LAN ....................................................................................................................................... 4-92

4-92
External communications: TCP/IP stack ....................................................................................................................... 4-96

4-96
5 Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P)
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5-1
Administration
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-3

5-3
Security concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-4

5-4
Time of day synchronization ................................................................................................................................................ 5-7

5-7
Maintenance
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-9

5-9
Fault and alarm management ............................................................................................................................................. 5-10

5-10
Loopbacks ................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-18

5-18
System diagnostics and tests .............................................................................................................................................. 5-21

5-21
Performance monitoring ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-23

5-23
Thresholding ............................................................................................................................................................................ 5-29

5-29
Software management .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-32

5-32
Configuration management ................................................................................................................................................ 5-37

5-37
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi Alcatel-Lucent – Internal 1830 PSS
Issue 1 July 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reports ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-40
5-40
Provisioning
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-41

5-41
Equipment provisioning ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-42

5-42
Primary and secondary states of system components ............................................................................................... 5-45

5-45
Facility protection switching .............................................................................................................................................. 5-48

5-48
Equipment protection switching ...................................................................................................................................... 5-55

5-55
Operations interfaces
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-58

5-58
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC) ............................................................... 5-59
5-59
LED of the Fan Unit (FAN3T8) ........................................................................................................................................ 5-60

5-60
LEDs of the High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP) .......................................................... 5-61
5-61
LEDs of the Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8) ........................................................... 5-62
5-62
LEDs of the Power Filter Card (PFC) ............................................................................................................................ 5-64

5-64
LEDs of the First-Level Controller (FLC) .................................................................................................................... 5-66

5-66
LEDs of the agnostic matrix cards .................................................................................................................................. 5-69

5-69
LED of the I/O cards ............................................................................................................................................................. 5-71

5-71
6 Ordering
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6-1
Ordering information ............................................................................................................................................................... 6-2

6-2
7 System planning and engineering
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7-1
General planning information .............................................................................................................................................. 7-2

7-2
Power planning .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3

7-3
Cooling equipment ................................................................................................................................................................... 7-5

7-5
Environmental conditions ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-7

7-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Alcatel-Lucent – Internal vii
Issue 1 July 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transmission capacity ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-16
7-16
Location rules .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-18

7-18
Floorplan guidelines (ETSI/ANSI) .................................................................................................................................. 7-20

7-20
Equipment interconnection ................................................................................................................................................. 7-25

7-25
8 Product support
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8-1
Accessing and navigating the OLCS web site ................................................................................................................ 8-2

8-2
9 Quality and reliability
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9-1
Conformance statements
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2

9-2
Canada .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-3

9-3
China ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-5

9-5
European Union ......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-7

9-7
United States ............................................................................................................................................................................ 9-12

9-12
Quality
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-14

9-14
Alcatel-Lucent's commitment to quality and reliability ........................................................................................... 9-15

9-15
Ensuring quality ...................................................................................................................................................................... 9-16

9-16
Reliability
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-17

9-17
General reliability specifications ...................................................................................................................................... 9-18

9-18
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS failure-in-time rates ............................................................................................................ 9-20

9-20
10 Technical specifications
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-1

10-1
Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2

10-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii Alcatel-Lucent – Internal 1830 PSS
Issue 1 July 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transmission parameters ..................................................................................................................................................... 10-3
10-3
Performance ........................................................................................................................................................................... 10-10

10-10
Supervision and alarms ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-11

10-11
Timing and synchronization ............................................................................................................................................. 10-12

10-12
OAM & P ................................................................................................................................................................................ 10-13

10-13
Network management ........................................................................................................................................................ 10-14

10-14
Physical design ..................................................................................................................................................................... 10-15

10-15
Weight and power consumption ..................................................................................................................................... 10-18

10-18
Spare part information ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-22

10-22
A An OTN overview
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... A-1

A-1
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................................ A-2

A-2
OTN layers ................................................................................................................................................................................. A-4

A-4
The ODUflex concept .......................................................................................................................................................... A-10

A-10
OTN frame and information structures ......................................................................................................................... A-12

A-12
OTN multiplexing and mapping ...................................................................................................................................... A-21

A-21
OTN tandem connection monitoring ............................................................................................................................. A-25

A-25
OTN maintenance signals .................................................................................................................................................. A-27

A-27
OTN protection ...................................................................................................................................................................... A-28

A-28
Error correction in OTN ..................................................................................................................................................... A-32

A-32
Glossary
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Alcatel-Lucent – Internal ix
Issue 1 July 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x Alcatel-Lucent – Internal 1830 PSS
Issue 1 July 2011
List of tables
1 Conventions used .................................................................................................................................................... xxiv

xxiv
2 Information products related to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ....................................................................... xxiv
2-1 Summary of external control interfaces ............................................................................................................ 2-8
2-2 Supported mappings ............................................................................................................................................... 2-13
2-3 Types of ports and their role in the context of the GMRE ....................................................................... 2-42
3-1 Equipment used in sample configuration .......................................................................................................... 3-2
3-2 Equipment used in sample configuration .......................................................................................................... 3-5
4-1 List of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 items ....................................................................................................... 4-6
4-2 List of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 items ....................................................................................................... 4-8
4-3 List of optical modules ............................................................................................................................................ 4-9

4-9
4-4 PSF3T8 front panel and backplane interfaces .............................................................................................. 4-26
4-5 PFC front panel interfaces ................................................................................................................................... 4-29
4-6 FLC front panel and backplane interfaces ..................................................................................................... 4-35
4-7 Overall switching capacity ................................................................................................................................. 4-39
4-8 External interfaces of the agnostic matrix cards (MT960C, MT1T9) ................................................. 4-41
4-9 10XANY10G main traffic processing features ............................................................................................ 4-45
4-10 10XANY10G port groups .................................................................................................................................... 4-46
4-11 10XANY10G port group modes and client selection modes .................................................................. 4-46
4-12 10XOTH10G main traffic processing features ............................................................................................ 4-52
4-13 10XOTH10G port groups .................................................................................................................................... 4-53
4-14 10XOTH10G port group modes and client selection modes .................................................................. 4-53
4-15 10XETH10G main traffic processing features ............................................................................................. 4-58
4-16 10XETH10G port groups ..................................................................................................................................... 4-59
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Alcatel-Lucent – Internal xi
Issue 1 July 2011
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-17 10XETH10G port group modes and client selection modes ................................................................... 4-59
4-18 2XANY40G main traffic processing features ............................................................................................. 4-63
4-19 2XANY40G port groups ...................................................................................................................................... 4-63
4-20 2XANY40G port group modes and client selection modes .................................................................... 4-64
4-21 24XANYMR main traffic processing features ............................................................................................. 4-68
4-22 24XANYMR port groups ..................................................................................................................................... 4-69
4-23 24XANYMR port group modes and client selection modes ................................................................... 4-69
4-24 24XETH1G main traffic processing features ................................................................................................ 4-73
4-25 24XETH1G port groups ....................................................................................................................................... 4-73
4-26 24XETH1G port group modes and client selection modes ..................................................................... 4-74
4-27 TCP/IP protocol stack ............................................................................................................................................ 4-96

4-96
5-1 System-defined ASAP instances ........................................................................................................................ 5-14
5-2 OTUk near-end PM parameters ......................................................................................................................... 5-24
5-3 OTUk far-end PM parameters ............................................................................................................................ 5-25
5-4 ODUk near-end PM parameters ....................................................................................................................... 5-25
5-5 ODUk far-end PM parameters .......................................................................................................................... 5-25
5-6 ODUk TCM near-end PM parameters ........................................................................................................... 5-26
5-7 ODUk TCM far-end PM parameters .............................................................................................................. 5-26
5-8 Number of BBEs per SES .................................................................................................................................... 5-26
5-9 Ethernet PM parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 5-27
5-10 Performance monitoring - available bins ....................................................................................................... 5-28
5-11 USB flash drive specifications .......................................................................................................................... 5-32
5-12 Software download performance ....................................................................................................................... 5-34
5-13 Database download performance ...................................................................................................................... 5-39
5-14 Database upload performance ............................................................................................................................ 5-39
5-15 OTN SNCP request/state priorities without APS protocol ....................................................................... 5-52
5-16 SNCP protection switch states ............................................................................................................................ 5-53

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii Alcatel-Lucent – Internal 1830 PSS
Issue 1 July 2011
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-17 HPCFAP LEDs (rack top lamps) ....................................................................................................................... 5-61
5-18 PSF3T8 LED 1 (STATUS) .................................................................................................................................. 5-62
5-19 PSF3T8 LED 2 (SOURCE) ................................................................................................................................. 5-62
5-20 PSF3T8 LED 3 (BATT I) ..................................................................................................................................... 5-62
5-21 PSF3T8 LED 4 (BATT II) ................................................................................................................................... 5-62
5-22 PSF3T8 LED 5 (BATT III) .................................................................................................................................. 5-62
5-23 PFC STATUS LED ................................................................................................................................................. 5-64

5-64
5-24 PFC SOURCE LED ............................................................................................................................................... 5-64

5-64
5-25 PFC BATT I LED ................................................................................................................................................... 5-64

5-64
5-26 PFC BATT II LED .................................................................................................................................................. 5-64

5-64
5-27 PFC BATT III LED ................................................................................................................................................ 5-64

5-64
5-28 FLC LED 1 (STAT) ................................................................................................................................................ 5-66

5-66
5-29 FLC LED 2 (EPS) ................................................................................................................................................... 5-66

5-66
5-30 FLC LED 3 (C) ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-66

5-66
5-31 FLC LED 4 (M) ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-67

5-67
5-32 FLC LED 5 (m) ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-67

5-67
5-33 FLC LED 6 (W) ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-67

5-67
5-34 FLC LED 7 (AT) .................................................................................................................................................... 5-67

5-67
5-35 FLC LED 8 (AB) ................................................................................................................................................... 5-67

5-67
5-36 FLC LAN interface LED 1 .................................................................................................................................. 5-68
5-37 FLC LAN interface LED 2 .................................................................................................................................. 5-68
5-38 Agnostic matrix card LED 1 (STAT) ............................................................................................................... 5-69
5-39 Agnostic matrix card LED 2 (EPS) .................................................................................................................. 5-69
5-40 Agnostic matrix card LAN interface LED 1 ................................................................................................. 5-69
5-41 Agnostic matrix card LAN interface LED 2 ................................................................................................. 5-70
5-42 I/O card LED 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-71

5-71
6-1 Ordering information for software and license items ................................................................................... 6-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Alcatel-Lucent – Internal xiii
Issue 1 July 2011
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-2 Ordering information for test services ............................................................................................................... 6-2
7-1 Power dissipation of typical system configurations .................................................................................... 7-3
7-2 Power dissipation of typical system configurations .................................................................................... 7-3
7-3 Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI market) .................................................................... 7-7
7-4 Environmental conditions for storage (ANSI market) ................................................................................. 7-8
7-5 Temperature and humidity levels for transportation (ETSI market) ....................................................... 7-9
7-6 Environmental conditions for transportation (ANSI market) ................................................................. 7-10
7-7 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ETSI market) ............................................................. 7-11
7-8 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market) ............................................................ 7-13
7-9 Overall switching capacity ................................................................................................................................. 7-16
7-10 I/O card capacities .................................................................................................................................................. 7-16

7-16
7-11 Slot assignment Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 .............................................................................................. 7-18
7-12 Slot assignment Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 .............................................................................................. 7-19
7-13 Connector types per interface ............................................................................................................................. 7-25
7-14 Connector types per interface ............................................................................................................................ 7-26
9-1 FIT rate per item ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-20

9-20
10-1 Parameters specified for STM-16 optical interfaces .................................................................................. 10-3
10-2 Parameters specified for STM-64/OC-192/OTU-2 optical interfaces ................................................. 10-4
10-3 Parameters specified for 1 GbE optical interfaces 1000BASE-SX/-LX/-ZX ................................... 10-5
10-4 Parameters specified for 10 GbE optical interfaces 10GBASE-LR/LW, 10GBASE-ER/EW,

10GBASE-ZR/ZW .............................................................................................................................................. 10-7
10-7
10-5 Weight and power consumption Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 ............................................................ 10-18
10-6 Weight and power consumption Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 ............................................................ 10-20
10-7 Recommended spare stock levels for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 .................................................. 10-22
10-8 Recommended spare stock levels for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 .................................................. 10-23
A-1 OPU types and their capacities ............................................................................................................................ A-7
A-2 ODU types and their capacities ........................................................................................................................... A-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv Alcatel-Lucent – Internal 1830 PSS
Issue 1 July 2011
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-3 ODUflex (GFP) transporting higher-order ODU nominal bit rates ....................................................... A-8
A-4 ODUflex bit rates ..................................................................................................................................................... A-9

A-9
A-5 OTU types and their capacities ............................................................................................................................ A-9
A-6 Payload type ............................................................................................................................................................. A-15

A-15
A-7 Field values in the APS channel ....................................................................................................................... A-30
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Alcatel-Lucent – Internal xv
Issue 1 July 2011
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi Alcatel-Lucent – Internal 1830 PSS
Issue 1 July 2011
List of figures
1-1 The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 ........................................................................................................................ 1-9
1-2 The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 ...................................................................................................................... 1-10
1-3 OTN basic principles ............................................................................................................................................. 1-13

1-13
1-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS high-level positioning ........................................................................................ 1-15
1-5 Application example: Regional interconnects of an OTN backbone .................................................. 1-16
1-6 Application example: Interworking with existing photonic network ................................................. 1-17
2-1 Ethernet in OTH structures .................................................................................................................................. 2-15
2-2 Link pass through mode ....................................................................................................................................... 2-17
2-3 Different planes of a GMPLS/ASON network ........................................................................................... 2-39
2-4 Port types in a GMRE domain ........................................................................................................................... 2-43
2-5 Standardized network interfaces ........................................................................................................................ 2-45
3-1 Sample configuration: Backbone ......................................................................................................................... 3-2
3-2 Sample Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 configuration ..................................................................................... 3-4
3-3 Sample Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 configuration ..................................................................................... 3-5
3-4 DWDM topology example .................................................................................................................................... 3-8
4-1 System block diagram .............................................................................................................................................. 4-3

4-3
4-2 Block diagram at card level ................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4-3 Block diagram at switching level ........................................................................................................................ 4-5
4-4 Physical slot numbering scheme ........................................................................................................................ 4-12
4-5 Physical slot numbering scheme ........................................................................................................................ 4-15
4-6 FAN3T8 front view ................................................................................................................................................ 4-20
4-7 BT3T8 front view ................................................................................................................................................... 4-22

4-22
4-8 BTC3T8 front view ................................................................................................................................................ 4-22

4-22
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Alcatel-Lucent – Internal xvii
Issue 1 July 2011
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-9 BT36 front view ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-24
4-24
4-10 PSF3T8 front panel and backplane interfaces .............................................................................................. 4-26
4-11 PSF3T8 front view .................................................................................................................................................. 4-27

4-27
4-12 PFC power branching ............................................................................................................................................ 4-29
4-13 PFC front view ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-30

4-30
4-14 HPCFAP front view ................................................................................................................................................ 4-32

4-32
4-15 Power Distribution Unit (PDU1C) front view .............................................................................................. 4-33
4-16 Power Distribution Unit (PDU2C) front view .............................................................................................. 4-33
4-17 FLC front panel and backplane interfaces ..................................................................................................... 4-35
4-18 Front view of the PSS-64 FLC ........................................................................................................................... 4-37
4-19 Main function blocks and interfaces of the agnostic matrix cards (MT960C, MT1T9) .............. 4-40
4-20 Agnostic matrix card front view (MT1T9) .................................................................................................... 4-42
4-21 Agnostic matrix card front view (MT960C) ................................................................................................. 4-43
4-22 10XANY10G transmission interfaces ............................................................................................................. 4-45
4-23 10XANY10G mapping and termination functions (port group mode OTH_OTH) ...................... 4-47
4-24 10XANY10G mapping and termination functions (port group mode ETHSTH_OTH) .............. 4-47
4-25 10XANY10G front view ...................................................................................................................................... 4-51
4-26 10XOTH10G transmission interfaces ............................................................................................................. 4-52
4-27 10XOTH10G mapping and termination functions ..................................................................................... 4-54
4-28 10XOTH10G front view ...................................................................................................................................... 4-56
4-29 10XETH10G transmission interfaces .............................................................................................................. 4-58
4-30 10XETH10G mapping and termination functions ...................................................................................... 4-59
4-31 10XETH10G front view ....................................................................................................................................... 4-61
4-32 2XANY40G transmission interfaces ............................................................................................................... 4-63
4-33 2XANY40G mapping and termination functions ....................................................................................... 4-64
4-34 2XANY40G front view ........................................................................................................................................ 4-67
4-35 24XANYMR transmission interfaces ............................................................................................................ 4-68
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xviii Alcatel-Lucent – Internal 1830 PSS
Issue 1 July 2011
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-36 24XANYMR main mapping and termination functions ........................................................................... 4-69
4-37 24XANYMR front view ....................................................................................................................................... 4-72
4-38 24XETH1G transmission interfaces ................................................................................................................ 4-73
4-39 24XETH1G main mapping and termination functions ............................................................................. 4-74
4-40 24XETH1G front view .......................................................................................................................................... 4-76
4-41 PSS-64 Power distribution (principal view) .................................................................................................. 4-80
4-42 PSS-36 Power distribution ................................................................................................................................... 4-84
4-43 Control level schematic ........................................................................................................................................ 4-86

4-86
4-44 Infrastructure for the first level of control ..................................................................................................... 4-88
4-45 Infrastructure for the second level of control .............................................................................................. 4-89
4-46 Subrack connections for communications and maintenance ................................................................... 4-93
5-1 Fault management process ................................................................................................................................... 5-11
5-2 Alarm indicators on NE level ............................................................................................................................ 5-15
5-3 Loopback types ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-19

5-19
5-4 Performance monitoring process ....................................................................................................................... 5-23
5-5 Thresholding – transient condition method ................................................................................................... 5-30
5-6 Thresholding – standing condition method ................................................................................................... 5-31
5-7 In-service upgrade process .................................................................................................................................. 5-36
5-8 Database types and transitions ........................................................................................................................... 5-38
5-9 SNC protection functionality .............................................................................................................................. 5-48
5-10 1+1 SNCP architecture for a single network element ................................................................................ 5-49
5-11 Single NE client signal protection .................................................................................................................... 5-50
5-12 SNC/Nc protection in the network .................................................................................................................... 5-51
7-1 Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI market) .................................................................... 7-8
7-2 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ETSI market) ............................................................. 7-12
7-3 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market) ............................................................ 7-14
7-4 Floorplan guidelines (top view) ......................................................................................................................... 7-21
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Alcatel-Lucent – Internal xix
Issue 1 July 2011
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-5 Floorplan guidelines (side view) ...................................................................................................................... 7-22
7-6 Floorplan guidelines for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 in accordance with “Telcordia ®
Requirement GR-63-CORE” ............................................................................................................................ 7-23
7-7 Floorplan guidelines for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 in accordance with “Telcordia ®
Requirement GR-63-CORE” ............................................................................................................................ 7-23
7-8 Possible floor arrangement (example) in accordance with ETSI 300119-2 ...................................... 7-24
9-1 Wheeled bin symbol ............................................................................................................................................... 9-10

9-10
A-1 Standardized OTN layers and data units .......................................................................................................... A-5
A-2 OTN layers and data units (simplified view) ................................................................................................. A-6
A-3 OTH network example ........................................................................................................................................... A-7
A-4 Circuit ODUflex principle .................................................................................................................................. A-10
A-5 Packet ODUflex principle ................................................................................................................................... A-11
A-6 OTUk, ODUk, and OPUk overhead ............................................................................................................. A-12
A-7 OTN information structure ................................................................................................................................. A-13
A-8 OPUk frame structure .......................................................................................................................................... A-14
A-9 ODUk frame structure .......................................................................................................................................... A-16
A-10 OTUk frame structure ......................................................................................................................................... A-18
A-11 OCh structure .......................................................................................................................................................... A-20

A-20
A-12 OTN multiplex structure ..................................................................................................................................... A-21
A-13 OTN multiplex structure, additions from supplement 43 ........................................................................ A-23
A-14 OTN tandem connection monitoring (example) ......................................................................................... A-25
A-15 APS channel format .............................................................................................................................................. A-30

A-30
A-16 Basic FEC block diagram ................................................................................................................................... A-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xx Alcatel-Lucent – Internal 1830 PSS
Issue 1 July 2011
About this document
About this document
Purpose
This Product Information and Planning Guide (PIPG) provides the following information
about Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS):
• Features
• Topologies and configurations
• Product description
• Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P)
• System planning and engineering
• Ordering
• Product support
• Quality and reliability
• Technical specifications
Validity
The document is valid for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Release 4.0. The pure OCS
functionality in Release 4.0 is realized for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 and for
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36.
Documented feature set

This manual describes Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Release 4.0. For technical reasons, some
of the documented features might not be available until later software versions. For
precise information about the availability of features, please consult the Software Release
Description (SRD) that is distributed with the network element software. It provides
details of the status at the time of software delivery.
Safety information
For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at
points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to
follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Alcatel-Lucent – Internal xxi
Issue 1 July 2011
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical safety
System design
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system complies with the Food and Drug Administration’s
Center for Devices and Radiological Health (FDA/CDRH) regulations FDA/CDRH 21
CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 as a Class I and with IEC Standard 60825-1 as a Class 1
Optical Fiber Telecommunication laser product.
The system has been designed to ensure that the operating personnel are not endangered
by laser radiation during normal system operation. The safety measures specified in the
FDA/CDRH regulations and the international standards IEC Standard 60825 and DIN/EN
60825, respectively, are met.
Potential sources of danger
Beware of the following potential sources of danger which will remain despite all safety
measures taken:
• Laser radiation can cause damage to the skin and eyes.
• Laser radiation from optical transmission systems is in a wavelength range that is
invisible to the human eye.
Laser classes
The maximum output power of laser radiation depends on the type of laser diode used.
The international standards IEC Standard 60825 and DIN/EN 60825, respectively, as well
as the FDA/CDRH regulations define the maximum output power of laser radiation for
each laser class in accordance with the wavelength.
The classification scheme is based on the ability of the laser emission or the reflected
laser emission to cause injury to the eye or skin during normal operating conditions.
Laser safety instructions
During service, maintenance, or restoration, an optical fiber telecommunication system is
considered unenclosed.
Observe the following instructions to avoid exposing yourself and others to risk:
• Only authorized, trained personnel is permitted to do service, maintenance, and
restoration. All unauthorized personnel is excluded from the immediate area of the
optical fiber telecommunication systems during installation and service.
• Read the relevant descriptions in the manuals before taking equipment into operation
or conducting any installation and maintenance work on the optical port units, and
follow the instructions. Ignoring the instructions may result in hazardous laser
radiation exposure.
• Do not view directly into the laser beam with optical instruments such as a fiber
microscope, because viewing of laser emission in excess of Class 1 limits
significantly increases the risk of eye damage.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxii Alcatel-Lucent – Internal 1830 PSS
Issue 1 July 2011
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector as long as the
optical source is still switched on.
• Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber
connectors.
• In the event of doubt, check that the optical source is switched off by measuring with
an optical power meter.
Laser radiation
CAUTION
Laser hazard
Use of controls, adjustments, and procedures other than those specified herein may result
in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
Intended audience
The Product Information and Planning Guide (PIPG) is primarily intended for network
planners and engineers. In addition, others who need specific information about the
features, applications, operation, and engineering of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS find useful
information in this manual.
Conventions used
These conventions are used in this document:
Numbering
The chapters of this document are numbered consecutively. The page numbering restarts
at “1” in each chapter. To facilitate identifying pages in different chapters, the page
numbers are prefixed with the chapter number. For example, page 2-3 is the third page in
chapter 2.
Cross-references
Cross-reference conventions are identical with the conventions used for page numbering
The first number in a reference to a particular page refers to the corresponding chapter.
Keyword blocks
This document contains so-called keyword blocks to facilitate the location of specific text
passages. The keyword blocks are placed to the left of the main text and indicate the
contents of a paragraph or group of paragraphs.
Typographical conventions
The typographical conventions used in this document are described in Table 1,
“Conventions used” (p. xxiv).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Alcatel-Lucent – Internal xxiii
Issue 1 July 2011
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1 Conventions used
Appearance Description
emphasis Text that is emphasized
document titles Titles of books or other documents
file or directory names The names of files or directories
graphical user interface text Text that is displayed in a graphical user interface
keyboard keys The name of a key on the keyboard
system input Text that the user types as input to a system
system output Text that a system displays or prints
variables A value or command-line parameter that the user
provides
[] Text or a value that is optional
{value1 | value2} A choice of values or variables from which one value
{variable1 | variable2} or variable is used
Abbreviations
Abbreviations used in this document can be found in the “Glossary” unless it can be
assumed that the reader is familiar with the abbreviation.
Related information
Table 2 Information products related to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Document title Document codes
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Safety Guide 8DG60913HAAATQZZA

Provides users of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) systems with
the relevant information and safety guidelines to safeguard against personal injury.
Furthermore, the Safety Guide is useful to prevent material damage to the
equipment. The Safety Guide must be read by the responsible technical personnel
before performing relevant work on the system. The valid version of the document
must always be kept close to the equipment.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information and Planning Guide 8DG60913AAAATQZZA
Presents a detailed overview of the system, describes its applications, gives
planning requirements, engineering rules, ordering information, and technical
specifications.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS User Provisioning Guide 8DG60913BAAATQZZA

Provides step-by-step information for use in daily system operations. The manual
demonstrates how to perform system provisioning, operations, and administrative
tasks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxiv Alcatel-Lucent – Internal 1830 PSS
Issue 1 July 2011
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2 Information products related to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS (continued)
Document title Document codes
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide 8DG60913CAAATQZZA

Gives detailed information on each possible alarm message. Furthermore, it
provides procedures for routine maintenance, troubleshooting, diagnostics, and
component replacement.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide (Alcatel-Lucent 8DG60913DAAATQZZA
1830 PSS-36)
A step-by-step guide to system installation and set up. It also includes information
needed for pre-installation site planning and post-installation acceptance testing.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide (Alcatel-Lucent 8DG60913EAAATQZZA
1830 PSS-64)
A step-by-step guide to system installation and set up. It also includes information
needed for pre-installation site planning and post-installation acceptance testing.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS TL1 Command Guide 8DG60913FAAATQZZA

Describes the external TL1 interface for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS in terms of TL1
command, responses, and notification definitions.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS GMRE Command Line Interface Guide 8DG60913JAAATQZZA

Provides information about the Command Line Interface (CLI) of the GMPLS
Routing Engine (GMRE) and describes the CLI attributes and commands.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS GMPLS/GMRE Guide 8DG60913LAAATQZZA

Contains information about the GMPLS Routing Engine (GMRE) of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS; it provides a high-level functional overview of the
GMRE and describes the steps to plan and set up a GMRE-controlled network.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Quick Reference Guide 8DG60913NAAATQZZA
Provides users of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSSa streamlined, easy-to-use navigation
aid to facilitate the use of the system.
Documentation CD-ROM Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS (all manuals on a CD-ROM) 8DG60914AAAATQZZA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Software Release Description This document is delivered with the NE software.
These documents can be downloaded from the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
Site (OLCS) (https://support.alcatel-lucent.com) or through your Local Customer
Support.
Technical support
For technical support, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the
Alcatel-Lucent Support web site (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support/) for contact
information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Alcatel-Lucent – Internal xxv
Issue 1 July 2011
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatel-
lucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxvi Alcatel-Lucent – Internal 1830 PSS
Issue 1 July 2011
1 Introduction
1
Overview
Purpose
This chapter presents general information to introduce the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic
Service Switch (PSS). In Release 4.0, this includes the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 and
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 shelves.
Contents
Structure of safety statements 1-2

The Alcatel-Lucent optical networking products family 1-4
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) profile 1-8
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) network solutions 1-14
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Alcatel-Lucent – Internal 1-1
Issue 1 July 2011
Introduction Structure of safety statements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Structure of safety statements

Overview
This topic describes the components of safety statements that appear in this document.
General structure
Safety statements include the following structural elements:
B C D
CAUTION
MP L E
Lifting hazard E F
SA
Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injury
due to the size and weight of the equipment.
G
Always use three people or a lifting device to transport
and position this equipment. [ABC123]
H
Item Structure element Purpose
1 Safety alert symbol Indicates the potential for personal injury
(optional)
2 Safety symbol Indicates hazard type (optional)
3 Signal word Indicates the severity of the hazard
4 Hazard type Describes the source of the risk of damage or
injury
5 Safety message Consequences if protective measures fail
6 Avoidance message Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard
7 Identifier The reference ID of the safety statement
(optional)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Internal 1830 PSS
Issue 1 July 2011
Introduction Structure of safety statements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signal words
The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:
Signal word Meaning

DANGER Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Introduction The Alcatel-Lucent optical networking products family
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Alcatel-Lucent optical networking products family

Overview
Alcatel-Lucent offers a comprehensive range of intelligent, service-aware products
coping with operators’ diversified network transformation scenarios in core/backbone and
metro/edge networks.
Core DWDM Systems

Core Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM) systems are designed for
long-haul and ultra long-haul optical networking applications.
Available products include the following:
• Alcatel-Lucent 1625 LambdaXtreme Transport (LX)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager (LM)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS)
• Alcatel-Lucent WaveStar ® OLS 1.6T
Management of Optical Networks

The management systems provide unified multiservice, multi-technology, multivendor,
end-to-end management for optical networks.
• Alcatel-Lucent 1350 Optical Management System (OMS)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1340 Integrated Network Controller (INC)
Metro WDM Systems

Metro Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM) systems are designed for access, metro,
and regional optical networking applications.
• Alcatel-Lucent 1692 Metrospan Edge (Metro CWDM System)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1694 Enhanced Optical Networking
• Alcatel-Lucent 1695 Wavelength Services Manager
• Alcatel-Lucent 1696 Metrospan (Metro WDM)
Multiservice SDH/SONET
SDH/SONET-based multiservice metro systems with integrated data-aware features
provide multiprotocol aggregation and cross connect functionality.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Alcatel-Lucent 1642 Edge Multiplexer
• Alcatel-Lucent 1642 Edge Multiplexer Compact (EMC)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1643 Access Multiplexer
• Alcatel-Lucent 1643 Access Multiplexer Small
• Alcatel-Lucent 1645 Access Multiplexer Compact (AMC)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1650 SMC STM-1/4 Multiservice Metro Node
• Alcatel-Lucent 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal
• Alcatel-Lucent 1660 SM STM-16/64 Optical Multi-Service Node for Metro
Applications (OMSN)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1662 SMC STM-4/16 Compact Multiservice Node for Metro
Networks (SMC)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1663 Add Drop Multiplexer-universal
• Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer (DMX)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore (DMXplore)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend
• Alcatel-Lucent 1671 Service Connect (SC)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1677 SONET Link
Optical core switching

This area includes scalable optical systems for metro core and backbone applications,
supporting add/drop multiplexer, broad- and wideband SDH/SONET and L2 switching
functionalities from ring to meshed topologies, based on ASON/GMPLS dynamic control
plane.
• Alcatel-Lucent 1675 Lambda Unite MultiService Switch (MSS)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch PSS-64
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch PSS-36
Optical CPE
Alcatel-Lucent optical customer premises equipment provides optical multiservice access
to medium-large businesses.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore
• Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-3, TSS-5)
Optical Ethernet
Gigabit ethernet MAN products that feature extensive routing capabilities, flexible
connectivity options and sophisticated management tools.
• Alcatel-Lucent 1650 SMC STM-1/4 Multiservice Metro Node
• Alcatel-Lucent 1660 SM STM-16/64 Optical Multi-Service Node for Metro
Applications (OMSN)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1662 SMC STM-4/16 Compact Multiservice Node for Metro
Networks (SMC)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1663 Add Drop Multiplexer-universal
• Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer (DMX)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore (DMXplore)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend
• Alcatel-Lucent 1671 Service Connect (SC)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1677 SONET Link
• Alcatel-Lucent 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch family (TSS)
Packet Transport
Multi-service packet transport products support any mix of traffic from 100% circuits to
100% packets.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch family (TSS)
• Alcatel-Lucent 9500 Microwave Packet Radio (MPR)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Introduction Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) profile
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) profile

Introduction
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 64/36 (1830 PSS-64/1830 PSS-36) is a
new class of optical-core switching platform with terabit capacity and Optical Transport
Network (OTN) support for the next-generation intelligent optical core.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 starts with 1.9 Tb/s in a 64-half-slot single chassis
prepared to scale its universal switch matrix.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 starts with 960 Gb/s in a single chassis.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) supports multiple transport
networking options, including Carrier Ethernet and SDH/SONET, and offers generalized
multiprotocol label switching/automatically switched optical network (GMPLS/ASON)
control plane intelligence for added-value applications such as advanced restoration,
resource virtualization, and cross-layer automation. Providing seamless integration into
existing assets, this enables highly resilient transport and dynamic bandwidth
provisioning across multiple transport networking layers for the highest network
efficiency.
Key innovations
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS defines the next generation of optical switching platforms for
the converged backbone. It provides:
• Two single chassis with 960 Gb/s Tb/s and 1.9 Tb/s full-duplex universal switch
matrixes.
• High-density architecture based on innovative 65 nm silicon technology.
• OTN with multiple transport networking options, including Optical Transport
Hierarchy (OTH), WDM, Carrier Ethernet and SDH/SONET.
• Support for any mix of client traffic, including 40 Gb/s signals, Gigabit Ethernet (GE)
and 10GE, OTH Optical Channel Data Unit-k (ODUk), and SDH/SONET up to
STM-64/OC-192.
• Efficient bandwidth management capabilities at the sub-wavelength level, for high
bit-rate traffic scaling up to 40 Gb/s and prepared for 100 Gb/s.
• GMPLS control plane intelligence, with dynamic bandwidth provisioning across the
OTN network layer.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-1 The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-2 The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36
Customer benefits
From a network provider's perspective, the following advantages are the most important:
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS provides very high capacity in a scalable and sustainable
manner to deliver next-generation IP services at the lowest cost per bit
• It avoids the under-utilization or over-build of optical and routing assets and allows
traffic forwarding at the most economical layer.
• It leverages operational models for smooth evolutionary upgrading to higher-capacity
OTN
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS enables the transparent transport of multiple operators’
traffic, all with end-to-end control and quality assurance
• It reduces operating expenditures (OPEX) with a high-density, low-power per bit
design.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Converged backbone transformation
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64/36 supports the Alcatel-Lucent Converged Backbone
Transformation Solution, a key component of the Alcatel-Lucent High Leverage
Network ™ architecture in combination with the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service Router.
Future releases of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS will provide integrated photonic
applications (Metro and Core DWDM, point-to-point links and photonic-based OCh
switching) with optical core switching (electrical bandwidth management and service
grooming on sub-lambda granularity) combining PSS-64, PSS-36, PSS-32 & PSS-16
shelves
IP traffic grooming options

Flexible IP traffic grooming options at the OTN layer, including port-level and
sub-port-level grooming, enable efficient core-router traffic offload onto the optical
network and support scaling of the IP backbone.
Low-cost traffic transport

Designed to ensure efficient bandwidth management and traffic forwarding at the most
economical transport layer, the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64/36 meets the exaflood
challenge of explosive service growth by facilitating traffic transport at the lowest cost
per bit - while ensuring the highest availability and resiliency for service quality
assurance. The advanced GMPLS-based automation capabilities expand operational
efficiencies across the optical and IP layers and help minimize service providers' total cost
of ownership (TCO).
GMPLS control plane

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64/36 enables automated operations and resilience with an
integrated Generalized Multi-Protocol Label Switching (GMPLS) control plane. The
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64/36 also increases network monetization by reducing the
resources required for protection and freeing bandwidth for revenue-producing traffic.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Green networking
With the use of technology innovations, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS brings a number of
eco-benefits in addition to CAPEX and OPEX advantages. Specifically, it provides for:
• Lower network power consumption as the platform manages traffic at the most
economical transport layer by combining silicon innovation, OTN bandwidth
management capabilities and GMPLS-enabled cross layer intelligence for resource
optimization
• Delegation of several management processes to the control plane for automation
including discovery processes for network topology, resources and services,
end-to-end connection routing, flow-through service provisioning, and mesh
restoration
• Intelligent restoration mechanisms boosting network reliability, allowing network
failures and fiber cuts to be accumulated and fixed in batches instead of one at a time.
This allowance for planned network maintenance activities reduces the cost of on-site
maintenance as well as travel-related CO2 emissions
• Fewer site visits for provisioning
• A smaller footprint
• “Green” FPGA images – for port groups which are not used, an image is loaded that
causes nearly no power consumption
• Pluggable optical modules that only need to be installed if in use or planned to go into
use
The Optical Transport Network (OTN) approach

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) helps network providers to introduce
the scalable, unified photonic and electronic transport networking as defined in the
Optical Transport Network (OTN) hierarchy.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-3 OTN basic principles
The Optical Channel (OCh) provides end-to-end bandwidth management for a

wavelength signal in the photonic domain.
The Optical Data Unit (ODU) provides end-to-end bandwidth management for a
sub-wavelength signal in the electronic domain. The ODU is a fixed-sized container with
in-band OAM tools for quality supervision and SLA assurance. The ODU functions as
primary bearer for client traffic.
Higher-order ODU (HO-ODU) transparently carries multiple (multiplexed) lower-order
ODUs which can transport 1.25 Gb/s, 2.5 Gb/s, 10 Gb/s or 40 Gb/s client signal rates.
For more detailed information, see Appendix A, “An OTN overview”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Introduction Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) network
solutions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) network

solutions
Solutions with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
The following figure shows different possible positions of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS in
modern transport networks:
• As part of a high-capacity OTN core network (backbone)
• As interface to high-speed Ethernet applications
• The OTN core network in addition supports an automatic switched optical network
(ASON) on the ODUk layer.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports the following network ports:
• OTM-0.2
• OTM-0.2e
• OTM-0.3
• OTU-n.2 (colored interfaces with DWDM-XFPs)
• OTU-n.2e (colored interfaces with DWDM-XFPs)
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports the following client ports:
• 1 Gb/s Ethernet (GMP mapping) mapped into ODU0
• 10 Gb/s Ethernet with the subtypes
– 10GE-LAN (GFP-F according to G.798 and G.806) - mapped into ODU2
– 10GE-LAN with Preamble Transparency (so-called AMCC, according to G.709) -
mapped into ODU2
– 10GE-LAN bit-transparent (according G.709) - mapped into ODU2e
• 2.5 Gb/s STM-16 / OC-48
• 10 Gb/s STM-64 / OC-192
• OTM-0.2
• OTM-0.2e
• OTM-0.3
The Ethernet and STM / OC client ports are transparently mapped into ODUk.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
solutions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS high-level positioning
OTH network
Legend: 1830 PSS
Network ports
g-pipg-0006
Client ports
Regional interconnects of an OTN backbone

In this example, the OTN backbone of a complex network is built with Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS network elements. They act as gateway to SDH/SONET regions or to other
OTN networks.
Advantages of this architecture include the following:
• The OTN backbone is flexible in interconnecting existing regional networks.
• The OTN backbone is independent of service types.
• Different services are aggregated into OTN granularity.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
solutions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• The SDH/SONET ↔ OTN gateway is realized in a single node. In the current
software release, the SDH or the SONET mode can be configured on node level.
• 1+1 ODUk path protection (SNC/N) on the network ports is available in the current
software release, the system is prepared to support additional protection mechanisms
in future releases.
• 1+1 ODUk non-intrusive client protection (ODUk SNC/Nc) is supported on the client
ports.
Figure 1-5 Application example: Regional interconnects of an OTN backbone
OTH network
SDH/SONET network
SNC/N protection
SDH/SONET network
n
protectio
SNC/Nc
SN
C/
N
pr
ot
ec
tio
n
OTH network
Legend: 1830 PSS
Network ports
Client ports
g-pipg-0006-a
For a detailed description ASON/GMPLS-based restoration refer to the Alcatel-Lucent

1830 PSS GMPLS/GMRE Guide.
Interworking with existing photonic networks

In this example, two Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS are connected via an existing photonic
network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
solutions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-6 Application example: Interworking with existing photonic network
OTU2
Photonic network Legend: 1830 PSS R4.0
Photonic switch,
for example 1830 PSS R3.5
g-pipg-0006-b
OTU2
Interworking can be done either with OTU-0.2, OTU-0.2e or with colored DWDM-XFPs
OTU-x.2, OTU-x.2e or with OTU-0.3.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
solutions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
2 Features
2
Overview
Purpose
This chapter briefly describes the features of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch (PSS) in the current software release.
For more information about the physical design features and about the applicable
standards, see Chapter 7, “System planning and engineering” and Chapter 10, “Technical
specifications”.
Standards compliance
Alcatel-Lucent's Ethernet, OTN, SDH, and SONET products comply with the relevant
European Telecommunication Standardization Institute (ETSI), Telcordia ®, and
International Telecommunications Union – Telecommunication standardization sector
(ITU-T) standards. Important functions defined in OTN, SDH, and SONET standards
such as the OTN multiplexing structure, SDH and SONET client signals, and the
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning (OAM&P) functions are
implemented in Alcatel-Lucent's product families.
Alcatel-Lucent's intelligent control plane, implemented in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is
based on standards discussed in the ITU-T, the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF)
Generalized Multi Protocol Label Switching (GMPLS) Forum and the Optical Internet
Forum (OIF).
Alcatel-Lucent is heavily involved in various study groups with ITU-T, Telcordia ®, and
ETSI work creating and maintaining the latest worldwide Ethernet, OTN, SDH, and
SONET standards. Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS complies with all relevant and latest
Telcordia ®, ETSI, and ITU-T standards and supports Ethernet, OTN, SDH, and SONET
protocols in a single hardware-software configuration.
Reference
For details, also see “Conformance statements” (p. 9-2) and Chapter 10, “Technical
specifications”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Contents
Physical interfaces 2-3

OTN interfaces 2-4
SDH/SONET interfaces 2-5
Data interfaces 2-6
Timing interfaces 2-7
Operations interfaces 2-8
Power interfaces and grounding 2-10
Transmission features 2-11
Supported mappings 2-12
Cross-connection features 2-14
Ethernet features 2-15
Forward error correction 2-20
Path protection 2-21
Overhead access and monitoring 2-22
Equipment features 2-24
Environment, ecology, and safety 2-25
Equipment protection 2-26
Optical interface modules 2-27
Equipment reports 2-28
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning features 2-29
Operation and management 2-30
Monitoring and diagnostic functions 2-32
Stability 2-35
External communications features 2-36
Control plane features 2-37
The control plane concept 2-38
List of features 2-40
Port types 2-42
Standardized network interfaces 2-44
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Overview
Physical interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Physical interfaces
Overview
Purpose
This section provides information about all kinds of physical external interfaces of
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS. For detailed technical data and optical parameters of the
interfaces, see Chapter 10, “Technical specifications”.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports a variety of configurations as described in the previous
chapter, due to its flexible architecture within the same subrack with a single common
SW load. The choice of synchronous and data interfaces described below provides
outstanding transmission flexibility and integration capabilities.
Contents
OTN interfaces 2-4

SDH/SONET interfaces 2-5
Data interfaces 2-6
Timing interfaces 2-7
Power interfaces and grounding 2-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features OTN interfaces
Physical interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OTN interfaces
In the current software release, the following physical OTN interfaces are available:
• 10 Gb/s OTU2 / OTM-0.2 line interfaces
• 10 Gb/s OTU2e / OTM-0.2e line interfaces
• with colored XFPs
– 10 Gb/s OTU2 / OTM-n.2 line interfaces
– 10 Gb/s OTU2e / OTM-n.2e line interfaces
• 40 Gb/s OTU3 / OTM-0.3 line interfaces
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS allows the “black and white” and “colored” transmission of
OTM-x.2 signals from and to WDM equipment with or without FEC, where x may be 0
or any color. For this purpose, the tunable DWDM XFP (X11MDTNC) can be used.
Reference
See “Optical interfaces (TDM)” (p. 10-3) for detailed technical data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features SDH/SONET interfaces
Physical interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDH/SONET interfaces
Physical interfaces
The following physical SDH/SONET interfaces are available:
• 2.5 Gb/s STM-16 / OC-48 line interfaces
• 10 Gb/s STM-64 / OC-192 line interfaces
Reference
See “Optical interfaces (TDM)” (p. 10-3) for detailed technical data.
Supported SDH/SONET functionality

The system supports the transparent mapping of SDH/SONET client signals into suitable
Optical Channel Data Units (ODUk):
• STM-16 transparently mapped into ODU1
• OC-48 transparently mapped into ODU1
• STM-64 transparently mapped into ODU2
• OC-192 transparently mapped into ODU2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Data interfaces
Physical interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Data interfaces
In the current software release, the following data interfaces are available:
• 1 Gb/s Ethernet (1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, and 1000BASE-ZX)
• 10 Gb/s Ethernet (10GBASE-LR, 10GBASE-ER, 10GBASE-ZR)
Reference
See “Optical interfaces (Ethernet)” (p. 10-5) for detailed technical data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Timing interfaces
Physical interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Timing interfaces
External timing inputs
Although external timing inputs are prepared for potential future applications, they are
not supported in the present release; see also “Synchronization” (p. 4-79).
Note: Do not use the external timing inputs on the Power Supply, Filter, and Clock
Interface Cards (PSF3T8) of the PSS-64 subrack or Power Filter Cards (PFC) of the
PSS-36 subrack!
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Operations interfaces
Physical interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Status LEDs
LEDs on the front of each unit are used to signal and locate defects. The corresponding
alarms and fault status are forwarded to the management system interface.
For the meaning of the LEDs, see:
• “LED of the Fan Unit (FAN3T8)” (p. 5-60)
• “LEDs of the High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP)” (p. 5-61)
• “LEDs of the Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8)” (p. 5-62)
• “LEDs of the Power Filter Card (PFC)” (p. 5-64)
• “LEDs of the First-Level Controller (FLC)” (p. 5-66)
• “LEDs of the agnostic matrix cards ” (p. 5-69)
• “LED of the I/O cards” (p. 5-71)
External control interfaces
Table 2-1 Summary of external control interfaces
Interface/control designation Location Usage
ACO FLC Alarm cut-off button

OAMP FLC LAN interface for the management communications network
(MCN)
SCN/AUX, VoIP Agnostic matrix cards DCN LAN interface, prepared for future software releases
DPRT1, DPRT2 Agnostic matrix cards LAN interface for debug purposes
ES1, ES2 Agnostic matrix cards Prepared LAN communication to drop shelves, not used in current
software release
E1, E2 Agnostic matrix cards Prepared LAN communication to extension shelves, not used in
current software release
HPCFAP MON PSF3T8 Interfaces for HPCFAP supervision
TRU MON PFC Interfaces for TRU supervision
HOUSEKEEPING IN, OUT PSF3T8 Housekeeping, prepared for future releases

PFC
LTEST FLC LED test button
In the current software release, this button has no effect.
R FLC Reset button
R Agnostic matrix cards Reset button
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Operations interfaces
Physical interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-1 Summary of external control interfaces (continued)
Interface/control designation Location Usage
RA/RL PSF3T8 If the PSF3T8 or PFC is positioned as PSF_A, this interface

PFC provides four output line for the rack top lamps.
If the PSF3T8 or PFC is positioned as PSF_B, this interface
provides eight output lines for remote alarms.
DSER1, DSER2 Agnostic matrix cards Serial interface for debug purposes
SYNC PSF3T8 External timing input

PFC Do not use these external timing inputs, they are prepared for
potential future applications but not supported in the present
release; see also “Synchronization” (p. 4-79).
USB FLC Disk-on-key interface, used for software installation

CIT FLC Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC)
LAN interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Power interfaces and grounding
Physical interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power interfaces and grounding

Power supply
Two redundant power supply inputs (BATT A, BATT B) are available per subrack. The
supply voltages are –48 V and –60 V nominal. Operation range is –40 V to –72 V.
The system powering and grounding meets the ETSI ETS Standard 300132-2, Telcordia ®
Requirement GR-1089-CORE, “Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety –
Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment” and GR-499-CORE.
For detailed information about the power consumption see “Power planning” (p. 7-3) and
“Weight and power consumption” (p. 10-18).
System grounding
The system grounding philosophy follows the ETSI Standard 300253 (mesh ground with
the battery return connected to ground) and the Telcordia ® Requirement GR-1089-CORE
(meshed isolated bonding network).
The system provides a low-impedance bond to the protective grounding system. Battery
returns and chassis ground are isolated from each other. An electrical frame-grounding
terminal at a location on the rack is easily accessible to the installer.
ESD bonding points

The subrack provides two ESD bonding points at the front side of the system. It is
possible to connect to these points without removal of any EMC protection mechanisms.
Reference
For more detailed information, see “PSS-64 Power distribution concept” (p. 4-80) and
“PSS-36 Power distribution concept” (p. 4-83), respectively.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section gives an overview of the transmission-related features of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS). For more detailed information on the
implementation in the NE, see Chapter 4, “Product description”.
Contents
Supported mappings 2-12

Cross-connection features 2-14
Ethernet features 2-15
Forward error correction 2-20
Path protection 2-21
Overhead access and monitoring 2-22
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Supported mappings
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Supported mappings
The following table summarizes the mappings supported in the current software release of
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS. For detailed information about the I/O cards and their features,
see Chapter 4, “Product description”:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Supported mappings
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
X
24ET1G
X
24ANM
2AN40F1
X
X
X
10ET10G
10OT10G
X
X
X
X
10AN10G
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I/O cards
Supported mappings
10GBASE-R ↔ ODU2 with Preamble

ODU2 ↔ STM-64/OC-192
STM-64/OC-192 ↔ ODU2
OTU2 ↔ ODU2 ↔ ODU0
OTU2 ↔ ODU2 ↔ ODU1
STM-16/OC-48 ↔ ODU1
10GBASE-R ↔ ODU2e
10GBASE-R ↔ ODU2
1GBASE-X ↔ ODU0
OTU2e ↔ ODU2e
OTU3 ↔ ODU0
OTU2 ↔ ODU2
Transparency
Table 2-2
Mapping
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Cross-connection features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cross-connection features
Supported OTN cross-connection types and rates
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports the following OTN cross-connection rates:
• ODU0
• ODU1
• ODU2
• ODU2e
The following types of cross-connections are supported:
• Bidirectional point-to-point
• Unidirectional point-to-point
• Unidirectional point-to-multi-point (1:N broadcast, N ≤ 2)
Full non-blocking grooming is possible for any and all ODUi/j, and full non-blocking
connectivity is given for ODUk of the same level (i = j) across all I/O cards.
Switching takes place on lower-order ODUk level, with k = 1, 2. Higher-order ODU
signals are terminated or are handled as lower-order ODU by definition (see also
Appendix A, “An OTN overview”).
Transparent mapping of SDH/SONET into ODUk

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports the following transparent mappings:
• STM64T (STM-64 transparently mapped into ODU2)
• OC192T (OC-192 transparently mapped into ODU2)
• STM-16T (STM-16 transparently mapped into ODU1)
• OC-48T (OC-48 transparently mapped into ODU1)
System switching capacity

The system switching capacity depends on the installed type of agnostic matrix card. For
a detailed description of the switching capacity see “Agnostic matrix cards (MT960C,
MT1T9)” (p. 4-39).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Ethernet features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ethernet features
Introduction
The Ethernet interfaces provide flexible Ethernet over OTH transport. This section
describes in brief some related features of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS.
Transport of Ethernet frames in OTH structures

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports Ethernet (LAN PHY and WAN PHY) termination and
mapping of Ethernet (MAC) frames into ODUksignals.
The supported mappings for Ethernet LAN PHY are listed in Table 2-2, “Supported
mappings” (p. 2-13).
For Ethernet WAN PHY, 10 Gb/s signals are supported. The STM64/OC192 frames can
be mapped into ODU2 signals using asynchronous or bit synchronous CBR mapping.
This mapping mode is identical to transparent SDH/SONET mapping into ODUk.
Defects that are detected by the GFP adaptation/termination functions can be reported as
alarms.
Figure 2-1 Ethernet in OTH structures
OTH
Ethernet GFP
10 GbE LAN PHY mapping
ODUk
ODUk terminated
g-pipg-0025
Service types and services

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports the Ethernet line service type (E-line) as defined by
the Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF).
Ethernet private line (EPL)
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports Ethernet private line (EPL) services of type 1
according to ITU-Recommendation G.8011.1 for port-based point-to-point transport. For
EPL there is a flow control for the 10GE mapping to ODU2. Incoming VLAN-tagged
Ethernet frames are always transported “end-to-end” in a transparent way. Specifically,
L2 control frames and LCAP frames are always tunneled except for flow control. In case
of transparent mappings (no GFP mapped) all L2 control frames go through.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using a single-stage multiplexing, the Ethernet packets are mapped to the transport
network trail (OTH) in a 1-to-1 correlation.
Link pass through (LPT)

The GbE and 10 GbE Ethernet interfaces support defects detection, triggers, and
consequent actions to provide link pass through (LPT) functionality.
LPT is supported by all Ethernet ports.
The intention of LPT is to propagate failure information of the LAN link or WAN link to
the remote end in order to inform the remote end Ethernet equipment about the failure. So
in principle a behavior is achieved as if the Ethernet-over-SDH/SONET/OTH equipment
is not present and the Ethernet devices at both ends of such a link are coupled directly by
a fibre.
The basic principles are as follows:
• In case of a LAN failure (e.g. LANLOS detected) this failure is propagated over the
WAN link using CSF indications to the remote end. There the reception of such CSF
indications leads to switching off the LAN output.
• In case of a WAN failure (e.g. GFPLOF or SSF) this failure is propagated to the
related LAN port where the output is switched off.
• When detecting a WAN failure an indication about the failure can also given in
backward direction using CSF indications. This results in a behavior similar to that of
a pure Ethernet link where a LAN failure may also lead to signaling back the failure
by e.g. switching off the LAN Tx signal or sending a Remote Fault indication in
backward direction.
• In case of applying consequent actions in backward direction some precautions are
needed to avoid deadlock situations: E.g. if at the WAN side a CSF indication is
received and now a LAN failure in opposite direction occurs then CSF insertion in
opposite direction must be suppressed.
• To get full flexibility the consequent action to insert CSF in backward direction due to
a WAN failure should be controllable by a provisionable parameter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows where and in which direction consequent actions can be
applied.
Figure 2-2 Link pass through mode
g-pipg-0027
Whether or not these consequent actions are applied depends on actual configuration
settings and the chosen model of LPT.
• LAN → LAN
Switch off output temporary if a LAN defect is detected or enter autonegotionation
state or send Remote Fault Indication (RFI).
• LAN → WAN
Insert CSF as long as a LAN defect is present and CSF suppression is not active due
to a failure condition in opposite direction.
• WAN → WAN
No consequent action or insert CSF as long as a WAN defect is present and CSF
suppression is not active due to a defect condition in opposite direction by a
provisionable parameter.
• WAN → LAN
Disable the output or send Local Fault indication as long as CSF is received or a
WAN defect is present. In addition a provisionable hold-off timer may be used to
delay the consequent action in case of WAN defect.
The behavior of LPT is mainly controlled by the provisionable parameter Client Signal
Fail Propagation.
CSF/SSF consequent actions
For all Ethernet ports, the consequent actions related to client signal fail (CSF) and server
signal fail (SSF) events can be provisioned separately. One possible consequent action is
the laser shutdown (ALS).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports the insertion of remote fault indication (RFI) and link
failure indication (LFI) information as CSF consequent action.
Consequent Action for LPT via OTN (ODUCSF)
Transparent Ethernet Mappings (like for 10GbE in ODU2E) don't use a GFP layer and
can't use the GFPCSF mechanisms to propagate information from one side to the other.
For these cases a CSF mechanism via the ODU overhead was introduced in G.709
(section 17.1).
LPT signaling via the ODUCSF bit is used for the following Data Mappings:
• 10 GbE - CBR - ODU2e
• 1 GbE - TTT - ODU0
LPT acts only in forward direction for
• LAN → WAN
• WAN → LAN
Ethernet flow control

In compliance to IEEE Standard 802.3x, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports Ethernet flow
control.
According to the provisioning, it is possible to enable or disable sending of pause frames
(default condition is to send out pause frames)
Maximum transmission unit (MTU)

The maximum transmission unit (MTU) supported by Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is MTU
= 9242 Byte (“jumbo” frames).
Forwarding
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports packet forwarding at wire speed for any size of
packets (including all minimum size packets) and unicast traffic forwarding of Ethernet
frames.
Near end facility loopback

The Ethernet ports support physical loopbacks towards the attached cable (see
“Loopbacks” (p. 5-18)).
Port status report

For each Ethernet port, the operator can retrieve important parameters like speed,
MAU/MDI status, and loopback status (see “Reports” (p. 5-40)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The system counts received and transmitted packets. The operator can see current
counters and historic count results.
GFP CSF (client signal fail)

The system is able to detect a client signal fail (CSF) indication which has been inserted
in the upstream equipment due to a fiber failure (for example a fiber cut) or equipment
failure, signal such event on the remote peer and take consequent actions as appropriate.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Forward error correction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Forward error correction

Overview
Forward error correction (FEC) makes it possible to lower the bit error ratio, of an optical
line signal by adding redundant information. This redundant information can then be used
to correct bit errors that unavoidably occur when an optical line signal is transmitted over
longer distances over an optical fiber.
Implementation
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports FEC as specified in ITU-T Recommendation G.709
(see also “Error correction in OTN” (p. A-32)). The error detection and correction
functions are realized by designated hardware on the respective I/O cards directly.
On OTM-0.2 level, the FEC mechanism can be configured as follows:
• no FEC
• Reed-Solomon (255,239) FEC according to ITU-T Recommendation G.709
• Alcatel-Lucent proprietary EFEC according to ITU-T Recommendation G.975.1
On OTM-0.2e level, the FEC mechanism can be configured as follows:
• no FEC
On OTM-0.3 level, the FEC mechanism can be configured as follows:
• no FEC
Enhanced forward error correction

Using the Alcatel-Lucent proprietary enhanced forward error correction (EFEC) method,
a net coding gain of 8.5 dB at 10–13 can be reached. The redundancy ratio (6.69 %) is the
same as in the standard Reed-Solomon (255,239) code.
EFEC conforms to the requirements for the Two Interleaved Extended BCH (1020,988)
super FEC code as described in Section I.9 of ITU-T Recommendation G.975.1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Path protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Path protection
ODU protection types
In the current software release, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports the following ODU
protection types:
• SNC/N - ODUk SNC/N based on ODUkP/T non-intrusive monitoring
• SNC/Nc - ODUk SNC/Nc based on RS-NIM
Reference
For additional details, see “Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP)” (p. 5-48).
Unprotected operation
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports the unprotected operation for all transmission
facilities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Overhead access and monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overhead access and monitoring

OTN overhead
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports the OTN overhead access and generation as specified
in ITU-T Recommendation G.709.
The system can access and monitor the following overhead information:
• OPUk:
– PSI
• ODUk:
– TTI
– BIP-8
– BDI
– BEI
– STAT
– TCM TTI
– TCM BIP-8
– TCM BDI
– TCM BEI
– TCM STAT
– GCC1
• OTUk section
– TTI
– BIP-8
– BDI
– BEI/BIAE
– IAE
Trail trace identifier management
Using the respective overhead bytes, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports trail trace
identifier management on OTU and ODU level. Access to operator-specific bytes is
enabled. Trail trace signals are transmitted and processed on a 64-byte basis.
TCM levels (ODUk)
The system supports the generation and termination of three TCM levels per port and per
layer. This is provisionable for any ODUk entity whether the ODUk entity is terminated
or connected through the matrix. If the ODUk is connected, then only up to two client
side layers (client facing sink/source) and one matrix side layer (that is, matrix facing
sink/source) are provisionable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Overhead access and monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
It is possible to provision a TCM layer but not terminate the layer. The system allows for
non intrusive monitoring (that is, ingress and egress are supported).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Overview
Equipment features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment features
Overview
Purpose
This section provides information about Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
(PSS).
Contents
Environment, ecology, and safety 2-25

Equipment protection 2-26
Optical interface modules 2-27
Equipment reports 2-28
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Environment, ecology, and safety
Equipment features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Environment, ecology, and safety

Sustainable development
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system is designed to meet the company-wide
Alcatel-Lucent standards for sustainable development. In addition, it complies with the
requirements defined in the latest international standards.
Environmental conditions
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is designed in accordance with the following standards:
• Telcordia ® Requirement GR-63-CORE, (NEBS ™ Requirement) “Physical
Protection”, level 3 for frame-level design
• Telcordia ® Requirement GR-78, “Generic Requirements for the Physical Design and
Manufacture of Telecommunications Products and Equipment”
• ETSI Standard Series EN 300 019, “Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental
conditions and environmental tests for telecommunications equipment”
See “Environmental conditions” (p. 7-7) for additional details.
Safety
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS complies with all relevant international safety standards. See
“Conformance statements” (p. 9-2) for additional details.
Easy installation and maintenance

Installation and maintenance of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is possible in an easy way
throughout the product’s life time without major risk of damages or failures. The plug-in
units can be pulled and plugged without any impact on the function of the other units of
the system. The installation and maintenance procedures are simple to avoid the need of
product-specific skills and training. The procedures are time saving to limit the risk of
mistakes and cost during service. .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Equipment protection
Equipment features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment protection
Transmission plane reliability
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system provides 99.999 % of reliability across its
transmission plane complying with Telcordia ® Requirement GR-418-CORE and
GR-499-CORE if the necessary network protection and equipment protection schemes are
set up.
Protected units
The following components of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS work in 1+1 equipment
protection schemes:
• Agnostic matrix cards (MT960C or MT1T9)
A 1+1 protection switch of the agnostic matrix cards is performed within 50 ms.
Manual switching works hitless.
• First-Level Controllers (FLC)
• PSS-64 Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8)
• PSS-36 Power filter card (PFC)
No far-end alarm is being generated when the failed resource is replaced by a new one.
Reference
See “Equipment protection switching ” (p. 5-55) for more detailed information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Optical interface modules
Equipment features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical interface modules

Overview
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports client port cards consisting of a parent board which
can be equipped with field-replaceable optical interface modules. The “ANY” card
concept allows a mixture of, for example, OTN, SDH/SONET, and Ethernet ports using a
single client port card, if certain configuration rules are followed.
An optical interface module is a replaceable unit with a receiver and transmitter function
providing the optical port. Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS optical interface modules are “hot
pluggable” (field-replaceable), that means, the interface modules can be inserted or
removed while the parent board is in operation, without affecting the service of other
interface modules on the same parent board.
Advantages
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS optical interface modules provide excellent initial CAPEX
saving opportunities, as only the currently required number of ports needs to be
purchased. An additional advantage of this flexible interface lies in ease and cost
reduction when it comes to maintenance and repair activities.
The number of modules inserted into the parent board can be varied flexibly between zero
and the maximum number of sockets.
Types of optical interface modules

Depending on the type of parent board, two basic types of module architectures can be
used:
• Extended form-factor pluggable (XFP) transceivers
• Small form-factor pluggable (SFP) transceivers
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS optical modules are marked by the manufacturer, and they
are checked upon insertion, in order to protect from accidental insertion of wrong
modules. Alcatel-Lucent can guarantee the full functionality and warranty only for the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-specific modules.
Reference
See “Available optical modules” (p. 4-77) for detailed information about module types.
The possible combinations of client port cards and optical modules is summarized in
Table 4-3, “List of optical modules” (p. 4-9). Technical data can be found in
“Transmission parameters” (p. 10-3).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Equipment reports
Equipment features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment reports
Equipment inventory
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS automatically maintains an inventory of the following
information of each installed circuit pack:
• Identifier of the circuit pack manufacturer
• Alcatel-Lucent mnemonic
• CLEI ™ code
• Alcatel-Lucent part number (APN)
• Identifier of the circuit pack factory manufacturer
• Serial number
• The date the EPROM was written
You can obtain this information by an inventory request command.
Equipment failure reports

Failure reports are generated for equipment faults and can be forwarded through the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC) and Alcatel-Lucent
1350 OMS interfaces.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Overview
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning
features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operations, administration, maintenance, and

provisioning features
Overview
Purpose
This section provides information about interfaces for Operations, Administration,
Maintenance, and Provisioning (OAM&P) activities and tools, and about the monitoring
and diagnostics features of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS).
Contents
Operation and management 2-30

Monitoring and diagnostic functions 2-32
Stability 2-35
External communications features 2-36
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Operation and management
features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operation and management

Local craft terminal
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is locally managed by the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero
Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC), a craft terminal running on the First-Level Controller
(FLC). The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC graphical user interface runs on a standalone
PC that is connected to the network element through a LAN interface. Using the gateway
NE (GNE) functionality, the operator can also connect to other network elements if
communication to them is enabled.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC graphical user interface can also be started from within
Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS provides TCP service for end-to-end communication with the
Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS and the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC through an IP-access
network.
In an alternative configuration the ZIC server sw also works as Craft Terminal (CT) on a
PC.
Reference
For more detailed information, see “The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)” (p. 5-59).
Network management
The Alcatel-Lucent 1350 Optical Management System (OMS) fully supports
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36.
Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS is a network management system that provides unified
end-to-end network management and operational support for all network element
products in the Alcatel-Lucent's Optics portfolio. It provides a common management
platform for end-to-end operations, including service provisioning over multi-technology
optical infrastructures (SDH/SONET, Carrier Ethernet, WDM, ROADM) and OSS/BSS
integration. Integrated management for accelerated delivery of services over a subset of
the whole Alcatel-Lucent Optics portfolio across multitechnology network layers (time
division multiplexing [TDM], WDM, packets): SONET and 1850 TSS products.
Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS can be connected to the network element through a LAN
interface or through GCC.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS can also be managed by Alcatel-Lucent 1340 INC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Operation and management
features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Simultaneous use
It is possible to use the Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
simultaneously on the same network element. Up to 30 sessions are possible at the same
time.
TL1 features
The network management interface for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is based primarily on the
Transaction Language No. 1 (TL1). The TL1 interface supports all transactions necessary
to provision and maintain the system.
The TL1 implementation complies with the following standards:
• Telcordia ® Requirement GR-199-CORE, “Operations Application Messages -
Memory Administration Messages”
• Telcordia ® Requirement GR-831-CORE ,“Operations Application Messages -
Language For Operations Application Messages”
• Telcordia ® Requirement GR-833-CORE, “Network Maintenance - Network Element
and Transport Surveillance Messages”
Proprietary components which are also based on the TL1 syntax accomplish functions
specific for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS TL1 Command Guide (TL1CG) contains a complete
reference of all TL1 commands and messages.
All TL1 transactions are logged in the general event log.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Monitoring and diagnostic functions
features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Monitoring and diagnostic functions

General approach
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS provides diagnosis features to cover all operation related failure
scenarios and actions needed for recovery from that defect.
Temperature surveillance
The subrack temperature is measured constantly at various locations. If it crosses a
predefined value, an over-temperature alarm will be generated.
Temperature emergency switch off

The temperature emergency switch off is implemented to avoid damaging of circuit packs
by high temperatures.
In case a critical temperature is exceeded for:
• I/O packs:
I/O packs are switched-off
• 1st matrix pack:
1st matrix pack is switched-off
• 2nd matrix pack
the whole system is switched-off.
Switched-off packs do not go back to normal operations, after temperature is ok
Performance monitoring
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS monitors performance parameters for 24-hours and 15-minutes
intervals on the OTH, SDH, SONET and Ethernet transmission interfaces, so monitoring
can be full time for each signal.
PM processing is performed according to the ITU-T Recommendation G.784 BBE, ES,
SES, and UAS counters are collected. For further information, see “Performance
monitoring” (p. 5-23).
Threshold reports
In addition to the common alarm status and normal/abnormal condition reports,
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports threshold reports (TRs). A TR is generated when a
performance monitoring parameter threshold is exceeded, that can be set individually by
the user for 24-hours and 15-minutes intervals. The system provides the ability to
provision the threshold value between zero and the maximum threshold value.
For further information, see “Performance monitoring” (p. 5-23).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port monitoring modes
Each physical interface can be in one of three different modes: automatic (AUTO),
monitored (MON) or non-monitored (NMON). In NMON mode all alarms that originate
in the physical section termination function are suppressed, while in the MON mode they
are reported.
In the AUTO mode alarm conditions as defined by PSTCORR (determines the set of
conditions which are suppressed by PMODE =NMON or PST=OOS-[AU]MA or
OOS-AU, AINS state.) are not reported. A transition to MON will occur automatically if
the condition as defined by AINSCRIT is cleared and Automatic In-Service Timer has
expired.
Path termination point monitoring modes

Each path termination point can be in one of different modes, monitored or
non-monitored.
• NONE
no PM parameters are being monitored.
• P
PM parameters for ODU Path parameters are being monitored.
• S
PM parameters for OTU parameters are being monitored
• T
PM parameters for TCM layer parameters are being monitored.
Alarms and maintenance signals in OTH networks

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports alarms in OTH networks according to ITU-T
Recommendation G.874. It supports the detection and generation of OTN maintenance
signals OTUk-AIS, ODUk-AIS, ODUk-OCI, ODUk-LCK.
The system supports TDM alarm indication signals for OTN embedded SDH/SONET
signals. These signals are sent downstream as an indication that an upstream OTN defect
has been detected. If the ODU is CBR mapped, only LOF will be seen downstream
instead of AIS.
Using the respective overhead bytes, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports trail trace
identifier management on OTU and ODU level. Access to operator-specific bytes is
enabled. Trail trace signals are transmitted and processed on a 64-byte basis.
Tandem connection monitoring (TCM) failures are treated as a defect. HO-TCM, TCM
layer 6 defects are used to notify the GMRE for fast restoration. An alarm is raised if
GMRE is switching based on HO-TCM failures.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transmission maintenance signals in SDH/SONET networks
In SDH/SONET networks, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports validation, and monitoring
of the section trace identifiers (J0 byte of the RS OH) according to ITU-T
Recommendation G.707. Possible formats are: 16 byte multiframe and single byte. Using
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC, hexadecimal values can be managed.
Auto turn-up wait

The auto turn up wait feature inhibits facility alarms until a good signal is received .
Alarms are then activated. Entities which make use of this feature are in the secondary
state “AINS” (Automatic In-Service).
Provisioned state record

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS automatically maintains a record of the provisioned state of
each transmit and receive port on each circuit pack.
Loopbacks
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports loopbacks for testing and maintenance purposes.
These loopbacks are available for each supported signal type. In general, the following
types of loopbacks are possible:
• Facility loopback
• Terminal loopback
Loopbacks can be enabled and disabled using Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS or
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC.
Reference
See “Loopbacks” (p. 5-18) for more detailed information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Stability
features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stability
Auto-recovery after input power interrupt
The system will restore itself automatically after an interruption of the power.
Resilience to traffic loss if database is damaged or lost

Even in case of damage or loss of the local database, the traffic through the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is not affected. If the second-level controller (SLC) is not
available (e.g. SLC warm reset), protection switching will be limited.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features External communications features
features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
External communications features

Overview
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS provides various ways to communicate with management
systems, neighbor network elements, and operation devices as required by international
standards.
Communication can be established by LAN connections or by making use of specific
overhead bytes in transmission signals. This way, an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS can be part
of a data communications network (DCN)..
ECC protection
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports explicit provisioning of fast embedded communication
channel (ECC) protection. ECCs can be grouped into one ECC protection group, if they
have an equal nominal data transfer bandwidth. An ECC protection group supports up to
32 members.
In OTH networks, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports 1+N GCC1 protection.
For traditional networking, i.e. MCN, the system supports 1+1 protection of the ECC.
For SCN (with GMRE) the system supports 1+N protection of the ECC.
Reference
For more detailed information about the implementation in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS, see
the following sections:
• “External communications: ECC” (p. 4-91)
• “External communications: LAN” (p. 4-92)
• “External communications: TCP/IP stack” (p. 4-96)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section provides information about the control plane features of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS). For more detailed conceptual and background
information refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS GMPLS/GMRE Guide.
Contents
The control plane concept 2-38

List of features 2-40
Port types 2-42
Standardized network interfaces 2-44
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features The control plane concept
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The control plane concept

Introduction
Being part of an automatically switched optical network (ASON), Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS supports a full range of features to:
• facilitate fast and efficient configuration of connections within the transport network.
• reconfigure or modify connections that have previously been set up.
• perform a restoration function.
Overview
Generalized multi-protocol label switching (GMPLS)/automatically switched optical
network (ASON) networks are based on the introduction of a so-called control plane (on
top of the transport or data plane) with a set of protocols (for instance OSPF/OSPF-TE,
RSVP/RSVP-TE, LMP) which are used to exchange information between network
elements (NEs, also called nodes) for establishing and releasing paths in an automated,
distributed fashion across a network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features The control plane concept
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-3 Different planes of a GMPLS/ASON network
Management plane
Centralized network management
Control plane
Distributed control
functionality
x x x
x x x
x x
x x
x
x
x x
x x x
x
x x x x x x
x
Transport plane (Data plane)

Payload transport
x Network element (NE) - with GMRE
x Network element (NE) - without GMRE
x Router x GMRE
g-gmrg-0005
Each network element in the transport plane is equipped with a controller called GMPLS
Routing Engine (GMRE). All the GMRE nodes in a network are forming the control plane
and are running the GMPLS protocol suite.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features List of features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
List of features
Details
The features supported by the GMRE include:
• The system supports single layer provisioning and restoration within a single control
plane domain.
• GMPLS architecture as defined in RFC 3945.
• Support of ITU-T Recommendation G.8080 (ASON architecture).
• Support of ASON routing as defined in ITU-T Recommendation G.7715 and ITU-T
Recommendation G.7715.1
• Rerouting (at path level) as defined in RFC 4872.
• GMPLS routing extensions as defined in RFC 4202 and RFC 4203.
• Support of ITU-T Recommendation G.7713.2 (RSVP-TE signaling for ASON)
• Support of RSVP-TE extensions as defined in RFC 3473.
• SCN routing protocols: OSPF as defined in RFC 2328, and OSPF-TE as defined in
RFC 3630.
• Control plane redundancy (via FLC EQPS)
• Bidirectional IP control channels (IPCCs) to control plane neighbors
– In-fiber/in-band control channels
– Out-of-fiber/out-of-band control channels
• Nominal route handling for OTH (ODU) connections
• Control plane service types:
– Unprotected
– Source-based restoration (SBR)
– Guaranteed restoration (GR)
– 1+1 protection and restoration combined (PRC)
– 1+1 subnetwork connection protection (SNCP)
• Connection service types:
– ODU0
– ODU1
– ODU2
– ODU2e
• Soft rerouting
• Resource coloring
• Constraints-based routing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features List of features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Management interfaces:
– Command Line Interface (CLI)
– CORBA-based TMF MTNM network management interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Port types
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port types
Roles
The GMRE-controlled (transmission) ports in an NE can take on different roles
depending on their function and their location in the GMRE domain (inside the domain or
on the edge).
These types of ports can be distinguished:
Table 2-3 Types of ports and their role in the context of the GMRE
Port type Definition Standardized

network
interface
Drop port Drop ports are located on the edge of a GMRE –
domain and provide end-points for SPC services (SPC
endpoints).
There is neither signaling nor routing functionality
associated with a drop port.
Drop port alarms are ignored because a drop port may
be protected (SNCP/Nc), or because the traffic
running over a drop port cannot be restored - thus no
consequent actions can be performed by the GMRE.
Intra-domain Interior Network Network Interface I-NNI
port
An I-NNI port is a GMRE domain internal interface.
(I-NNI port) which is connected to an I-NNI port of a neighboring
NE belonging to the same GMRE domain.
Signaling and routing protocols are running on I-NNI
ports.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Port types
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure illustrates the different port types in a GMRE domain:
Figure 2-4 Port types in a GMRE domain
UNI port Drop port
Client x
x
E-NNI port
NE
x
ASON
x network ASON
non-ASON NE network
network NE
x
UNI port
x
NE Client
Drop ports
I-NNI ports
Network element (NE)

NE
x Router Transmission link
x GMRE IPCC
g-gmrg-0004
Note: For the sake of completeness, the table and the figure above also show UNI and
E-NNI ports. These port types are not supported in the current software release.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Features Standardized network interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Standardized network interfaces

Details
The following network interfaces have been standardized:
UNI User to Network Interface

The UNI is the service control interface between the transport network and a client
equipment, for example a router.
The UNI supports the following basic functions:
• Call control
• Resource discovery
• Connection control
• Connection selection
There is no routing function associated with the UNI reference point.
Network internals are hidden from the client.
NNI Network-Network Interface
The NNI is the service control interface between nodes within the transport
network.
There are two kinds of NNI: the E-NNI (Exterior NNI, or External NNI), and the
I-NNI (Interior NNI, or Internal NNI)
I-NNI Internal Network-Network Interface
The service control interface between nodes within a network domain. The
network domain may be a vendor specific domain or a part of a network.
The I-NNI supports the following basic functions:
• Resource discovery
• Connection control
• Connection routing
E-NNI External Network-Network Interface
The service control interface between network domains, for example between
different vendor domains.
The E-NNI supports the following basic functions:
• Setup and teardown of LSPs
• Per-domain routing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-5 Standardized network interfaces
Carrier Domain 1
Client 2
Client 1
E–NNI
I–NNI
I–NNI
Carrier Domain 2
Transport Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
3 3opologies and
T
configurations
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the key applications of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch (PSS). It gives an overview of the various network applications and identifies the
key functions associated with these applications.
Network tiers
Optical networks can be structured into three tiers in order to simplify their
understanding, modelling and implementation:
• Backbone (tier 3)
• Metro core/regional (tier 2)
• Access (tier1)
Due to the flexibility of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS it is able to cover many different
applications especially in the backbone and metro core/regional tier. The following
sections will identify some of the main applications and configurations for which
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is optimized.
Contents
Backbone applications 3-2

Metro core/regional applications 3-4
Interworking and interoperability 3-7
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Topologies and configurations Backbone applications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backbone applications
OTN and SDH backbone
As an example, a configuration of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS)
for mixed TDM (OTH and SDH/SONET) high-speed traffic is shown in the following
figure.
Figure 3-1 Sample configuration: Backbone
HPCFAP 90
PSF_A 91
FAN_A 92
Plenum
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
2XANY40G
2XANY40G
2XANY40G
2XANY40G
2XANY40G
4 × 10 × STM-64
5 × 2 × OTU3
MX_A
MX_B
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BT_1 81 BT_2 82 BTC_1 83 BTC_2 84 BT_3 85 BT_4 86
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
2XANY40G
2XANY40G
2XANY40G
2XANY40G
2XANY40G
4 × 10 × STM-64 71 72
5 × 2 × OTU3
FLC_A
FLC_B
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 73 74 75 76 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Plenum
FAN_B 93
Plenum
Dust filter
PSF_B 94
g-pipg-0007
Table 3-1 Equipment used in sample configuration
Quantity I/O card Optical modules / interfaces
Trunk side
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Topologies and configurations Backbone applications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-1 Equipment used in sample configuration (continued)
Quantity I/O card Optical modules / interfaces
8 10XANY10G IR211G1AU
8 × 10 × STM-64/OC-192 S64.2
10 2XANY40G 10 × 2 × OTU3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Topologies and configurations Metro core/regional applications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Metro core/regional applications

Sample Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 configuration with optical access
As an example, a configuration of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS)
for mixed TDM (OTH and SDH/SONET) and Ethernet traffic is shown in the following
figures.
Figure 3-2 Sample Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 configuration
HPCFAP 90
PSF_A 91
FAN_A 92
Plenum
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
2XANY40G
2XANY40G
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
4 × 10 × STM-64
2 × 2 × OTU3
MX_A
MX_B
2 × 10 × OTU2
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BT_1 81 BT_2 82 BTC_1 83 BTC_2 84 BT_3 85 BT_4 86
4 × 24 × GbE
24XETH1G
24XETH1G
24XETH1G
24XETH1G
24XANYMR
24XANYMR
24XANYMR
24XANYMR
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
71 72 4 × 24 × STM-16
FLC_A
FLC_B
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 73 74 75 76 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Plenum
FAN_B 93
3 × 10 × 10 GbE Plenum
Dust filter
PSF_B 94
g-pipg-0008
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-3 Sample Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 configuration
2 x 24 x STM16 2 x 2 x OTU3 4 x 10 x STM-64

2 x 24 x GbE 2 x 10 x OTU2 2 x 10 x 10GbE
41
FAN36H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
(42) (43)
IOC or MTX_AL
IOC or MTX_BL
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
10XANY10G
24XANYMR
24XANYMR
2XANY40G
2XANY40G
24XETH1G
24XETH1G
BTC
BTC
MX_B
MX_A
23 40
FLC_A
FLC_B
Filter
44 45
PFC PFC
Table 3-2 Equipment used in sample configuration
I/O card Quantity Optical modules / interfaces
PSS-64 PSS-36 PSS-64 PSS-36
Trunk side
10XANY10G 4 4 IR211G1AU IR211G1AU

4 × 10 × STM-64/OC-192 S64.2 4 × 10 × STM-64/OC-192 S64.2
2XANY40G 2 2 2 × 2 × OTU3 2 × 2 × OTU3
10XANY10G 2 2 LR211G1AU LR211G1AU

2 × 10 × OTU2 2 × 10 × OTU2
Client side
24XANYMR 4 2 IR12G7TU IR12G7TU
4 × 24 × STM-16/OC-48 S16.1 2 × 24 × STM-16/OC-48 S16.1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-2 Equipment used in sample configuration (continued)
I/O card Quantity Optical modules / interfaces
PSS-64 PSS-36 PSS-64 PSS-36
10XANY10G 3 2 SR111G1AU SR111G1AU

3 × 10 × 10 GbE 2 × 10 × 10 GbE
24XETH1G 4 2 1000BSXU 1000BSXU

4 × 24 × 1 GbE 2 × 24 × 1 GbE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Topologies and configurations Interworking and interoperability
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Interworking and interoperability

Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS has been specifically developed and tested to interwork with the
following network elements:
• Alcatel-Lucent 1625 LambdaXtreme Transport (LX)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager (LM)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMX Multiplexer
• Alcatel-Lucent 1675 LambdaUnite MultiService Switch (MSS)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1678 Multicore Connect (MCC)
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) WDM part
In this section, the scope of interworking and the applicable restrictions are listed.
Control plane interoperability

The OTH-TDM control plane is fully interoperable within a single I-NNI domain for
I-NNI data links in this domain routed through underlying WDM domains consisting of
Alcatel-Lucent 1625 LX, Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM, or Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems.
Supporting facilities for I-NNI data links can be OTUs carrying ODU2 or ODU3 signals.
The control plane supports to drop CP services of any supported technology towards a
DROP data link connected to foreign equipment under the following conditions:
• Interoperability on data plane with the foreign equipment is supported for the specific
type of interface the foreign equipment is connected to.
• The specific type of interface is supported as supporting facility for data links of class
DROP for the corresponding CP technology of the service to be dropped.
Interworking with Wavelength Division Multiplexing

Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM) systems can be used with
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS for cost-efficient data transport over long and intermediate
distances. For this purpose, the tunable DWDM XFP (X11MDTNC) can be used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Topologies and configurations Interworking and interoperability
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-4 DWDM topology example
WDM Multiplexer
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS (OCS part)
g-pipg-0014
STM-64 transport
Alcatel-Lucent allows the “black and white” transmission of STM-64 signals from and to
WDM equipment. The WDM equipment serves as clear channel for the overhead, that
means, MSOH and RSOH remain unchanged by the WDM equipment.
OC-192 transport
Alcatel-Lucent allows the “black and white” transmission of OC-192 signals from and to
WDM equipment. The WDM equipment serves as clear channel for the overhead, that
means, MSOH and RSOH remain unchanged by the WDM equipment.
OTM-0.2 transport
Alcatel-Lucent allows the “black and white” and “colored” transmission of OTM-0.2
signals from and to WDM equipment with or without FEC.
OTU2 overhead is terminated. The trail trace signals SAPI, DAPI, and the 32 operator
specific bytes interwork. Same applies to the section monitoring bytes (for BIP-8,
BEI/BIAE, BDI and IAE) and the OTUn-AIS signal.
ODUk- and OPUk-OH, k ≤ 2, are transported unchanged by the WDM equipment.
OTM-0.3 transport
Alcatel-Lucent allows the “black and white” transmission of OTM-0.3 signals from and
to WDM equipment with or without FEC.
OTU3 overhead is terminated. The trail trace signals SAPI, DAPI, and the 32 operator
specific bytes interwork. Same applies to the section monitoring bytes (for BIP-8,
BEI/BIAE, BDI and IAE) and the OTUn-AIS signal.
ODUk- and OPUk-OH, k ≤ 3, are transported unchanged by the WDM equipment.
GCC
The WDM equipment transports the GCC1 as a clear channel.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
4 Product description
4
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) in terms of
basic architecture, physical configuration, and circuit packs.
Contents
System configuration 4-3

Part lists 4-6
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack (S3T8) 4-11
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack (CMSHF) 4-14
Fan Unit (FAN3T8) 4-17
PSS-64 Bus Termination Cards (BT3T8, BTC3T8) 4-21
PSS-36 Bus Termination Card (BT36) 4-23
PSS-64 Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8) 4-25
PSS-36 Power filter card (PFC) 4-28
PSS-64 High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP) 4-31
PSS-36 Power Distribution Unit (PDU1C, PDU2C) 4-33
First-Level Controller (FLC) 4-34
Agnostic matrix cards (MT960C, MT1T9) 4-39
10 × 10G ANY Port Unit (10XANY10G) 4-45
10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit (10XOTH10G) 4-52
10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit (10XETH10G) 4-58
2 × 40G ANY Port Unit (2XANY40G) 4-63
24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit (24XANYMR) 4-68
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit (24XETH1G) 4-73

Available optical modules 4-77
Synchronization 4-79
PSS-64 Power distribution concept 4-80
PSS-36 Power distribution concept 4-83
Control architecture 4-86
External communications: ECC 4-91
External communications: LAN 4-92
External communications: TCP/IP stack 4-96
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description System configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System configuration
Introduction
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS main subrack provides central OTH switching and control
functions together with TDM (OTN) cards. The switching function is implemented by the
so-called agnostic matrix with a capacity of 960 Gb/s or 1.9 Tb/s.
Figure 4-1 System block diagram
ODU switching
SDH/SONET/OTN SDH/SONET/OTN
OTH OTH
client port cards client port cards
ETH ETH
OTH OTH
Agnostic matrix
Shelf controller
First-Level Controller
g-pipg-0002
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-2 Block diagram at card level
OTN/TDM/ETH Line interface
I/O card
OH
add/
drop
Logical/physical
transport and
adaptation GCC
add/
drop
T0
Control
Agnostic matrix First-Level Controller

ECC
FM/PM Protection Comms Stacks
DCN LAN management management
switch
Control
FLC Mass
storage
RL
PSF3T8_A
T3/T6 ZIC
CRU 2 Mb/s, 2 MHz, Rack top lamps
T0 1.5 Mb/s ODU-k
Remote alarms
T4/T5
RA Packet
Control PSF3T8_B
T3/T6
SLC Agnostic
2 Mb/s, 2 MHz,
Fabric Fan Unit
1.5 Mb/s
T4/T5
g-pipg-0061
Future releases
The system is prepared for functional enhancements. TDM cards and packet cards can
then be connected in any mix to the agnostic matrix. A dedicated adaptation card will be
available to interwork between TDM and packet cards.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-3 Block diagram at switching level
SDH/SONET/OTN SDH/SONET/OTN
TDM TDM
TDM TDM
Adaption Adaption
TDM to packet TDM to packet
packet packet
Packet cards packet packet Packet cards
Agnostic matrix
Shelf controller
g-pipg-0001
In future releases, additional shelves supporting, for example, DWDM or lower-order

switching functionality can be connected to the main subrack and integrated into the
central control.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description Part lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Part lists
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 racks, subracks, common part cards and other mechanical items
Table 4-1 List of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 items
Abbreviation Description Item Part number Card size Max. no.

(mnemonic) per system
Width Height
Rack
7-feet Seismic Network Bay 1AD 13937 0001 NA NA NA

frame rack (ANSI market)
300-mm ETSI One Rack 8DG 09121 AA NA NA NA

HPCFAP High Power Connection Fuse HPCFAP 3AG 33233 AA NA NA 1
and Alarm Panel
Rack Alarm Unit 3AG 33657 AA NA NA 1
Subrack and common parts
S3T8 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 S3T8 3AG 33210 AA NA NA 1
shelf including backplane
FAN3T8 Fan Unit FAN3T8 8DG 89249 AB NA NA 2
1
BT3T8 Bus Termination Card BT3T8 3AG 33102 AA NA NA 4
BTC3T8 Bus Termination Card CMISS BTC3T8 3AG 33104 AA1 NA NA 2
PSF3T8 Power Supply, Filter, and PSF3T8 3AG 33008 AB Prop Prop 2
Clock Interface Card
FLC First-Level Controller EC_HC 8DG 89216 AB 5.5 HP Prop 2
Matrix
MT1T9 1T9 Agnostic Matrix MT1T9 3AG 33537 AA 12 HP Prop 2
I/O cards
10XANY10G 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit 10AN10G 3AG 33295 AA 4.5 HP F 16

10XOTH10G 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit 10OT10G 3AG 33533 AA 4.5 HP F 16
10XETH10G 10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit 10ET10G 3AG 33532 AA 4.5 HP F 16
2XANY40G 2 × 40G ANY Port Unit 2AN40F1 3AG 33296 AA 4.5 HP F 20

24XANYMR 24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit 24ANM 3AG 33304 AA 4.5 HP F 26
24XETH1G 24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit 24ET1G 3AG 33536 AA 4.5 HP F 26

Miscellaneous
Acoustic noise damper 3AG 33913 AA Prop Prop 1

Full slot blank front plate 3AG 33109 AC 4.5 HP F 32
Growth controller slot blank 3AG 33173 AA 5.5 HP Prop 2

front plate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-1 List of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 items (continued)

Width Height
Dust filter 3AG 33589 AA NA NA 2

3
Circuit breaker 100 A 1AB 01750 0070
SFP dummy plug kit (16 KITSFP 3AL 89857 AA NA NA NA

pieces)2
XFP dummy plug kit (10 KITXFP 3AG 33752 AA NA NA NA
pieces)2
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 3AG 33782 AB NA NA 1

installation kit (ETSI)
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 3AG 33784 AB NA NA 1

installation kit (ANSI)
Pressure sensor kit 3AL 33682 AA

Cable kit (ETSI and ANSI) 3AL 33780 AB
Installation kit vertical fibre tbd
(ANSI)
SFP removing tool 3AL 81424 AA
Support for SFP removing tool 8DG 08510 AA

Clamp extracting machine LC 8DG 08381 AA
Extractors holder bracket for 3AN 49302 AA
clamp extracting machine LC
Notes:
1. This item is part of the subrack (S3T8) when delivered initially.
2. Unused optical ports on SFPs or XFPs must be covered with the appropriate dummy plug (dust cap).
3. Replacement part for the HPCFAP.
Legend
F Full-size slot
H Half-size slot
HP Horizontal pitch, 1 HP ≈ 5 mm
NA Not applicable
Prop Proprietary size slot
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 racks, subracks, common part cards and other mechanical items
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-2 List of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 items

Width Height
Rack
7-feet Seismic Network Bay 1AD 13937 0001 NA NA NA

frame rack (ANSI market)
300-mm ETSI One Rack 8DG 09121 AA NA NA NA

Power Distribution Unit - ETSI PDU1C 3AF 11705 AA
Power Distribution Unit - PDU2C 3AF 10889 AA

ANSI

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 3KC 19145 AA NA NA 1
subrack kit
FAN3T8 Fan Unit FAN3T8 8DG 89249 AB NA NA 1
BT36 Bus Termination Card BT36 8DG 09176 AA NA NA 2

including CMISS
PFC Power Supply Filter PFC 8DG 09183 AA Prop Prop 2
FLC First-Level Controller FLC36EA 3AG 33727 AA 5.5 HP Prop 2
Matrix
MT960C 960G Agnostic Matrix MT960 3AG 33538 AA 12 HP Prop 2
I/O cards
10XANY10G 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit 10AN10G 3AG 33295 AA 4.5 HP F 8

10XOTH10G 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit 10OT10G 3AG 33533 AA 4.5 HP F 8
10XETH10G 10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit 10ET10G 3AG 33532 AA 4.5 HP F 8
2XANY40G 2 × 40G ANY Port Unit 2AN40F1 3AG 33296 AA 4.5 HP F 10

24XANYMR 24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit 24ANM 3AG 33304 AA 4.5 HP F 13
24XETH1G 24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit 24ET1G 3AG 33536 AA 4.5 HP F 13
Miscellaneous
Full slot blank front plate BFP 3AG 33109 AC 4.5 HP F 32
Half slot blank front plate BHFP 3KC 19181 AA 4.5 HP H 64
Timing interface blank front TIBNK 8DG 59421 AA 4.5 HP Prop 2

plate
Dust filter 3AG 33589 AA NA NA 1

Circuit breaker 50 A 1AB 01750 0072
SFP dummy plug kit (16 KITSFP 3AL 89857 AA NA NA NA
pieces)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-2 List of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 items (continued)

Width Height
XFP dummy plug kit (10 KITXFP 3AG 33752 AA NA NA NA

pieces)
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 3KC 19142 AC NA NA 1

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 3KC 19142 AA NA NA 1

SFP removing tool 3AL 81424 AA
Support for SFP removing tool 8DG 08510 AA

BT36 removing tool 3KC 19251 AA
Clamp extracting machine LC 8DG 08381 AA

Extractors holder bracket for 3AN 49302 AA
clamp extracting machine LC
Legend
F Full-size slot
H Half-size slot
HP Horizontal pitch, 1 HP ≈ 5 mm
NA Not applicable
Prop Proprietary size slot
Optical modules
Table 4-3 List of optical modules
Abbreviation Description Item (mnemonic) Part number Package type Client port card
STM-16 modules
SR12G7TU 2.5 Gb/s module: STM- S2G7D2I 1AB 37637 0001 SFP 24XANYMR
16/OC-48/OTM-0.1
(I-16.1/SR-1/P1I1-1D1)
IR12G7TU 2.5 Gb/s module: S2G7D15E 1AB 37637 0002 SFP 24XANYMR
STM-16/OC-48/OTM-0.1
(S-16.1/IR-1/P1S1-1D1)
LR12G7TU 2.5 Gb/s module: S2G7D40E 1AB 37637 0003 SFP 24XANYMR
(L-16.1/LR-1/P1L1-1D1)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-3 List of optical modules (continued)
Abbreviation Description Item (mnemonic) Part number Package type Client port card
LR22G7TU 2.5 Gb/s module: S2G7D80E 1AB 37637 0004 SFP 24XANYMR
(L-16.2/LR-2/P1L1-1D2)
STM-16 multi-rate, multi-format module
IR12G7AU Multirate module: GbE, S2G7M15I 1AB 37637 0005 SFP 24XANYMR
STM-16, OTU1
(S-16.1/IR-1/P1S1-1D1)
10G multi rate modules (XFP)

SR111G1AU 10 Gb/s multirate module: X11M10I 1AB 37538 0007 XFP 10XANY10G,
STM-64/OC-192/OTM-0.2 10XOTH10G,
(I-64.1/SR-1/P1I1-2D1), 10XETH10G
10GBASE-LR/LW
IR211G1AU 10 Gb/s multirate module: X11M40I 1AB375380005 XFP 10XANY10G,
(S-64.2b/IR-2/P1S1-2D2b), 10XETH10G
10GBASE-ER/EW
LR211G1AU 10 Gb/s multirate module: X11M80E 1AB375380008 XFP 10XANY10G,
(L-64.2b/LR-2/P1L1-2D2), 10XETH10G
10GBASE-ZR/ZW
GbE modules
1000BSXU GbE module: 1000BASE-SX S1GE05I 1AB376720001 SFP 24XANYMR,
24XETH1G
1000BLXU GbE module: 1000BASE-LX S1GE10I 1AB376720002 SFP 24XANYMR,
24XETH1G
1000BZXU GbE module: 1000BASE-ZX S1GE80I 1AB376720003 SFP 24XANYMR,
24XETH1G
DWDM modules
LRT11G1TU 50 GHz wide tunable STM-64 X11MDTNC 1AB375650046 XFP 10XANY10G,
DWDM XFP 10XOTH10G1
Notes:
1. In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 the following restriction applies: Circuit packs hosting at least one
tunable DWDM XFP (LRT11G1TU) must be located in the lower half of the subrack (slots 33 to 40 or 41 to
48, respectively).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack (S3T8)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack (S3T8)

Introduction
The whole Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 system is composed of the 500 mm wide basic
subrack (S3T8) with the high-speed backplane and two low-speed backplanes. The
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS subrack enclosure dimensions are 1552 (H) × 500 (W) × 294
(D) mm. This volume includes the cooling subsystem (Fan Units, FAN3T8) and two
Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Cards (PSF3T8). Two fan trays (push-pull) are
required for thermal management.
The high-speed backplane of the subrack is partitioned into the following slot types:
• 32 I/O card slots: 4.5 TE wide
The I/O card slot is compatible with “full-slot” card sizes. In future releases,
“half-slot” card sizes as well as “double full-slot” card sizes will be supported. The
component side is on the right. Unused slots must be covered with a blank front plate
to ensure proper air flow and cooling.
• 2 matrix slots: 12 TE wide
The matrix slot can accommodate a sandwich card design with two slices where the
two component sides are oriented face to face. Both slices need to be floating to each
other (vertical and horizontal) for proper backplane connector mating. Per slot, there
are two columns of connectors.
• 2 FLC slots 5.5 TE wide
In the FLC slots, the component side is on the right to match with the associated left
matrix sandwich slice above.
• 2 GC slots (SVC and MNT) 6.5 TE wide
Growth controller (GC) slots are reserved for service and maintenance cards in future
releases. The GC slots are oriented upside down to be in line with the right matrix
card slice above. The component side is hence on the left side. Unused slots must be
covered with a blank front plate to ensure proper air flow and cooling.
Rack mounting options

The following rack types are supported:
• 300-mm ETSI One Rack (ETSI market): 2200 mm (7.2 ft) × 600 mm (23.6 in) ×
300 mm (11.8 in) (H × W × D)
• 7-feet Seismic Network Bay frame rack (ANSI market): 2133.6 mm (7 ft) ×
584.2 mm (23 in) × 304.8 mm (12 in) (H × W × D)
The subrack is mountable in racks with
• vertical mounting grid of 44.45 mm (1.75 in) EIA Document 310, “Cabinets, Racks,
Panels, and Associated Equipment”
• WECO pitch 25.4 mm (1.0 in).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Slot numbering
The layout of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack and the physical slot numbering
are shown in the following figure:
Figure 4-4 Physical slot numbering scheme
HPCFAP 90
PSF_A 91
FAN_A 92
Plenum
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Quadrant 1 Quadrant 2
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
MX_A
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
MX_B 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
BT_1 81 BT_2 82 BTC_1 83 BTC_2 84 BT_3 85 BT_4 86
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
71 72
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Quadrant 3 Quadrant 4
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
FLC_A
FLC_B
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 73 74 75 76 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
Plenum
FAN_B 93
Plenum
Dust filter
PSF_B 94
g-pipg-0180
For units that occupy more than one slot, always the number of the upper left slot is used
for addressing.
As a consequence, the full-slot I/O cards can use the following slots:
• Quadrant 1: slot 1 to 8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference
For more detailed information, see “Location rules” (p. 7-18).
Backplane connectivity
A dual-star architecture with two matrix cards and 32 full-slot I/O cards is applied. Each
spoke of this dual-star configuration consists of 20 bidirectional high-speed links per half
slot which means 40 bidirectional high-speed links per full slot respectively 80 protected
differential pairs from both matrix cards (2560 differential pairs for the complete
backplane).
On-line bus diagnostic
The active payload links in the backplane between the matrix and the I/O cards are being
constantly monitored on bit errors.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack (CMSHF)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack (CMSHF)

Introduction
The whole Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 system is composed of the 500 mm wide basic
subrack with a high-speed backplane and two low-speed backplanes that supports a dual
agnostic matrix for cross connection of electrical OTH traffic. The Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS subrack enclosure dimensions are 649.55 (H) × 500 (W) × 294 (D) mm. This
volume includes the cooling subsystem (Fan Unit, FAN3T8). One fan tray is required for
thermal management, and is located at the top of the shelf.
The high-speed backplane of the subrack is partitioned into the following slot types:
• 16 full-slot (full height) general I/O card slots (2-9, 12, 13, and 16-21).
The I/O slots are compatible with “full-slot” card sizes. In future releases, “half-slot”
card sizes will be supported and each full-slot can be used as 2 half-slots. The
component side is on the right. Unused slots must be covered with a blank front plate
to ensure proper air flow and cooling.
• 2 matrix slots (11 and 15) that support redundant switching matrix cards.
• 2 FLC slots for redundancy (23 and 40)
• 2 shared slots (1 and 22) for bus termination cards (BTC) and timing expansion cards
(TC). The timing expansion card is physically installed on top of the BTC. (Logically
timing expansion cards are identified as being in slots 1 and 22. and the BTC slots are
identified as being in slots 42 and 43.)
Rack mounting options

The following rack types are supported:
• 300-mm ETSI One Rack (ETSI market): 2200 mm (7.2 ft) × 600 mm (23.6 in) ×
300 mm (11.8 in) (H × W × D)
• 7-feet Seismic Network Bay frame rack (ANSI market): 2133.6 mm (7 ft) ×
584.2 mm (23 in) × 304.8 mm (12 in) (H × W × D)
The subrack is mountable in racks with
• vertical mounting grid of 44.45 mm (1.75 in) EIA Document 310, “Cabinets, Racks,
Panels, and Associated Equipment”
• WECO pitch 25.4 mm (1.0 in).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Slot numbering
The layout of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack and the physical slot numbering
are shown in the following figure:
Figure 4-5 Physical slot numbering scheme
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The matrix cards in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack reside in two full slots. Each
matrix card is addressed by the number of the upper right slot in which the card resides.
This means the matrix cards occupy the slots 11 and 15.
For I/O cards that occupy more than one slot, always the number of the upper left slot is
used for addressing.
As a consequence, the full-slot I/O cards can use the following slots:
• Slot 2 to 9
• Slot 12 to 13
• Slot 16 to 21
Note that the MNT, SVC, and TC36 cards are not supported in the current software
release.
Reference
For more detailed information, see “Location rules” (p. 7-18).
Backplane connectivity
A dual-star architecture with two matrix cards and 16 full-slot I/O cards is applied. Each
spoke of this dual-star configuration consists of 20 bidirectional high-speed links per half
slot which means 40 bidirectional high-speed links per full slot respectively 80 protected
differential pairs from both matrix cards (1280 differential pairs for the complete
backplane).
On-line bus diagnostic
The active payload links in the backplane between the matrix and the I/O cards are being
constantly monitored on bit errors.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description Fan Unit (FAN3T8)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fan Unit (FAN3T8)

Introduction
The Fan Unit (FAN3T8) provides air flow for thermal dissipation inside the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS subrack. Each Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack must host
two fan units – one mounted below and one mounted above all slots used for circuit
packs. Each Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack must host one fan unit mounted above
the slots used for circuit packs.
Control
The Fan Units which are used in an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS subrack are controlled by
the active second-level controller (SLC) through backplane links. The SLC provisions the
speed of all fan motors on the fan units. A local microcontroller configures and monitors
its associated fan motor.
Each of the three fan motors of a Fan Unit has its own power supply circuit and its own
microcontroller. This redundancy ensures that a single electrical or mechanical failure in
the fan subsystem does not result in the loss of all forced air-cooling capacity. To prevent
excessive startup peaks on the power feeds, the input power filter is designed to reduce
the initial current consumption needed to load the capacitors of the circuit.
Once the fan motors are turned on, they all work at 60 % speed for 20 minutes. If the
active SLC starts control, this starting period is finished. If the period of 20 minutes
expires without SLC control, then all fans are set to full speed.
Besides controlling the fan motor speed, the microcontrollers also collect locally
generated alarms. Additionally, all of the microcontrollers have integrated temperature
sensors which provide additional thermal inputs to the SLCs. In the current software
release, that temperature information is evaluated in the lower fan tray of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack. In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack the
ambient temperature is measured on the MTX.
At normal room temperature the fans run at a reduced speed. With increasing air
temperature (measured in the bottom fan tray), the fan speed increases linearly to the
maximum (100 %) speed. With decreasing air temperature, the fan speed decreases
accordingly.
Under normal conditions a uniform working speed between the two fan units (push and
pull) is maintained to avoid pressure imbalances in the subrack . In the error-free case,
both Fan Units are therefore operated with the same speed for efficient cooling of the
system. If one fan unit cannot be reached by SW control, then this fan unit will go to full
speed. (two fan units are only hosted in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If one of the three fan motors fails, the remaining fan motors operate with full speed. If
local micro controllers on fan unit fail then the associated motor goes to full speed
automatically.
Fan alarms
The fan speed is supervised constantly. Any malfunctioning (including degrading of fan
function) of an individual fan element is reported to the user. This includes
malfunctioning where no degradation of transmission functionality is expected and
malfunctioning where the transmission operation is expected to be degraded or
interrupted. The alarm contains information about the degradation of fan functionality, if
the system can still operate normal or not and the failure localization.
Fan tray replacement
During the fan tray replacement in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack, cooling air
for the subrack is supplied only by one fan tray. Therefore only one Fan Unit can be
exchanged at once. Due to the heat capacities involved, the system can sustain this
condition for a short period of time. The target for the fan tray replacement is 2 minutes. 5
minutes can be used as long as the ambient temperature does not exceed 40 °C (104 °F).
During the fan tray replacement in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack, the only fan
unit supplying cooling air for the subrack is removed. Therefore the Fan Unit should
never be removed for more than 2 minutes.
See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide for detailed
instructions.
Power supply
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack each Fan Unit is connected to both Power
Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Cards (PSF3T8) In case of a failure or removal of a
single PSF3T8, the Fan Unit will be fed by only one power branch, coming from the
opposite feeder side (see “PSS-64 Power distribution concept” (p. 4-80)).
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack both Power Supply Filters (PFC) provide 3
power branches to the PSF3T8. Each power branch from one power filter is OR'ed with
the matching branch from the other power filter. In case of a failure or removal of a single
PFC, the Fan Unit will be fed by the remaining PFC (see “PSS-36 Power distribution
concept” (p. 4-83)).
Dust filter
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack the dust filter is positioned below the lower
fan tray. In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack the dust filter is positioned below the
card cage while the Fan Unit is placed on top of the card cage.
When the critical filter clogging alarm is raised, the dust filter needs to be
cleaned or replaced immediately.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When the high filter clogging alarm is raised, the dust filter needs to be cleaned
or replaced within the following period:
• ETSI market: within two days
• ANSI market: within one month
This period is not the same, because the dust concentration is specified differently in the
standards for the ETSI and the ANSI market.
Service Interval
The recommended service interval for the dust filter in central offices with air
conditioning and filtering is six months. This interval can be kept if the average dust load
in the central office does not exceed 0.031 mg/m3.
• Short Term Service Interval
Under normal conditions the maintenance interval of the dust filter is at least 3
months. This requirement is not derived from a standard but from experience of
service staff.
• Long Term Service Interval
Under normal conditions the maintenance interval of the dust filter is at least 12
months. This requirement is not derived from a standard but from experience of
service staff. Filters lasting for 12 months are thicker than those lasting for 3 months.
The height allocation for the filter within the subrack is increased
The dust filter can be ordered separately.
Pressure difference sensor

The pressure difference sensor is not part of the Fan Unit. In the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-64 subrack, it is placed on the low-speed backplane above the dust filter. The
pressure difference sensor is controlled and supplied (service voltage) by the Fan Unit
through backplane links.
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack the pressure difference sensor is placed on the
MTX card. Tthe sensor on the active card is considered for alarm generation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Front view
The front view of the Fan Unit (FAN3T8) is shown in the following figure:
Figure 4-6 FAN3T8 front view
g_pipg_0139
Visual indications
For information on the LED on the front panel of the FAN3T8 unit, see “LED of the Fan
Unit (FAN3T8)” (p. 5-60).
Location
The Fan Units (FAN3T8) are mounted at the positions 92 (FAN_A) and 93 (FAN_B) at
the top and at the bottom of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack. In the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack the Fan Unit (FAN3T8) is mounted at the position
41 at the top of the subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description PSS-64 Bus Termination Cards (BT3T8, BTC3T8)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PSS-64 Bus Termination Cards (BT3T8, BTC3T8)

Functions
Four Bus Termination Cards (BT3T8) are used in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64
subrack to define the termination (resistance and the voltage) of backplane buses. The
four Bus Termination Cards (BT3T8) are located in slots 81, 82, 85 and 86.
Each of the BTC3T8s has one of the two shelf ID rotary dials required to generate the
complete Shelf ID. (The shelf ID lower nibble is on BTC3T8_1 in slot 83, and the higher
nibble is on BT3T8_2 in slot 84.),
In the current software release, the shelf ID must always be 0xE1.
• Rotary switch on the BTC3T8_2 set to 0xE (BIN: 1110)
• Rotary switch on the BTC3T8_1 set to 1.
The two Bus Termination Cards CMISS (BTC3T8) provide the same functions as the
BT3T8. In addition, they collect the CMISS signals of the presence/missing of all other
cards and serializes this information for the controllers (SLC, FLC, and GC). The Shelf
IDs of the two Bus Termination Cards CMISS (BTC3T8) are BTC-1-<shelf>-<slot> (slot
83 and 84).
The BTC3T8 is also used for management of the external synchronization clock
reference:
• Bridging of input to both matrices
• Selection of timing output from active matrix
• Squelching of timing input
The remote inventory of the BTC3T8 in slot BTC_2 is used for the subrack-specific data
like the subrack inventory, the MAC address of the subrack, and system recovery data of
the NE.
Replacement
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Exchanging the BTC3T8 can cause loss of important data and stop the system
Since the function of the BTC3T8 units depend on their position in the subrack, they
cannot be simply exchanged. If in doubt about how to replace a BTC3T8, contact
Alcatel-Lucent Technical Support in advance.
See also the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide for detailed
replacement procedures.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description PSS-64 Bus Termination Cards (BT3T8, BTC3T8)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Front view
The front view of the Bus Termination Card (BT3T8) is shown in the following figure:
Figure 4-7 BT3T8 front view
g_pipg_0148
The front view of the Bus Termination Card CMISS (BTC3T8) is shown in the following
figure:
Figure 4-8 BTC3T8 front view
g_pipg_0149
Location
The Bus Terminations Cards (BT3T8) are inserted in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64
subrack into the non-standard slots 81 (BT_1), 82 (BT_2), 85 (BT_3), and 86 (BT_4)
behind the center fiber management area.
The two Bus Termination Cards CMISS (BTC3T8) are inserted into the non-standard
slots 83 (BTC_1) and 84 (BTC_2) behind the center fiber management area.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description PSS-36 Bus Termination Card (BT36)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PSS-36 Bus Termination Card (BT36)

Functions
The Bus Termination Card with Card Missing Function (BT36) is necessary for the
operation of the internal communication bus in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack.
Both BT36s must be installed, because each of the BT36s has one of the two shelf ID
rotary dials required to generate the complete Shelf ID. (The Shelf ID lower nibble is on
BT36_1 in slot 42, and the higher nibble is on BT36_2 in slot 43.) The System EEPROM
is located on the BT36s, but can be accessed by the FLC only on BT36_2 in slot 43. It
contains the Shelf RIM and MAC addresses, TID, and provisioned IP address.
In the current software release, the shelf ID must always be 0xE1.
• Rotary switch on the BT36_2 set to 0xE (BIN: 1110)
• Rotary switch on the BT36_1 set to 1.
If a BT36 is removed, which is unlikely, no card containing a CPU should be inserted or
restarted until the BT36 is replaced. Any card with a CPU which initializes while a BT36
is missing must be restarted again after the BT36 is replaced to properly read the Shelf
ID.
Replacement
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Exchanging the BT36 can cause loss of important data and stop the system
Since the function of the BT36 units depends on their position in the subrack, they cannot
be simply exchanged. If in doubt about how to replace a BT36, contact Alcatel-Lucent
Technical Support in advance.
See also the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide for detailed
replacement procedures. Note that a special tool is required for removal and insertion.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description PSS-36 Bus Termination Card (BT36)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Front view
The front view of the Bus Termination Card (BT36) is shown in the following figure:
Figure 4-9 BT36 front view
Location
The two Bus Termination Cards (BT36) are physically located in slots 1 and 22 of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack. They are prepared to get a an inter-shelf timing
card (TC36) being stacked on top in a future software release. Therefore, the BT36 card is
managed by virtual slot IDs 42 and 43 (at the management system).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description PSS-64 Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card
(PSF3T8)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PSS-64 Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8)

Introduction
The two redundant Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Cards (PSF3T8) provide the
following functions for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 system:
• Input voltage supervision, over voltage protection, and filtering. The supply voltages
are –48 V and –60 V nominal. Operation range is –40 V to –72 V.
• The system powering meets the ETSI ETS Standard 300132-2, Telcordia Requirement
GR-1089-CORE and GR-499-CORE.
• Distribution of required output voltages to the three branches in point-to-multipoint
configuration. From each of the two battery feeds, the PSF3T8 receives three
subbranches. These are split into several sub-subranches that supply the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS components. For details, see “PSS-64 Power distribution
concept” (p. 4-80).
• Low voltage cut-off support. The PSF3T8 detects the low voltage (via power branch
II) and provides signals to other components of the system (exception: FAN3T8,
FLC) to switch the power off.
• Service and housekeeping supply. The PSF3T8 has 8 housekeeping outputs and 16
housekeeping inputs both available at D-Sub25 connectors, prepared for future
releases
• Alarm and support interfaces. The PSF3T8 provides a combined RL/RA interface.
The interface is realized with a D-Sub9 connector.
In the PSF3T8 located as PSF_A the RL/RA interface is used to control the rack top
lamps placed in the HPCFAP.
In the PSF3T8 located as PSF_B, the RL/RA interface acts as remote alarm interface
for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system.
In addition, the PSF3T8 supports a supervision interface that can be used for
application with the HPCFAP. This interface is realized with an RJ45 connector.
• Timing interface (hardware-prepared for future software releases).
In an SDH network, T5 or T6, respectively, is a 2.048-Mb/s signal carrying SSM
information. In a SONET network, T5 or T6, respectively, is a DS1 signal carrying
SSM information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(PSF3T8)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
External interfaces
Figure 4-10 PSF3T8 front panel and backplane interfaces
BATT I, II, III T1_VBATT

GND T2_VBATT
T3_VBATT
SYNC CLK
HOUSEKEEPING IN
HOUSEKEEPING OUT
RL/RA
HPCFAP MON CTRL
PSF3T8
Front panel ß à Backplane g-pipg-0160
Table 4-4 PSF3T8 front panel and backplane interfaces
BATT I, II, III Battery power feeder input (3 branches)

GND Battery ground
SYNC External timing input (D-Sub9 connector, prepared for future software
releases)
HOUSEKEEPING IN 16 housekeeping input lines, prepared for future releases
HOUSEKEEPING OUT 8 housekeeping output lines, prepared for future releases
RL/RA If the PSF3T8 is positioned as PSF_A, this interface provides four

output lines for the rack top lamps.
If the PSF3T8 is positioned as PSF_B, this interface provides eight
output lines for remote alarms.
HPCFAP MON Interfaces for HPCFAP supervision
T1_VBATT, T2_VBATT, T3_VBATT Branches 1, 2, 3 of output voltage, distributed on several pins
CLK Group of clock signals

CTRL Group of lines for control and communication
The details of these interfaces, for example, the pin assignment are shown in the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide (ITG).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(PSF3T8)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Front view
The front of the Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8) is shown in the
following figure:
Figure 4-11 PSF3T8 front view
g_pipg_0146
Visual indications
For information on the LEDs on the front panel of the PSF3T8 unit, see “LEDs of the
Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8)” (p. 5-62).
Location
The Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Cards (PSF3T8) are mounted at the
positions 91 (PSF_A) and 94 (PSF_B) at the top and at the bottom of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-64 subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description PSS-36 Power filter card (PFC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PSS-36 Power filter card (PFC)

Introduction
The two redundant Power Filter Cards (PFC) condition the DC power feeds that power
the network element (NE) and protect against surge currents, low supply voltage, and
other electromagnetic interference. They also provide the following functions for the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 system:
• Input voltage supervision, over voltage protection, and filtering. The supply voltages
are –48 V and –60 V nominal. Operation range is –40 V to –72 V.
• The system powering meets the ETSI ETS Standard 300132-2, Telcordia Requirement
GR-1089-CORE and GR-499-CORE.
• Each PFC has 3 input lines that need to be all connected and provide a maximum total
power of 6 kW. The system will work also with one power supply board. The
maximum input current for one PFC is 150 A (3 × 50 A power sub-branches).
The three branches are split in 4 power planes as shown in Figure 4-12, “PFC power
branching” (p. 4-29) to reduce the current in the backplane. The PFC does not have
any circuit breakers or fuses, short circuit protection is performed at the TRU.
• Low voltage cut-off support. The PFC detects the low voltage and provides signals to
other components of the system to switch the power off (via power branch II). If the
maximum voltage at the three power branches drops below –39.0 V (±1.0 V) all
onboard dc-dc converters are switched off. When the maximum voltage increases to
–43.0 V (± 0.5 V) DC-DC converters are switched back on.
• Service and housekeeping supply. The PFC has 8 housekeeping outputs and 16
housekeeping inputs both available at D-Sub25 connectors, prepared for future
releases.
• Alarm and support interfaces. The PFC provides a combined RL/RA interface. The
interface is realized with a D-Sub9 connector.
In the PFC installed as PSF_A, the RL/RA interface is used to control the rack top
lamps placed in the PDU1C or PDU2C.
In the PFC installed as PSF_B, the RL/RA interface acts as remote alarm interface for
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 system.
In addition, the PFC supports a supervision interface that can be used for application
with the TRU. This interface is realized with an RJ45 connector.
• Timing interface (hardware-prepared for future software releases).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-12 PFC power branching
External interfaces
Table 4-5 PFC front panel interfaces
BATT I, II, III Battery power feeder input (3 branches)

GND Battery ground
SYNC External timing input (D-Sub9 connector, prepared for future software
releases)
HOUSEKEEPING IN 16 housekeeping input lines, prepared for future releases
HOUSEKEEPING OUT 8 housekeeping output lines, prepared for future releases
RL/RA If the PFC is installed as PSF_A, this interface provides four output
lines for the rack top lamps.
If the PFC is installed as PSF_B, this interface provides eight output
lines for remote alarms.
TRU MON Interfaces for TRU supervision
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Front view
The front of the PSS-36 Power Filter Card (PFC) is shown in the following figure:
Figure 4-13 PFC front view
Visual indications
For information on the LEDs on the front panel of the PFC unit, see “LEDs of the Power
Filter Card (PFC)” (p. 5-64).
Location
The Power Filter Cards (PFC) are mounted in slots 44 (PSF_A) and 45 (PSF_B) at the
bottom of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description PSS-64 High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel
(HPCFAP)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PSS-64 High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP)

Introduction
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 system, the High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm
Panel (HPCFAP) is used to provide the subrack with power.
Functions
The HPCFAP provides terminals and circuit breakers for three fused power rails and
separate A and B feed.
The HPCFAP supports a total electrical power of 11 kW over a voltage range from –48 to
–60 V.
An additional function of the HPCFAP is redundant power supply and current limitation
for rack top alarms.
The HPCFAP provides an option for common return and for connecting return to ground
(protection earth). The HPCFAP terminals and circuit breakers can be accessed through a
detachable overall front cover. The circuit breakers are pluggable.
The HPCFAP accommodates a Rack Alarm Unit (RAU). This unit summarizes the alarms
of the subrack and makes them visible by its Rack Top Lamps. The Rack Alarm Unit also
generates alarms if a circuit breaker is open or an internal error is detected.
Reference
For details about the power architecture, see “PSS-64 Power distribution concept”
(p. 4-80).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description PSS-64 High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel
(HPCFAP)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Front view
The front of the High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP) is shown in
the following figure:
Figure 4-14 HPCFAP front view
HPCFAP
100A 100A 100A 100A 100A 100A

URG NURG MEM BUZ
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
C M m
A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3
g_pipg_0147
Visual indications
For information on the LEDs on the front panel of the HPCFAP, see “LEDs of the High
Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP)” (p. 5-61).
Location
The High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP) is placed at the top of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description PSS-36 Power Distribution Unit (PDU1C, PDU2C)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PSS-36 Power Distribution Unit (PDU1C, PDU2C)

Introduction
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 system, the Power Distribution Unit (PDU1C,
PDU2C) is used to provide the subrack with power. PDU1C is the ETSI version, PDU2C
is used for ANSI.
Functions
The Power Distribution Units (PDU1C, PDU2C) provide power connections with circuit
breakers to the power filters.
Both unit types contain rack lamps that can be connected to the Rack Lamp Control port
on a power filter, if desired. These units are separate passive shelves. One unit is mounted
at the top of each rack, and serves multiple Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 shelves.
Reference
For details about the power architecture, see “PSS-36 Power distribution concept”
(p. 4-83).
Front view
The front of the Power Distribution Unit (PDU1C) is shown in the following figure:
Figure 4-15 Power Distribution Unit (PDU1C) front view
The front of the Power Distribution Unit (PDU2C) is shown in the following figure:
Figure 4-16 Power Distribution Unit (PDU2C) front view
Location
The Power Distribution Unit (PDU1C, PDU2C) is placed at the top mounting position of
the rack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description First-Level Controller (FLC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
First-Level Controller (FLC)

Introduction
From a functional perspective, the First-Level Controllers (FLCs) for the PSS-64 or
PSS-36 subrack are equivalent. They differ, however, regarding their slot positions in the
subrack, and regarding their front plate layout.
An alternate designation for the PSS-64 FLC in commercial context is “EC_HC”.
Location
The PSS-64 FLCs are inserted into the non-standard slots 73 (FLC_A) and 75 (FLC_B)
of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack.
The PSS-36 FLCs are inserted into the non-standard slots 23 (FLC_A) and 40 (FLC_B)
of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack.
Functional overview
The following functions are provided by the First-Level Controller (FLC):
• Hardware resources and software functions required for the communication between
the NE and the managing system (Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS/Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS ZIC) or to neighbor NEs (for example, GMRE/GMPLS).
This functionality encompasses the implementation of external LAN interfaces and
ECC interfaces as well as the implementation of the communication stacks needed to
communicate with different Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC/OS or neighbor NEs.
• Debug LAN access for service personnel, can be enabled or disabled by the operator
• Management interfaces for management communication networks (MCN) and
signaling communication networks (SCN), for example TL1.
• Alarm overview (LED panel)
• Alarm cut-off button
• Reset button
• GMRE/GMPLS functionality for automatically switched optical networks (TDM
control plane).
• Management agents including event reporting and logging, equipment database
management, SW downloading and management, performance monitoring
management, alarm management, security management.
• USB interface for software installation
• Management of the network element database, resident on a mass storage (for
example, SSD).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Redundancy of the FLC card itself, supported both by dedicated hardware and
software
• Management of housekeeping I/O (prepared for future releases), remote alarms, and
rack lamps through dedicated hardware and software.
The FLC card has to be equipped twice in the system to ensure data base resiliency, that
means the protection of the NE configuration against hardwre failures (for example). One
FLC card will be active. The inactive FLC card enters a “warm” standby state which
implies that it can take over the active role once the former active FLC has given up its
role. The mass storage devices are synchronized initially after recovery and kept
permanently in synchronization. The active/standby logic is directly driven by the
microprocessor module.
Once an FLC card is active, the other FLC card cannot become active unless the active
FLC card gives up its active role (for example, by a reboot). However, there might be
reasons that the other FLC card must not become active (for example, if the mass storages
are not yet fully synchronized).
The active/standby state of the FLC is propagated to other components by dedicated
interface lines.
External interfaces
Figure 4-17 FLC front panel and backplane interfaces
LAN
CIT
USB
OAMP
DSER ECC
LEDs
Reset button
ACO button
LTEST button CTRL
FLC
Front panel ß à Backplane g_pipg_0140_36
Table 4-6 FLC front panel and backplane interfaces
LAN interface for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC access and debug
CIT
USB USB connector, disk-on-key interface used for software installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 FLC front panel and backplane interfaces (continued)
OAMP Management communication network (MCN) access, 1 × LAN
DSER Serial debug interface

LEDs LEDs on front, card status, system status
Reset button Reset button, initiates a “cold” reset

ACO button Alarm cut-off button, clears the network element alarm indicators (rack
top lamps, remote alarms interface)
LTEST button LED test button, not supported in the current software release
LAN LAN interfaces, ILAN, IPL
ECC Toward I/O cards

CTRL Goup of lines for control and communication
Controls
The following buttons are located at the front of the First-Level Controller (FLC):
• Alarm cut-off button
• Reset button
• Lamp test button, not supported in the current software release
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Front view
The front view of the PSS-64 FLC is shown in the following figure:
Figure 4-18 Front view of the PSS-64 FLC
6 2
R
EPS
STAT
2
3
12 1
4
OAMP
CM
5
mW
AT AB
1
11 CIT
10
9 DSER
6
g_pipg_0141
Legend:
1 LEDs “STAT”, “EPS”

2 LAN interface “OAMP” for the management communication network (MCN) with LEDs “1” and “2”
3 LEDs “C”, “M”
4 LEDs “m”, “W”

5 LEDs “AT”, “AB”
6 Latches
7 Lamp test button (LTEST), not supported in the current software release
8 Alarm cut-off button (ACO)
9 USB connector, disk-on-key interface used for software installation
10 Serial debug interface “DSER”, for internal purposes
11 LAN interface “CIT” for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC access with LEDs “1” and “2”
12 Reset button “R”
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The front view of the PSS-36 FLC is identical to the PSS-64 FLC, except the front plate
width of 20 mm instead of 27.5 mm.
Visual indications
For information on the LEDs on the front panel of the FLC, see “LEDs of the First-Level
Controller (FLC)” (p. 5-66).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description Agnostic matrix cards (MT960C, MT1T9)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Agnostic matrix cards (MT960C, MT1T9)

Introduction
The agnostic matrices with their universal fabric as the core piece of Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS provide ODU switching capabilities. SDH/SONET and packet traffic is
transparently mapped into ODU. Switching of SDH/SONET and packet traffic is
hardware-prepared for future software releases. Two different matrix card types are
available. The MT960C agnostic matrix card is for use in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36
subrack. The MT1T9 agnostic matrix card is for use in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64
subrack. While the architecture of the matrix cards is similar, the switching capacity is
different.
Table 4-7 Overall switching capacity
Matrix card type Subrack Switching capacity

for ODU traffic
960G Agnostic Matrix (MT960C) Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 960 Gb/s
1T9 Agnostic Matrix (MT1T9) Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 1.92 Tb/s
On the matrix cards, four groups of functionalities are implemented:

• Second-level controller (SLC)
• Clock reference unit (CRU)
• Switch fabric matrix
• LAN switch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-19 Main function blocks and interfaces of the agnostic matrix cards
(MT960C, MT1T9)
PBA left Backplane PBA right

Power, ground
Power supply Power supply
ES
E LAN
switch LAN
DCN
DSER Overhead
Overhead links processing,
protection
Internal control handling
Switch fabric Payload

matrix Switch fabric
matrix
DPRT Second-level CTRL

controller (PQ3 Clock reference
DSER on daughterboard) unit (CRU)
Clock distribution
g-pipg-0110
Legend:
DCN: SCN/AUX, and VOIP
Second-level controller (SLC)

The function of the SLC is control and management of the part concerning SDH/SONET,
OTN, and packet functionality. The control infrastructure is managed by a controller
module. Extension shelves can be controlled from the SLC through the LAN switch.
Clock reference unit (CRU)
The CRU provides reference T0 clock and timing frame synchronization used in all
SDH/SONET units and for external timing.
Switch fabric matrix
The matrix accomplishes ODU and packet switching functions (central scheduler). The
alarm and performance monitoring overhead processing and protection management
functionality as well as packet functionality (central scheduler) is managed by dedicated
devices. SNC protection for ODU is also supported by the switch fabric matrix.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LAN switch
The LAN switch performs the management of the internal and external local area network
(LAN) to be used for communication among microprocessor and/or for propagation of
control packets extracted from the data path. In future software releases, extension
shelves can be connected to the matrix card unit through LAN cable.
Distribution of functions
The functional blocks are distributed on two separate printed board assemblies (PBA)
PBA left and PBA right as follows:
• PBA left: Switch fabric matrix, second-level controller (SLC), LAN switch, internal
control devices
• PBA right: Switch fabric matrix , clock reference unit (CRU), alarm and performance
monitoring overhead processing, protection management, central scheduler
There is no direct interconnection from left to right PBA (only through backplane). The
matrix slot can accommodate a sandwich card design where the two components sides are
oriented face to face. Both boards receive the nominal –48V from the backplane, hence a
power filter supply is implemented on each board.
The matrix cards have to be installed redundantly for transmission and control reliability
reasons. One matrix card will be active. The inactive matrix card enters a standby state
which implies that it can take over the active role once the former active matrix card has
given up its role. Both cards operate in a hot-standby relationship (they operate the same
code due to same triggers), and data is synchronized between both SLC functions.
External interfaces
Table 4-8 External interfaces of the agnostic matrix cards (MT960C, MT1T9)
ES1, ES2 LAN interface for drop subrack connection, prepared for future
software releases
E 1, 2 LAN interface for extension subrack connection, prepared for future

software releases
SCN/AUX, VoIP LAN interface for control management, prepared for future software
releases
DSER 1 RS-232 debug interface for the LAN switch

DSER 2 RS-232 debug interface of the PQ3 module
DPRT 1 LAN debug interface of the PQ3 module

DPRT 2 LAN debug interface for the LAN switch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Controls
The button “R” on the agnostic matrix cards can be used to restart the second-level
controller.
Front view
The front of the agnostic matrix cards is shown in the following figures:
Figure 4-20 Agnostic matrix card front view (MT1T9)
7
SCN / AUX
VOIP
6
ES1
ES2
5 8
E1
E2
4
DPRT1
DPRT2
3
DSER1
DSER2
2
STAT
EPS
g_pipg_1123
Legend:
1 LEDs “STAT”, “EPS”
2 Serial interface debug “DSER1”, “DSER2”, reserved for future use

3 LAN debug interfaces “DPRT1”, “DPRT2”
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Reset button (R)
5 LAN interfaces “E1”, “E2” for extension subrack connection, prepared for future software releases
6 LAN interface “ES1”, “ES2” for drop subrack connection, prepared for future software releases
7 LAN interface “SCN/AUX ”, “VOIP ”for control management, prepared for future software releases
8 Latches
Figure 4-21 Agnostic matrix card front view (MT960C)
4 R
STAT
EPS
1
1
R
E
S
D
DPRT1
SCN/AUX
VOIP
7 Es1
3 2 8
6
Es2
E1
5 E2
DPRT2
2
R
E
S
D
g-pipg-110705
Legend:
Refer to MT1T9 legend.
Visual indications
For information about the LEDs on the front panel, see “LEDs of the agnostic matrix
cards ” (p. 5-69).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Location
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack, MT960C agnostic matrix cards are inserted
into non-standard slots 10/11 (MX_A) and 14/15 (MX_B). In the both locations, the same
type of agnostic matrix card must be used.
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack, MTIT9 agnostic matrix cards are inserted
into non-standard slots 71 (MX_A) and 72 (MX_B). In both slots, the same type of
agnostic matrix card has to be used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit (10XANY10G)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 × 10G ANY Port Unit (10XANY10G)

Introduction
The 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit (10XANY10G) is a flexible multi-rate and multi-protocol
bidirectional traffic card. It can be equipped with up to ten optical modules (XFP). The
ten ports can operate in different modes, where groups of two ports must operate in the
same mode.
Figure 4-22 10XANY10G transmission interfaces
Line ports Backplane links

(optical interfaces)
Port 1
Payload
Port 2 Matrix
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
CTRL
Port 9 Matrix
ECC
Port 10 10XANY10G FLC
g-pipg-0032
Table 4-9 10XANY10G main traffic processing features
Optical line signal Processing Backplane/fabric

interface
10 GbE WAN / STM-64 / STM-64 / OC-192 ingress section monitoring ODU2

OC-192 STM-64 / OC-192 mapping into ODU2
ODU2 Sk/So
OTU2 ODU2 OTU2 termination ODU2

payload ODU2 monitoring
OTU2/ODU2 termination ODU1

ODU1 monitoring
OTU2e OTU2e Termination ODU2e
ODU2e Monitoring
10 GbE LAN 10 GbE LAN PCS and MAC processing ODU2

GFP-F mapping into OPU2
ODU2 Sk/So
10 GbE LAN PCS ODU2e
ODU2 Sk/So
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The ports on the 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit (10XANY10G) are subdivided into so-called
port groups which share a common port group mode. This port group mode, in
combination with the available types of optical interface modules (SFPs/XFPs),
determines the provisioning opportunities for the ports. Ports in the same port group must
be consistently provisioned.
The following port groups are defined:
Table 4-10 10XANY10G port groups
Port groups
Ports 1/2
Ports 3/4
Ports 5/6
Ports 7/8
Ports 9/10
The following port group modes and associated client selection modes are supported:
Table 4-11 10XANY10G port group modes and client selection modes
Interface mode Port group mode Client selectors
Network OTH_OTH OTU2 (OTU2 terminated)

OTU2e (OTU2e terminated)
Client ETHSTH_OTH GBE10ODU2 (10 Gb/s Ethernet mapped into
ODU2)
GBE10ODU2e (10 Gb/s Ethernet mapped into
ODU2e)
GBE10ODU2 (10 Gb/s EthernetTransparently
mapped into ODU2 via AMCC.)
In SDH mode: STM64T (STM-64 transparently
mapped into ODU2)
In SONET mode: OC192T (OC-192 transparently
mapped into ODU2)
– PWRSV Power-save mode: changing to any client selection

mode is possible.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-23 10XANY10G mapping and termination functions (port group mode
OTH_OTH)
Port Signal to/from

signal Port group mode OTH_OTH fabric
EFEC OTU-2 ODU-2 ODU-2
XFP OTM-0.2
4 × ODU-1 ODU-1
HO/LO
Mux/
Demux
8 × ODU-0 ODU-0
OTM-0.2e
EFEC OTU-2e ODU-2e ODU-2e
g-pipg-0031
Figure 4-24 10XANY10G mapping and termination functions (port group mode
ETHSTH_OTH)
Port Signal to/from

signal Port group mode ETHSTH_OTH fabric
STM-64/ STM-64 <-> ODU-2

ODU-2
OC-192 (RS NIM)
XFP
PCS GFP-F/PPOS <-> ODU-2 ODU-2
10 GbE
LAN
PCS CBR/BMP <-> ODU-2e ODU-2e
g-pipg-0038
Network interface mode

In the OTN/TDM network interface mode, the 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit supports the
following signals and functions:
• OTM-0.2 with ODUk fabric access (k = 1, 2)
• OTM-0.2e with ODU2e fabric access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
On OTM-0.2 and on OTM-0.2e level, the FEC mechanism can be configured as follows:
• no FEC
(EFEC conforms to the requirements for the Two Interleaved Extended BCH
(1020,988) super FEC code as described in Section I.9 of ITU-T Recommendation
G.975.1.)
Client interface mode

In the TDM/10 GbE client interface mode, the 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit supports the
• 10 GbE LAN PHY with ODU2 fabric access allowing GFP-F mapping into ODU2
• STM-64/OC-192 with ODU2 fabric access
• STM-64/OC-192/10 GbE WAN PHY interface with mapping into ODU2
10 GbE LAN functions

The 10 GbE LAN client modes can be further separated by their functionality as follows:
• MAC transparent with full capacity CBR10G
• ETY information transparent (AMCC mapping)
• ETY bit-transparent (CBR10G3)
MAC transparent with full capacity CBR10G
In this mode, 10 GbE LAN signals are mapped through GFP-F into OPU2.
The available functions include:
• ETH FCS checking, ODU2 termination, LCAS, ETH reconciliation sublayer
• LAN side: Termination of ETY 10Gbase-R physical coding sublayer
• WAN side: GFP-F encapsulation
ETY information transparent (AMCC mapping)
In this mode, 10 GbE LAN (± 100 ppm) signals are mapped through GFP-F into
“extended OPU2 payload” ITU-T recommendation G.709, chapter 17.3.1 and ITU-T
recommendation G.7041-2008, chapter 7.9, amendment 1.
• The reconciliation sublayer of the local side LAN link is not terminated. It is tunneled
through the WAN link to the LAN link of the remote NE.
• LAN side: Partial termination of ETY 10Gbase-R physical coding sublayer, fault
management, and performance monitoring in ingress and egress direction
• WAN side: GFP-F encapsulation and decapsulation, no termination of the
reconciliation sublayer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• MAC layer (layer 2) transparent
• PHY layer (layer 1) transparent for preamble only, not timing transparent
ETY bit-transparent (CBR10G3)
In this mode, 10 GbE LAN (± 100 ppm) signals are mapped into ODU2e ITU-T
recommendation G.709, chapter 17.3.4.
• LAN side: O/E-adaptation, PCS block bypassed, fault management and performance
monitoring in ingress and egress direction
• WAN side: bit synchronous mapping, that means, static stuffing directly into
“OPU2e” (± 100 ppm)
GCC support
The 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit supports GCC1 on HO ODU2 (direction OTM-0.2 port).
For the transport of GCCs to and from the First-Level Controllers (FLC), the ECC links
are used.
Monitoring
The following general monitoring functions are supported:
• Full range for Degraded Threshold for dDEG detection per monitor point
• Enable/disable provisioning for consequent actions on TIM per monitor point
• Support of operator-specific TTI bytes (32…63)
In the TDM client mode, the 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit supports:
• RS-NIM monitoring for the ingress direction
In the OTM-0.2 network mode, the 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit supports:
• ODU path termination and monitoring. SF/SD signaling per HO-ODU (ODU2).
• ODU TCM termination respectively monitoring. TCM NIMs can be configured as
protection trigger for SNCP/N.
Protection functionality
The following protection functions are supported:
• 1+1 SNC/N with ODU path NIM for HO-ODU and LO-ODU without APS
• 1+1 SNC/Nc - ODUk SNC/Nc based on RS_NIM client signal non-intrusive
monitoring - "Single NE protection" subtype
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Test and maintenance functions
The following test and maintenance functions are supported:
• Optical facility loop back / near side facility loop / port inloop
• Terminal loop / far side facility loop / port outloop
Optical modules
For the XFP modules that can be used on the 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit, see Table 4-3,
“List of optical modules” (p. 4-9).
For additional details on the modules, see “Available optical modules” (p. 4-77).
Front view
The front of the 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit (10XANY10G) is shown in the following
figure:
Figure 4-25 10XANY10G front view
1
2
3 2
g_pipg_0143
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Legend:
1 Status LED
2 XFP positions
3 Latches
Visual indications
For information about the LED on the front panel, see “LED of the I/O cards” (p. 5-71).
Location
The 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit (10XANY10G) can be inserted into any I/O card slot. In
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack the following restriction applies: If the
10XANY10G hosts the tunable DWDM XFP (LRT11G1TU) it must be located in the
lower half of the subrack (slots 33 to 40 or 41 to 48, respectively).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit (10XOTH10G)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit (10XOTH10G)

Introduction
The 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit (10XOTH10G) is a flexible multi-rate and
multi-protocol bidirectional traffic card. It can be equipped with up to ten optical modules
(XFP). The ten ports can operate in different modes, where groups of two ports must
operate in the same mode.
Figure 4-26 10XOTH10G transmission interfaces

Port 1
Payload
Port 2 Matrix
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
CTRL
Port 9 Matrix
ECC
Port 10 10XOTH10G FLC
g-pipg-0260
Table 4-12 10XOTH10G main traffic processing features
Optical line Processing Backplane/fabric interface

signal
STM-64 / STM-64 / OC-192 monitoring ODU2

OC-192 STM-64 / OC-192 mapping into ODU2
ODU2 Sk/So
OTU2 OTU2 termination ODU2

(ODU2 ODU2 monitoring
payload)
ODU1 monitoring
ODU0 monitoring
OTU2e OTU2e termination ODU2e

(ODU2e ODU2e monitoring
payload)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The ports on the 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit (10XOTH10G) are subdivided into so-called
Table 4-13 10XOTH10G port groups
Port groups
Ports 1/2
Ports 3/4
Ports 5/6
Ports 7/8
Ports 9/10
Table 4-14 10XOTH10G port group modes and client selection modes
Port group mode Client selectors
OTH_OTH OTU2 (OTU2 terminated)

OTU2e (OTU2e terminated)
ETHSTH_OTH In SDH mode: STM64T (STM-64 transparently mapped into ODU2)
In SONET mode: OC192T (OC-192 transparently mapped into ODU2)
PWRSV Power-save mode: changing to any client selection mode is possible.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-27 10XOTH10G mapping and termination functions
Port Network interface mode Signal to/from

signal fabric
OTM-0.2 EFEC OTU-2 ODU-2 ODU-2
HO/LO 4 x ODU-1 ODU-1

Mux/
Demux 8 x ODU-0 ODU-0
XFP OTM-0.2e EFEC OTU-2e ODU-2e ODU-2e

10 Í
STM-64/ STM-64 <-> ODU-2

ODU2
OC-192 (RS-NIM)
g-pipg-0261
Network interface mode

In the network interface mode, the 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit (10XOTH10G) supports
the following signals and functions:
• OTM-0.2 with ODUk fabric access (k = 1, 2)
• OTM-0.2e with ODU2e fabric access

In the client interface mode, the 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit (10XOTH10G) supports the
GCC support
The 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit (10XOTH10G) supports GCC1 on HO ODU2.
For the transport of GCCs to and from the First-Level Controllers (FLC), the ECC links
are used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Monitoring
• RS-NIM monitoring at termination
• RS-NIM monitoring for the ingress direction (in client interface mode)
• ODU path termination and monitoring (in network interface mode). One APS channel
per physical port and SF/SD signaling per HO-ODU (ODU2) plus eight APS channels
per physical port for the upper eight LO-ODU signals (considering ODU0).
• 1+1 SNC/Nc - ODUk SNC/Nc based on ODUkP client signal non-intrusive

Optical modules
For the XFP modules that can be used on the 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit, see Table 4-3,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Front view
The front of the 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit (10XOTH10G) is shown in the following
figure:
Figure 4-28 10XOTH10G front view
1
2
3 2
g_pipg_0143
Legend:
1 Status LED
2 XFP positions
3 Latches
Visual indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Location
The 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit (10XOTH10G) can be inserted into any I/O card slot. In
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack the following restriction applies: If the
10XOTH10G hosts the tunable DWDM XFP (LRT11G1TU) it must be located in the
lower half of the subrack (slots 33 to 40 or 41 to 48, respectively).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description 10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit (10XETH10G)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit (10XETH10G)

Introduction
The 10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit (10XETH10G) is a flexible multi-rate and
multi-protocol bidirectional Ethernet traffic card. It can be equipped with up to ten optical
modules (XFP). The ten ports can operate in different modes, where groups of two ports
must operate in the same mode.
Figure 4-29 10XETH10G transmission interfaces

Port 1
Payload
Port 2 Matrix
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
CTRL
Port 9 Matrix
ECC
Port 10 10XETH10G FLC
g-pipg-0262
Table 4-15 10XETH10G main traffic processing features

interface

GFP-F/AMCC mapping into OPU2
ODU2 Sk/So
10 GbE LAN PCS and MAC processing ODU2e

CBR/BMP mapping into extended OPU2
ODU2 Sk/So
The ports on the 10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit (10XETH10G) are subdivided into
so-called port groups which share a common port group mode. This port group mode, in
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-16 10XETH10G port groups
Port groups
Ports 1/2
Ports 3/4
Ports 5/6
Ports 7/8
Ports 9/10
Table 4-17 10XETH10G port group modes and client selection modes
ETHSTH_OTH GBE10ODU2 (10 Gb/s Ethernet mapped into ODU2)

GBE10ODU2e (10 Gb/s Ethernet mapped into ODU2e)
Figure 4-30 10XETH10G mapping and termination functions
Port Signal to/from

signal fabric
10 GbE GFP-F/AMCC <-> ODU-2

PCS ODU-2
LAN
XFP
10 Í
10 GbE GBR/BMP <-> ODU-2e

PCS ODU-2e
LAN
g-pipg-0263
The 10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit (10XETH10G) supports the following signals and
functions:
• 10 GbE LAN PHY with ODU2 fabric access allowing GFP-F mapping into ODU2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 GbE LAN functions
The 10 GbE LAN client modes can be further separated by their functionality as follows:
• MAC transparent with full capacity CBR10G
• ETY information transparent (AMCC mapping)
• ETY bit-transparent (CBR10G3)
MAC transparent with full capacity CBR10G
In this mode, 10 GbE LAN signals are mapped through GFP-F into OPU2.
• ETH FCS checking, ODU2 termination, LCAS, ETH reconciliation sublayer
• LAN side: Termination of ETY 10Gbase-R physical coding sublayer
• WAN side: GFP-F encapsulation
ETY information transparent (AMCC mapping)
In this mode, 10 GbE LAN (± 100 ppm) signals are mapped through GFP-F into
“extended OPU2 payload” ITU-T recommendation G.709, chapter 17.3.1 and ITU-T
recommendation G.7041-2008, chapter 7.9, amendment 1.
• LAN side: Partial termination of ETY 10Gbase-R physical coding sublayer, fault
management, and performance monitoring in ingress and egress direction
• WAN side: GFP-F encapsulation and decapsulation, no termination of the
reconciliation sublayer
ETY bit-transparent (CBR10G3)
In this mode, 10 GbE LAN (± 100 ppm) signals are mapped into ODU2+ ITU-T
recommendation G.709, chapter 17.3.4.
• LAN side: O/E-adaptation, PCS block bypassed, fault management and performance
monitoring in ingress and egress direction
• WAN side: bit synchronous mapping, that means, static stuffing directly into
“OPU2e” (± 100 ppm)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical modules
For the XFP modules that can be used on the 10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit, see Table 4-3,
Front view
The front of the 10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit (10XETH10G) is shown in the following
figure:
Figure 4-31 10XETH10G front view
1
2
3 2
g_pipg_0143
Legend:
1 Status LED
2 XFP positions
3 Latches
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Visual indications
Location
The 10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit (10XETH10G) can be inserted into any I/O card slot.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 × 40G ANY Port Unit (2XANY40G)

Introduction
The 2 × 40G ANY Port Unit (2XANY40G) is a bidirectional traffic card with two 40 G
very short reach (VSR) line interfaces. The 2XANY40G unit ports can operate in
different port group modes.
Figure 4-32 2XANY40G transmission interfaces

Payload
Matrix
Port 1
Port 2
CTRL
Matrix
ECC
2XANY40G FLC
g-pipg-0053
Table 4-18 2XANY40G main traffic processing features

interface
OTM0.3 ODU3 OTU3 termination ODU3

payload
OTU3 termination ODU0
ODU3 demultiplexing
ODU0 monitoring
The ports on the 2 × 40G ANY Port Unit (2XANY40G) are subdivided into so-called port
groups which share a common port group mode. This port group mode determines the
provisioning opportunities for the ports. Ports in the same port group must be consistently
provisioned.
Table 4-19 2XANY40G port groups
Port groups
Port 1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-19 2XANY40G port groups (continued)
Port groups
Port 2
Table 4-20 2XANY40G port group modes and client selection modes
OTH_OTH OTU3 (OTU3 terminated)
OTH network mode

In the OTH network mode, the 2 × 40G ANY Port Unit supplies the following functions:
• Termination of OTM-0.3 to ODU3
• Termination of HO-ODU (ODU3) to LO-ODU, where LO-ODU can be a mix of
ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2, in Release 4.0 only ODU0
Note that the mappings to ODU2 and to ODU1 are not supported in Release 4.0.
Figure 4-33 2XANY40G mapping and termination functions
Signal to/from
Port fabric
signal
VSR OTM-0.3 OTU-3 ODU-3

2Í
4 x ODU-2 ODU-2
HO/LO
Mux/ 16 x ODU-1 ODU-1
Demux
32 x ODU-0 ODU-0
g-pipg-0050
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overhead interfaces
The following information is transported inband (together with payload) to the matrix
cards for further processing:
• Additional SDH/SONET OH transport for OTN ports with embedded transport of
OC-m/STM-n) through matrix interface:
– APS bytes (K1/K2) and related SF/SD info
– Section-related PM primitives (MS and RS layer), remote info, and defects
– OTN APS channels: 1 APS channel including SF/SD signaling per HO-ODU
(ODU3) and 1 APS channel per LO-ODU signal (up to 32 LO-ODU signals
(ODU0 case) have to be taken into account)
– Remote info forwarding and insertion through OH channel to the matrix
– PM primitives for ODU layers. This applies to the following layers: OCH/OTU3,
3 × ODU3_TM (TCM layers), ODU3_TT (ODU3 path termination), and
LO-ODU layers (3 × TCM + path termination)
– OTN defects for all ODU layers
GCC support
The 2 × 40G ANY Port Unit supports GCC1 on HO ODU3.
Monitoring
The following monitoring functions are supported:
• Path monitoring of ingress and egress direction for ODU3
• Alarms and PM ITU-T recommendation G.798
• ODU TCM termination respectively monitoring. Instead of the HO-ODU path one of
the three HO-ODU TCM NIMs feeds the network protection, instead of a LO-ODU
path one of the three LO-ODU TCM NIMs feeds the network protection.
• 1+1 SNC/Nc - ODUk SNC/Nc based on ODUkP client signal non-intrusive
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Interface characteristics
The OTM-0.3 interface fulfills the characteristics according to the following application
codes as specified in ITU-T Recommendation G.693:
• VSR2000-3R2
• VSR2000-3R3
• VSR2000-3R5
The target distance for OTN, SDH, and SONET is 2 km.
See “Transmission parameters” (p. 10-3) for detailed technical data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Front view
The front of the 2 × 40G ANY Port Unit (2XANY40G) is shown in the following figure:
Figure 4-34 2XANY40G front view
1
2
3 2
g_pipg_0145
Legend:
1 Status LED
2 Optical ports
3 Latches
Visual indications
Location
The 2 × 40G ANY Port Unit (2XANY40G) can be inserted into any I/O card slot.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description 24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit (24XANYMR)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit (24XANYMR)

Introduction
The 24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit (24XANYMR) is a flexible multi-rate and
multi-protocol bidirectional traffic card. It can be equipped with up to 24 optical modules
(SFP). The 24 ports can operate in different modes, where groups of eight ports must
Figure 4-35 24XANYMR transmission interfaces

Port 1
Payload
Port 2 Matrix
Port 3
CTRL
Matrix
ECC
Port 24 24XANYMR FLC
g-pipg-0042
Table 4-21 24XANYMR main traffic processing features

interface
STM-16 / OC-48 STM-16 / OC-48 monitoring ODU1

STM-16 / OC-48 mapping into ODU1 preserving the
native frequency of the optical line signal
ODU1 Sk/So
1 GbE LAN ODU0 mapping ODU0
The ports on the 24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit (24XANYMR) are subdivided into
so-called port groups which share a common port group mode. This port group mode, in
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-22 24XANYMR port groups
Port groups
Ports 1 to 8
Ports 9 to 16
Ports 17 to 24
Table 4-23 24XANYMR port group modes and client selection modes
Network STH_OTHSTH In SDH mode:

• STM-16T (STM-16 transparently mapped into
ODU1)
In SONET mode:
• OC-48T (OC-48 transparently mapped into
ODU1)
Client ETHSTH_OTH GBE (1 Gb/s Ethernet transparently mapped into
ODU0)
mode is possible.
Figure 4-36 24XANYMR main mapping and termination functions
Port Signal to/from

signal fabric
STM-16 STM-16 <-> ODU-1

ODU-1
OC-48 (RS-NIM)
XFP
24 Í
GbE GMP<-> ODU-0

PCS ODU-0
LAN
g-pipg-0263
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TDM interface mode
In the TDM interface mode, the 24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit (24XANYMR) supports
the following signals:
Gigabit Ethernet interface mode

In the Gigabit Ethernet interface mode, the 24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit (24XANYMR)
supports 1-Gb/s LAN .
Sink side
The Optical Receiver performs the conversion from an optical to an electrical signal. The
optical receiver also performs LOS detection.
The PCS + Monitor function recovers the packets from the port data and performs
monitoring.
The Backplane Framer receives the incoming data stream on a 6.2-Gb/s differential
interface, computes and inserts FEC values, and constructs the backplane signaling frame.
Source side
interface, corrects any errors based on the FEC, removes FEC values, and constructs the
signaling frame.
The MAC + Monitor function prepares the packets for transmission as a GE LAN signal
and performs monitoring.
The Optical Transmitter performs the conversion from a differential electrical signal to an
optical signal.
GCC support
The 24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit does not support GCCs.
Monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical modules
For the SFP modules that can be used on the 24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit, see Table
4-3, “List of optical modules” (p. 4-9).
Front view
The front of the 24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit (24XANYMR) is shown in the following
figure:
Figure 4-37 24XANYMR front view
1
2
STAT
TX RX
1
TX RX
2
TX RX
3
TX RX
4
TX RX
5
TX RX
6
TX RX
7
TX RX
8
TX RX
9
TX RX
10
3 TX RX
2
11
TX RX
12
TX RX
13
TX RX
14
TX RX
15
TX RX
16
TX RX
17
TX RX
18
TX RX
19
TX RX
20
TX RX
21
TX RX
22
TX RX
23
TX RX
24
g_pipg_0144
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Legend:
1 Status LED
2 SFP positions
3 Latches
Visual indications
Location
The 24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit (24XANYMR) can be inserted into any I/O card slot.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description 24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit (24XETH1G)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit (24XETH1G)

Introduction
The 24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit (24XETH1G) is a flexible multi-rate and multi-protocol
bidirectional Ethernet traffic card. It can be equipped with up to 24 optical modules
(SFP). The 24 ports can operate in different modes, where groups of eight ports must
Figure 4-38 24XETH1G transmission interfaces

Port 1
Payload
Port 2 Matrix
Port 3
CTRL
Matrix
ECC
Port 24 24XETH1G FLC
g-pipg-0044
Table 4-24 24XETH1G main traffic processing features

interface
The ports on the 24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit (24XETH1G) are subdivided into so-called
Table 4-25 24XETH1G port groups
Port groups
Ports 1 to 8
Ports 9 to 16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-25 24XETH1G port groups (continued)
Port groups
Ports 17 to 24
Table 4-26 24XETH1G port group modes and client selection modes
Client ETHSTH_OTH GBE (1 Gb/s Ethernet transparently mapped into

ODU0)

mode is possible.
Figure 4-39 24XETH1G main mapping and termination functions
Port Signal to/from

signal fabric
1 GbE GMP <-> ODU-0

SFP PCS ODU-0
LAN
24 ×
g-pipg-0045
The 24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit (24XETH1G) supports 1-Gb/s LAN.

Sink side
The Optical Receiver performs the conversion from an optical to an electrical signal. The
optical receiver also performs LOS detection.
The PCS + Monitor function recovers the packets from the port data and performs
monitoring.
interface, computes and inserts FEC values, and constructs the backplane signaling frame.
Source side
interface, corrects any errors based on the FEC, removes FEC values, and constructs the
signaling frame.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The MAC + Monitor function prepares the packets for transmission as a GE LAN signal
and performs monitoring.
The Optical Transmitter performs the conversion from a differential electrical signal to an
optical signal.
Optical modules
For the SFP modules that can be used on the 24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit, see Table 4-3,
Front view
The front of the 24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit (24XETH1G) is shown in the following
figure:
Figure 4-40 24XETH1G front view
1
2
STAT
TX RX
1
TX RX
2
TX RX
3
TX RX
4
TX RX
5
TX RX
6
TX RX
7
TX RX
8
TX RX
9
TX RX
10
3 TX RX
2
11
TX RX
12
TX RX
13
TX RX
14
TX RX
15
TX RX
16
TX RX
17
TX RX
18
TX RX
19
TX RX
20
TX RX
21
TX RX
22
TX RX
23
TX RX
24
g_pipg_0144
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Legend:
1 Status LED
2 SFP positions
3 Latches
Visual indications
For information about the LEDs on the front panel, see “LED of the I/O cards” (p. 5-71).
Location
The 24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit (24XETH1G) can be inserted into any I/O card slot.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description Available optical modules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Available optical modules

Small form-factor pluggable (SFP) transceivers
The following small form-factor pluggable (SFP) transceivers are available for
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS:
• SR12G7TU (S2G7D2I)
2.5 Gb/s module: STM-16/OC-48/OTM-0.1 (I-16.1/SR-1/P1I1-1D1), 1310 nm; reach:
2 km; temperature range: –5 to +85 °C (23 to 185 °F)
• IR12G7TU (S2G7D15E)
2.5 Gb/s module: STM-16/OC-48/OTM-0.1 (S-16.1/IR-1/P1S1-1D1), 1310 nm;
reach: 15 km; temperature range: –5 to +85 °C (23 to 185 °F)
• LR12G7TU (S2G7D40E)
2.5 Gb/s module: STM-16/OC-48/OTM-0.1 (L-16.1/LR-1/P1L1-1D1), 1310 nm;
• LR22G7TU (S2G7D80E)
2.5 Gb/s module: STM-16/OC-48/OTM-0.1 (L-16.2/LR-2/P1L1-1D2), 1550 nm;
• IR12G7AU (S2G7M15I)
Multirate module: GbE, STM-16, OTU1 (S-16.1/IR-1/P1S1-1D1), 1310 nm; reach:
15 km; temperature range: –5 to +85 °C (23 to 185 °F)
• 1000BSXU (S1GE05I)
GbE module: 1000BASE-SX, 850 nm VCSEL; reach: 550 m; multi-mode fiber;
temperature range: –5 to +85 °C (23 to 185 °F)
• 1000BLXU (S1GE10I)
GbE module: 1000BASE-LX, 1310 nm FP; reach: 10 km; temperature range: –5 to
+85 °C (23 to 185 °F)
• 1000BZXU (S1GE80I)
GbE module: 1000BASE-ZX, 1550 nm DFB; reach: 70 km; temperature range: –5 to
+85 °C (23 to 185 °F)
The interfaces comply with the following:
• ITU-T Recommendations G.691, G.959.1 (OTN, SDH)
• Telcordia ® Requirement GR-253-CORE (SONET)
• IEEE Standard 802.3 (Ethernet)
10 Gigabit Small Form Factor Pluggable (XFP) transceivers

The following 10 Gigabit Small Form Factor Pluggable (XFP) transceivers are available
for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS:
• SR111G1AU (X11M10I)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description Available optical modules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Gb/s multirate module: STM-64/OC-192/OTM-0.2 (I-64.1/SR-1/P1I1-2D1),
10GBASE-LR/LW, 1310 nm DFB; reach: 2 km (for OTN/SONET/SDH), 10 km (for
Ethernet); temperature range: –5 to +85 °C (23 to 185 °F)
• IR211G1AU (X11M40I)
10 Gb/s multirate module: STM-64/OC-192/OTM-0.2 (S-64.2b/IR-2/P1S1-2D2b),
10GBASE-ER/EW, 1550 nm DFB; reach: 40 km; temperature range: –5 to +85 °C
(23 to 185 °F)
• LR211G1AU (X11M80E)
10 Gb/s multirate module: STM-64/OC-192/OTM-0.2 ( LR-2/P1L1-2D2),
10GBASE-ZR/ZW, 1550 nm DFB; reach: 80 km; temperature range: –5 to +85 °C
(23 to 185 °F)
• LRT11G1TU (X11MDTNC)
10 Gb/s tunable DWDM module (STM-64/DWDM); CML/SM) 1529.16 nm to
1568.36 nm, 50 GHz grid; temperature range: –5 to +70 °C (23 to 158 °F); sensitivity:
–25 dBm
Unused optical ports on SFPs or XFPs must be covered with the appropriate dummy plug
(dust cap).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description Synchronization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Synchronization
In the present release, OTH technology is used to transparently transport client signals,
including timing transparency.
In an optical transport network (OTN), network synchronization can be transported
transparently within the client signals. Hence, no network synchronization chains are
necessary, and the demands on synchronization are lower than those of an SDH/SONET
network, for example. As the individual nodes of an OTN are independent from each
other regarding their system timing, it is sufficient to operate the internal oscillators in
free-running mode for timing purposes.
To summarize synchronization and timing for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS R4.0:
• System timing is derived from internal oscillators, operated in free-running mode.
The frequency stability in the free-running mode is better than 4.6 ppm, in compliance
with the ITU-T Recommendation G.813, Option 1.
• Synchronization interfaces for external and line timing references are prepared for
potential future applications but are currently not supported.
Note: Do not use the external timing inputs on the Power Supply, Filter, and Clock
Interface Cards (PSF3T8) of the PSS-64 subrack or Power Filter Cards (PFC) of the
PSS-36 subrack!
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description PSS-64 Power distribution concept
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PSS-64 Power distribution concept

General power distribution architecture
The power distribution architecture of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS follows a hierarchical
approach from the office battery down to the plug-in units. The main interfaces and their
functions are shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-41 PSS-64 Power distribution (principal view)
PSF_A
Feeder A
PSF_B
Feeder B
g-itg-0100
Legend:
i1 Interface from office BDFB (cable routing from battery) to HPCFAP, each line here represents one power
branch
i2 Interface from HPCFAP to PSF3T8 (A and B)
i3 Interface (through backplane) from PSF3T8 to plug-in units
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power distribution through High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP)
Located at the top of the rack, the High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel
(HPCFAP) provides redundant power interfaces which are protected with circuit breakers.
Cables from multiple battery feeders are routed along the rack uprights to the subrack,
power cables are routed within that rack.
The HPCFAP accepts up to three independent inputs from the central office battery (for
example BDFB) in a range from –40 V to –72 V (nominal voltages of either –48 V or
–60 V
The battery return of each feeder input and frame ground is isolated from the battery
returns of the other feeder inputs.
Power branches
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS subrack, there are three power areas (power branches)
that follow each power feed (A, B) from the central office BDFB (battery distribution
fuse board) through the HPCFAP. This way, each power branch supports both power
feeds.
There are the following power areas:
• 1 × 3.7 kW for 7 columns of I/O cards on left side plus the first of three motors in the
Fan Unit located at the same side of the subrack as the PSF3T8
• 1 × 3.7 kW for 7 columns of I/O cards on right side plus the second of three motors in
the Fan Unit located at the same side of the subrack as the PSF3T8
• 1 × 3.4 kW for 2 × matrix cards, 1 × FLC_A, 1 × FLC_B, one left and one right
adjacent I/O card column, plus third of three motors in the Fan Unit located at the
same side of the subrack as the PSF3T8 and the three motors of the Fan Unit located
at the opposite side of the subrack
The HPCFAP supports one Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS subrack with 2 PSF3T8 units and
respectively three feeding lines (power branches) per PSF3T8. In any case, the whole
power consumption at rack level is less than 11 kW.
Power partitioning and monitoring

If one of the two PSF units is down or unplugged for maintenance reasons, an alarm will
be raised. A PSF unit can be replaced without traffic hits. For details on the replacement
procedure see Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide.
If a circuit breaker (located at the HPCFAP) trips, an alarm will be raised.
Input supervision and shutdown

All power inputs can be supervised individually. The thresholds for under voltage is
between –39.0 V (±1 V). Threshold crossings raise an alarm. The LVCO threshold is only
handled via power branch II in the PSF3T8 of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS subrack. The
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
system provides a shutdown feature AT&T Requirement 802-010-100 (shutoff at –38.5 V
±1 V). Exception: The FLC shuts down later at 38.0 V (±1.0 V); the Fan Units shut down
at around 35.0 V (±1.0 V). In case the missing SLC heart beat is detected after
20 minutes, the Fan Units will switch to full speed although all circuit packs are powered
off.
The system automatically restarts when the input voltage is above –43 V again. The FLC
restarts at 42.0 V (±1.0 V), the Fan Units restart at 39.5 V (±1.5 V).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PSS-36 Power distribution concept

General power distribution architecture
Each Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack has independent power connections and is
powered independently from the other subracks in the network element. Power is
provided to the front of the subrack via two power filter modules: one on the right side of
the subrack and one on the left. The subrack is designed for redundant power – it will
fully operate with only one power filter/supply although two are always recommended.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-42 PSS-36 Power distribution
PHYS PHYS PHYS

SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID
B TC 1 40 FA N 37 B TC 2 41
IST1
IST2
PHYS PHYS
SLOT ID SLOT ID
38 39
S03
S07
S02
S04
S05
S06
S08
S09
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S43 /M XA L
S45 /M XB L
PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS
SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID
02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
M XB R
M XA R
FLC B
FLC A
S20 /M N T
S35 /SVC
S29
S33
S21
S25
S28
S30
S31
S32
S34
S22
S23
S24
S26
S27
PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS PHYS
SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID SLOT ID
01 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 43 44 28 29 45 46 30 31 32 33 34 35 18
PSFA PHYS
SLOT ID
PSFB PHYS
SLOT ID
19 36
Terminal 2 Terminal 2 Terminal 2 Terminal 2 Terminal 2 Terminal 2

á 10mm² á 10mm² á 10mm² á 10mm² á 10mm² á 10mm²
50A 50A 50A 50A 50A 50A

circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit
breaker breaker breaker breaker breaker breaker
BDFB BDFB BDFB BDFB BDFB BDFB

with 63A fuse with 63A fuse with 63A fuse with 63A fuse with 63A fuse with 63A fuse
VSVC (Service voltage plane from PSFA [solid] and PSFB [dotted] to all slots, 3.6 V)
V12V (Service voltage from PSFA [solid] and PSFB [dotted] to each IST card, 12V)
V12V (Service voltage from PSFA to PSFB [solid] and vice versa [dotted], cross-coupled, 12V)
Power redundancy and reliability

Subrack power distribution is fully redundant, with two circuits, A and B, able to supply
power to the subrack. Redundant power feeds (A and B) are connected to the power
modules in slots 44 and 45. Power is fed into the subrack over power branches that are
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
distributed to power planes on the backplane that feed all components in the subrack. The
system is partitioned into 3 areas via the PFC. The PFC power filter is supported with
three 50A input connections, for a total of 150A.
Power sources
Subracks operate fault-free in a voltage range of –40 V DC to –72 V DC (–48 V DC or
–60 V DC nominal). Power can be supplied from standard –48 V DC or –60 V DC battery
feeds, as is typical in a central office, or an AC rectifier can be used with battery backup.
DC power system requirements
The DC source for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 must meet the requirements of a
safety extra low voltage (SELV) source. In order to avoid oscillation in the system,
maximum source inductance to the DC power source is 15 μH, with a nominal value of
8 μH, assuming a maximum loop of 100 meters (50 m feed and 50 m return).
Battery feeds
In a typical deployment, the subracks are installed in a central office (CO) or similar
environment that is equipped with its own power distribution center. In this environment,
power is distributed to the shelves from standard 48 V DC battery feeds that are equipped
with fuses or circuit breakers.
Power monitoring
The shelf controller monitors the status of the A and/or B direct current (DC) input
voltages. When a battery voltage decreases below 45 V ±1.5 V, the Low Battery Voltage
alarm for that feed is triggered. When both power feeds are present and the A and B Low
Battery Alarms are raised, traffic may soon become interrupted. When both the A and B
power modules agree (via power branch II) that their input power voltage has fallen
below 38.5 V ± 1.5 V, they will turn power OFF to all circuit cards on the shelf, with the
exception of the EC and the SFC/Dx filters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description Control architecture
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Control architecture
Levels of system control
The control architecture of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system is organized in three
levels.
All system components contain a client control function (CCF). This function is used for
application configuration / reporting (where applicable), inventory control, FPGA
download (where applicable), and card status retrieval.
Figure 4-43 Control level schematic
First level
of control
FLC_A FLC_B
MCA MCA
CCF
CCF
MX_A MX_B
Matrix function Matrix function Matrix function Matrix function
Second level
LSW LSW
CCF
CCF
CCF
CCF
of control
SLC_A SLC_B
MCA MCA
CRU CRU
left PBA right PBA left PBA right PBA
I/O card
CCF
Third level
of control
I/O card
CCF
g-pipg-0150
CCF Client control function
CRU Clock recovery unit

FLC First-Level Controller
LSW LAN switch board

MCA Micro-controller asset
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MX Agnostic matrix card (MT960C, MT1T9, or MT3T8)
PBA Printed board assembly

SLC Second-level controller
First level of control

The architecture at first level of control consists of two redundant First-Level Controller
(FLC) cards. Each FLC contains a micro-controller asset (MCA) and other devices to
support the required FLC functionality. The MCA of the FLC consists of a processor
(CPU) with interface logic and is integrated into the FLC motherboard.
The active FLC card mainly performs centralized management of NE resources, controls
the second-level processors, and handles the interfaces to management systems. The
second FLC card is standby and capable to take over the role of an active FLC once the
formerly active FLC becomes inactive.
First-Level Controllers implement the following functionalities:
• Handling of interfaces toward the network management system, for example, TL1
agent or Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC.
• All the software (SW) functions related to the control and management activities of
the “virtual” machine that shields to the agents and applications all peculiarity of the
underlying system. The virtual machine (SW) function must be able to allow the
management of TDM and packet functionality in an integrated way. The functions
that are allocated to the virtual machine SW are management agents including event
reporting and logging, equipment database management, SW downloading and
management, performance monitoring management, alarm management.
• Control of miscellaneous external control interfaces such as for house keeping (HK),
rack top lamps (RL), and remote alarming (RA).
• Execution of the TDM control plane including the implementation of protocols and
routing engines.
• Administration of the mass storage device comprising all persistent data needed to
manage the network element including database objects, log files, and SW images. A
commercial device (SSD) is used to support the non-volatile storage functionality.
• Synchronization of persistent and volatile data to prepare seamless equipment
protection switches of FLC cards.
• Provides facilities for SW distribution and management/supervision functions for
lower control layers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-44 Infrastructure for the first level of control
Equipment
protection
CIT and OAMP I/F FLC FLC CIT and OAMP I/F
PSF3T8 / PFC
ECC I/O cards PSF3T8 / PFC HK, RL, RA,

(in-band of payload) GTS I/F
ECC handling External interface handling, system startup
SCN I/F Sys LAN switch
SLC
Matrix card
LAN communication
Internal LAN (ILAN)

Backplane ECC (ECC)
Serial periphal inventory access (SPI) g-pipg-0152
Embedded communication channel (ECC) architecture

The NE supports the termination of the following types of ECCs:
• GCC1 on HO ODU2, providing a data transfer bandwidth of 1312.405 kb/s ± 20 ppm
• GCC1 on HO ODU2e, providing a data transfer bandwidth of 1359.770 kb/s ±
20 ppm
• GCC1 on HO ODU3, providing a data transfer bandwidth of 5271.864 kb/s ± 20 ppm
In total, the NE supports up to 128 ECC bandwidth equivalents, which can be grouped to
form ECCs. The bandwidth requirements per type of ECC are as follows:
• A GCC1 on HO ODU2 uses two (2) ECC bandwidth equivalents.
• A GCC1 on HO ODU2e uses three (3) ECC bandwidth equivalents.
• A GCC1 on HO ODU3 uses eight (8) ECC bandwidth equivalents.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Due to the hardware architecture, ECC termination is done on IO cards. ECC bytes are
transported between IO cards and the central ECC routing component on the FLC cards
via dedicated bidirectional backplane links. The backplane provides the following ECC
transfer capacity per direction:
• For each 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit (10XANY10G) or 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit
(10XOTH10G), there are 297 backplane byte timeslots dedicated to ECCs from ports
1..10.
• For each 2 × 40G ANY Port Unit (2XANY40G), there are 297 backplane byte
timeslots dedicated to ECCs from port 1, and 297 backplane byte timeslots dedicated
to ECCs from port 2.
The NE allocates ECC backplane capacity to the provisioned ECCs according to the
following rules:
• A GCC1 on HO ODU2 uses 22 ECC backplane byte timeslots.
• A GCC1 on HO ODU2e uses 23 ECC backplane byte timeslots.
• A GCC1 on HO ODU3 uses 84 ECC backplane byte timeslots.
Second level of control

The architecture at second level of control consists of two redundant second-level
controllers (SLC) and (in future releases) two redundant growth controllers (GC) (GC in
only supported in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack, not supported in Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-36 subrack).
Figure 4-45 Infrastructure for the second level of control
Matrix card SCN I/F Matrix card
Equipment
management
SLC SLC
TDM & BP
Sys LAN switch Sys LAN switch FLCs
setup
I/O cards
LAN Communication
Internal LAN (ILAN)
Internal communication lines
g-pipg-0154
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Each SLC function is integrated into the universal matrix card (MT1T9 and MT960C
respectively) and contains a micro-controller asset (MCA) (on PBA left).
Second-level controller (SLC)
The SLC is connected to all system parts through control infrastructure lines on the
backplane. The internal LAN communication interface (ILAN) acts as interface to
transport SW interactions with LDC, FLC, and GC assets.
The SLC is mainly in charge to perform equipment management aspects, to handle FPGA
distributions to all I/O cards, to execute transmission protection schemes (that is, line
protections), to support the handling of fault management and performance monitoring, to
configure transmission hardware, and to execute related slow path applications.
Growth Controller (GC)
For the current release of the software, the GC is only prepared.
Third level of control

The architecture at third level of control consists of local data controllers (LDC). This
level of control is reserved for future releases.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description External communications: ECC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
External communications: ECC

ECC termination
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports the termination of embedded communication channels
(ECC) for OTH facilities. Due to the hardware architecture, the ECC termination is done
on the I/O cards. The ECC bytes are transported between I/O cards and the central ECC
routing component on FLC through dedicated bidirectional backplane links (see also
“Control architecture” (p. 4-86)).
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS can manage edge NEs using IP protocols through GCC. In this
case, the gateway network element (GNE) works as IP router.
GCC termination of OTH signals
In OTH networks, communication data is transported in overhead bytes associated with
the general communication channel (GCC).
In the current software release, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports:
• GCC1 on HO ODU2
• GCC1 on HO ODU2e
• GCC1 on HO ODU3
ECC protection
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports the provisioning of fast ECC protection with a
switching time less than 50 ms. ECCs can be grouped into an ECC protection group if
they have a uniform nominal data transfer bandwidth. Each ECC protection group can
have up to 32 members.
In transmit direction, the ECC-related overhead bytes are bridged to all members of the
ECC protection group.
In receive direction, the ECC-related overhead bytes are selected from one member of the
ECC protection group based on the signal quality of the incoming OTH signal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description External communications: LAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
External communications: LAN

User service interfaces
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS provides LAN interfaces for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
access and debug, and for the access to the management communication network (MCN).
LAN interface for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC access
At the front panel of each First-Level Controller (FLC), an RJ45 connector labeled “CIT”
is available for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC access.
OAMP interface
The OAMP interface is also located at the First-Level Controller (FLC). An RJ45
connector is provided at the front-panel of each of the FLC cards. Since the FLC cards are
always duplicated in the system, the OAMP interface can be provided redundantly. This
may be connected to one or two external switch devices (depending on the operator’s
installation). To have this redundant access loop-free, the rapid spanning tree protocol
(RSTP) is used. External Ethernet equipment that creates loops must also support RSTP
to operate the Ethernet free of loops.
However, this does not prevent from re-establishing a new management session if an FLC
equipment protection switch has taken place. It only mitigates cable failures and FLC
failures. If the management traffic is sent to the standby FLC, the internal IPL is be used
to forward this traffic to the active FLC.
SCN/AUX interface
The SCN/AUX interfaces located at the agnostic matrix cards are prepared for future
releases.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network diagram
Figure 4-46 Subrack connections for communications and maintenance
OAMP OAMP
RSTP RSTP
OAMP OAMP
LAN LAN
CIT/DBG CIT/DBG
CIT LAN LAN CIT
5 6
CPU CPU
FLC_A FLC_B
1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
SCN/AUX SCN/AUX
VOIP VOIP
E1 E1
LAN LAN
E2 E2
SLC SLC
CPU CPU
MTX_A MTX_B
10/100BASE-T external LAN connection

10/100/1000BASE-T external LAN connection
FE internal LAN connection
GbE internal LAN connection
RS232 external connection g-pipg-0156
Official MAC Address
Legend:
FE Fast Ethernet
FLC_A First-Level Controller at position FLC_A
FLC_B First-Level Controller at position FLC_B
GbE Gigabit Ethernet
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

OAMP OAMP Customer LAN
MTX_A Agnostic matrix card at position MTX_A
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MTX_B Agnostic matrix card at position MTX_B
SCN/AUX SCNAUX Customer LAN (not supported by the current release)

VOIP VOIP Customer LAN (not supported by the current release)
E1 E1 Customer LAN (not supported by the current release)

E2 E2 Customer LAN (not supported by the current release)
SLC Second-level controller

CIT LAN access for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
Addressing
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports one provisionable LAN IP address for the active FLC.
The MAC addresses of the network element are installed/assigned at the factory and
cannot be lost due to any single hardware failure or replacement of any normally
field-replaceable module.
MAC addresses of the external LAN interfaces of the First-Level Controller (FLC) CPUs
are stored in a non-volatile memory (flash memory) on the second bus termination card.
For the PSS-64 subrack, this is the BTC3T8 card in slot 84, and for the PSS-36 subrack,
this is the BT36 card in slot 43. An overall of six worldwide unique MAC addresses are
assigned to the NE.
The 6 addresses from the BTC3T8 are assigned to FLC interfaces according to the
following rules:
1. The first MAC address is assigned to the SCN/AUX LAN interface.
2. The second MAC address is assigned to the VOIP LAN interface.
3. The third MAC address is assigned to the E1 LAN interface.
4. The fourth MAC address is assigned to the E2 LAN interface.
5. The fifth MAC address is assigned to the OAMP LAN interface of the left FLC
(FLC_A).
6. The sixth MAC address is assigned to the OAMP LAN interface of the right FLC
(FLC_B).
The MAC addresses assigned to the NE are retrievable by the operator. A copy of the
MAC addresses is kept in the non-volatile memory of the FLC. In case of a BTC3T8
replacement, the MAC addresses are restored from the non-volatile memory of the FLC.
In case of an FLC replacement, the MAC addresses stored in BTC3T8 are newly copied
to the non-volatile memory of the FLC.
The LAN layer 2 protocol (IP over Ethernet) is compliant with RFC 894 and ISO
Standard 8802.2/3 (LLC/MAC Class-1).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The LAN layer 3 protocol supports internet protocol (IP), address resolution protocol
(ARP), and internet control message protocol (ICMP).
Provisionable IP addresses
Using the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC, the following IP addresses are provisioned:
• IP address of the left FLC (for maintenance purposes)
• IP address of the right FLC (for maintenance purposes)
• Loopback IP address used by several network interfaces (ECCs and IP in IP tunnels),
and used as OSPF router Id
• Control plane node IP address of the network element
Note: The mentioned IP addresses of the FLCs relate to the OAMP LAN, not to the
CIT/DBG LAN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product description External communications: TCP/IP stack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
External communications: TCP/IP stack

TCP/IP stack support
To integrate Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS in an IP-based data communications network
(DCN), the systems supports operations through the Transmission Control
Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol stack.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) support and routing support is
required for the following:
• OAMP LAN interface
• Embedded communication channels (ECC)
• IP-in-IP tunnels
Note that TCP/IP with routing support is supported for the OAMP LAN while for the
CIT/DBG LAN, TCP/IP without routing support is supported. For the CIT/DBG LAN,
point-to-point connections are considered the standard application, and thus routing is not
needed.
The TCP/IP support is available as:
• TCP/IP over OTN general communication channel (GCC)
• TCP/IP over customer LAN
Details of the supported protocols are shown in the following table.
Table 4-27 TCP/IP protocol stack
Layer Name Service / protocol
7 Application • Transaction Language No. 1 (TL1) according to Telcordia ®

Requirement GR-253 through raw terminal, Terminal Network
(Telnet), or secure shell (SSH) connections
• SSH debug
• SSH file transfer through secure copy (SCP)
• File Transfer Protocol (FTP) according to RFC 959
• Network Time Protocol (NTP) according to RFC 1305
• Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), used for Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS ZIC
• RMI, used for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
• Common Object Request Broker Architecture Multi-Technology
Network Management (CORBA MTNM) used for the automatic
switched optical network (ASON) management of the control plane
6 Presentation
5 Session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 TCP/IP protocol stack (continued)
Layer Name Service / protocol
4 Transport • Transmission control protocol (TCP)

• User datagram protocol (UDP)
3 Network • Internet protocol version 4 (IPv4)

• Internet control message protocol (ICMP)
• Open shortest path first (OSPF)
• Address resolution protocol (ARP)
2 Data Link • PPP1 over HDLC2 • MAC4

• IPCP5 • IPv4 encapsulated in IPv46
• LCP3
• IPv4 encapsulated in IPv46
1 Physical GCC Ethernet7
Notes:
1. Point-to-point protocol (PPP) as specified in RFC 1332, 1377, 1661, and 1662
2. High Level Data Link Control (HDLC) according to RFC 1662
3. Link control protocol (LCP) as part of the point-to-point protocol (PPP)
4. Media Access Control (MAC) data communication protocol sub-layer according to IEEE Standard 802.1
5. Internet Protocol Control Protocol (IPCP) as specified in RFC 1332
6. According to RFC 2003 or RFC 2784.
7. According to IEEE Standard 802.3
IP-in-IP tunneling
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports tunneling of IP packets through an IP network to:
• Interconnect control plane nodes via an out-of-band (OoB) DCN, which is managed
as an independent IP routing domain
• Interconnect management systems and NEs via an out-of-band (OoB) DCN, which is
managed as an independent IP routing domain
The transport part will be accomplished by encapsulating IP datagrams in IP packets and
route them through an IP tunnel on the OoB DCN to the node that represents their
next-hop IP address toward their destination.
The IP-in-IP encapsulation complies with RFC 2003. IP-in-GRE-in-IP encapsulation
complies with RFC 2784.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The routing part will be accomplished by selecting a routing protocol that is used for each
tunnel (in the current software release, it can be OSPF or NONE). When the routing
protocol is specified as OSPF, the routes are discovered automatically. When the routing
protocol is specified as NONE, static routes have to be provisioned.
CORBA and CLI support

The following external interfaces for management of control plane functions over TCP/IP
are supported:
• Common Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA)
• Command Line Interface (CLI)
IP tunnels may be configured over IP for transporting CORBA and CLI from a gateway
network element (GNE) to remote network elements (RNEs) equipped with TCP/IP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
5 5 perations,
O
administration,
maintenance, and
provisioning (OAM&P)
Overview
Purpose
This chapter informs about the system management functions for the administration of
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) and describes hardware and software
interfaces used for administration, maintenance, and provisioning activities.
Contents
Administration 5-3
Security concepts 5-4
Time of day synchronization 5-7
Maintenance 5-9
Fault and alarm management 5-10
Loopbacks 5-18
System diagnostics and tests 5-21
Performance monitoring 5-23
Thresholding 5-29
Software management 5-32
Configuration management 5-37
Reports 5-40
Provisioning 5-41
Equipment provisioning 5-42
Primary and secondary states of system components 5-45
Facility protection switching 5-48
Equipment protection switching 5-55
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Overview
(OAM&P)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC) 5-59
LED of the Fan Unit (FAN3T8) 5-60
LEDs of the High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP) 5-61
LEDs of the Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8) 5-62
LEDs of the Power Filter Card (PFC) 5-64
LEDs of the First-Level Controller (FLC) 5-66
LEDs of the agnostic matrix cards 5-69
LED of the I/O cards 5-71
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Administration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Administration
Overview
Purpose
This section describes important administration aspects of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic
Service Switch (PSS).
Contents
Security concepts 5-4

Time of day synchronization 5-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Security concepts
(OAM&P)
Administration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Security concepts
Overview
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS uses logins, passwords, authentication, and access levels to
protect against unauthorized access. It also keeps a security log.
User identifiers
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS users are required to log in with a user identifier and a password
at the start of a session. To ensure security, they should log out at the end of a session. If a
user is inactive for a configurable period of time, the user is logged off automatically.
This period can be set up by the administrator in a range from 0 to 999 min. The default
value is 60 min.
The system supports up to 512 different user IDs. The user management is performed by
a user with administrative privileges. User management includes addition and deletion of
users as well as assigning privileges to them. Multiple logins with the identical user
identifier will be denied.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS has six pre-installed default users which cannot be deleted:
“SERVICE”, “EML001”, “EML002”, “USER05”, “Unprvlgd”, and “ZICUSR”.
The “SERVICE” user allows an Alcatel-Lucent technician to log-in to the NE. The initial
password for this user is contained in the persistent database and can be modified. The
User Security Level of this user is 5, as well any security administrator user. The
SERVICE user cannot be deleted, but can be disabled and enabled.
The “ZICUSR” is for internal use only and cannot be used for logins from outside.
User identifiers that are strings of 5 to 12 case-sensitive alphanumeric characters where
the first character is an alphabetic character. The following special characters are also
valid: “%” (percent), “+” (plus sign), “#” (number sign), and “_” (underscore).
User community authorization level (UCAL)

The system supports user privilege categories for accessing functionality on the system.
A user community authorization level (UCAL) is assigned to each user ID by the
administrator when the user ID is created. This numerical value between 1 and 5 defines
the access privileges for the user. A user community authorization level of 5 stands for
administrative privileges.
For each possible transaction with the system, that means for each TL1 command, a
command community authorization level (CCAL) is defined. A user can only perform a
transaction if his or her UCAL is greater or equal to the CCAL of the transaction.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Administration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A “super user” (that means a system administrator with security administration privileges,
indicated by UCAL equal to 5) is able to:
• Add users to the NE
• Delete users from the NE
• Edit the security information of any user
• Retrieve security information about users (not password)
• Change the password of other users without entering the old password
• Logoff a particular user (included a User with security administration privileges)
• Obtain user info about the user currently logged on to the NE
• Inhibit and allow users
• Set system wide user security attributes
• Retrieve security information about authenticated (logged on) and unauthenticated
(not logged on) sessions
• Set command privilege partitioning
• Do anything that a normal user can do
A “normal user” (that means a user without administration privileges, indicated by UCAL
less than 5) is able to:
• Establish a session with the NE (logon)
• Change own user password
• Obtain own user info
• Retrieve system wide user security attributes
• Retrieve command privilege partitioning
• Terminate the session (logoff)
• Execute accessible/privileged NE command language requests
Passwords
A password is a case-sensitive string of 8 to 12 alphanumeric characters with at least three
of the following: at least one uppercase alphabetic character, at least one lowercase
alphabetic character, at least one numeric character, at least one special character. The
following special characters are valid: “%” (percent), “+” (plus sign), “#” (number sign),
and “_” (underscore). The first character of the password can be any alphabetic, numeric,
or a valid special character.
The password must not have more than 3 consecutive identical characters, for example,
“User_00001” will be denied. The password must not be the same as the associated user
ID. The password must not be the reverse of the associated user ID. Users can choose a
password that they have used before. More than one user can have the same password.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Administration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
All passwords are stored and transported only encrypted throughout Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS and the management systems.
If specified by the administrator, users can change their own passwords at their discretion,
following a configurable minimum interval since the last change.
Password aging can be configured. The system informs the user when the password
expiry date is nearly reached.
System log
The NE maintains a system log with a size of up to 50 MB. Among all other commands
and responses, also the ones related to security are stored. A filter capability is available
to retrieve only security events. The events/responses are kept in a non-volatile memory.
The log can be retrieved from the NE.
Secure shell
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS provides a way to secure the traffic between the operator and
the network element with strong encryption and cryptographic protection to provide
confidentiality, integrity, and replay protection. The system supports secure shell 2
(SSH-2) encryption for TL1 communication, also on the debug port.
For host authentication, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports the following:
• Initialization of the supported public key
• Retrieval of the “fingerprint” (a cryptographic hashing of the supported public key)
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports secure file transfers from and to other hosts.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Time of day synchronization
(OAM&P)
Administration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Time of day synchronization

Overview
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports the following:
• Provide time stamping accurate to within ±500 ms per day.
• Synchronize the network element clock from a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server.
The system uses a two-digit year, representing the two least significant digits of the year.
Note: In the current software release, gateway NE mediation services for NTP over
OSI, NTP control messages, and NTP authentication are not supported.
Network Time Protocol synchronization

The following time-of-day synchronization modes are possible:
• Synchronized mode (default)
The internal time-of-day clock of the network element uses the calculated UTC from
the selected NTP server, modified by the operator-provisioned offset. The NE is
polling the NTP server and periodically making corrections to its internal clock to
maintain the same time of day as the NTP server
All messages, event reports, logs, and events that carry time stamps use this time of
day: NTP UTC time
• Non-synchronized (holdover) mode
NTP is enabled but the NE has lost NTP server connectivity. The last known clock
update is used to synchronize the clock.
The operator can provision up to 10 NTP servers which are identified by their IP address.
NTP client operation

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports an NTP interface over IP. The NTP interface operates
in client mode as defined in RFC 1305 (version 3 or version 4). Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
interoperates transparently with NTP servers that support either version 3 or version 4.
When NTP becomes enabled, the NE selects the NTP server with highest quality timing
signal according to RFC 1305 methods.
Clock recovery on restart

In case of a power failure, the system is able to recover the time and date information
from an internal real time clock (RTC). The maximum bridge period is 15 min with an
accuracy of the timing information after recovery of ±1 s.
Each 15 minutes, the RTC device is updated with the current software clock. Upon FLC
restart, the RTC device is read to get a correct clock until NTP works again.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Time of day synchronization
(OAM&P)
Administration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS NE as NTP server
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS can act as an NTP server and perform all of the standard
functions of an NTP server to other NE clients The NTP server network address may be
the same as or different from the customer LAN network address.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Maintenance
Overview
Purpose
This section provides information on the maintenance functionality of Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS.
Definition
Maintenance is the capability of the system to continuously monitor its equipment and the
signals that it carries to notify the user of any current or potential problems. The
monitoring enables the user to take appropriate proactive (preventive) or reactive
(corrective) actions.
Reference
For detailed maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures see the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS User Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
Contents
Fault and alarm management 5-10

Loopbacks 5-18
System diagnostics and tests 5-21
Performance monitoring 5-23
Thresholding 5-29
Software management 5-32
Configuration management 5-37
Reports 5-40
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Fault and alarm management
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault and alarm management

Fault detection and reporting
The operation and maintenance of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is accomplished through the
built-in monitoring features and the interpretation of this information to operational
support system interfaces. Equipment and incoming signal failures are autonomously
detected by the NE
When a fault is detected, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS employs automatic diagnostics to
isolate the failed component or signal. Failures are reported to local maintenance
personnel and to the OS so that repair decisions can be made. If desired, OS personnel
and local personnel can use Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS or Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
to gain more detailed information about a specific fault condition.
Enable/disable autonomous alarm forwarding
Users have the option to temporarily inhibit the forwarding of autonomously generated
alarms and state events from the NE to Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS for their session. To
restart the autonomous forwarding of alarms again, an enable command has to be issued
by the user.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management process
The following figure illustrates the fault management process in conjunction with the
main influencing factors (visualized by means of dashed lines), such as the port
monitoring mode for example.
Figure 5-1 Fault management process
Anomaly
SSF
Port
monitoring
Detection Defect mode
&
suppression
Alarm severity Alarm
assignment confirmation
Correlation Fault
&
blocking
Failure
Consequent Validation
actions
Alarm
notification
Alarm Alarm
Failure distribution
processing &
signalling
g-pipg-0182
Occurrences of degraded conditions are detected by the functional system components (a

card for example) of a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network element (NE) as defects, derived
from anomalies.
Faults may be generated as a consequence of evaluating existing defects. The evaluation
of defects comprises correlation and blocking. When a fault persists for a pre-defined
observation period (“raise validation time”), a corresponding failure is declared and
reported to the management systems and to the local alarm interfaces by means of an
alarm notification.
When the defect is absent for a pre-defined observation period (“clear validation time”),
then the failure is cleared, and an appropriate alarm clear notification is sent.
Definitions
Anomaly An anomaly is the smallest observable discrepancy between the actual and the
desired characteristic of a system component. The occurrence of a single anomaly
does not interrupt the ability to perform a required function.
SSF A Server Signal Fail (SSF) indicates that a Signal Fail (SF) condition is
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
present on a server layer. An SF condition exists when the server signal contains AIS,
or when a defect is detected which leads to the insertion of AIS.
Defect A defect is the limited interruption of a system component’s ability to perform a
required function. An anomaly becomes a defect when it persists for a significant
amount of time (persistency check). For transmission defects this can be three signal
frames in sequence for example. The detection of defects is suppressed (blocked)
when the corresponding server layer indicates a Signal Fail (SF) condition (SSF).
Local indications via the red fault LED on the circuit pack front plate and the insertion of
consequent actions, for example insertion of an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) or
a Remote Defect Indication (RDI), are controlled by defects.
Correlation Correlation means the calculation of faults based on the existence of
defects.
Correlation tries to isolate the root cause of a failure scenario so that there is only one
alarm per root cause. I.e. in case of a fibre cut LOS is reported, but no subsequent LOF.
The relation between defects and faults can be either
• 1:1, that means one defect corresponds exactly to one fault, or
• n:1, that means several defects lead to the same fault.
The SONET equivalent of the correlation function is the alarm hierarchy definition which
defines which alarms mask other alarms.
Blocking Blocking is closely related to correlation. It means the suppression of faults
due to the existence of specific defects. A synonym for “blocking” is “masking”.
Fault A fault (or “correlated fault cause”) is the inability of a system component to
perform a required function. Faults may be declared dependent on the evaluation of
defects.
Validation Validation is the mechanism that prevents alarming of faults whose presence,
or absence in the case of alarm clearing, is shorter than the relevant observation
period (raise validation time, clear validation time). The validation times can be
configured.
Failure A failure is the termination of a system component’s ability to perform a required
function. If a fault is present for at least its raise validation time it becomes a failure.
There is a 1:1 relation between faults and failures.
Alarm notification Alarm notifications are used to inform management systems and
local alarm interfaces on the presence or absence of alarms. An alarm notification is a
system message containing information on a failure condition, such as the probable
cause, the alarm category, the time of occurrence (timestamp), the alarm severity, the
affect on service, and so on.
Alarm An alarm is a human observable alerting indication, for example visually, to a
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
condition that may have immediate or potential negative impact on the state of the
monitoring network element.
Conditions
The term “condition” is a generic term used to refer to a trouble/status detected/existing at
the network element. When the NE declares a condition, it determines the service-effect
of the condition using internal rules and gets the corresponding notification-level from the
provisioning data.
Condition severities and notification codes

The system supports the following condition severities (notification codes) which are
reported to operators responsible for the equipment:
• “Critical” (CR)
A critical alarm is used to indicate that a severe, service-affecting condition has
occurred and that immediate corrective action is imperative, regardless of the time of
day or day of the week.
• “Major” (MJ)
A major alarm is used to indicate a serious disruption of service or the malfunctioning
or failure of an important NE entity. This alarm requires the immediate attention and
response of an operator to restore or maintain system capability. The urgency is less
than in critical situations because of a lesser immediate or impending effect on service
or system performance.
• “Minor” (MN)
A minor alarm is used to indicate a condition that does not have a serious effect on
service or for a condition that is not essential to NE operation.
• “Warning” (WR, intended for the ETSI market)
A warning alarm is used to indicate a condition that does not have a serious effect on
service or for a condition that is not essential to NE operation. A warning alarm is less
severe than a minor alarm.
• “Non-Alarmed” (NA, intended for the ANSI market)
A not-alarmed condition is one that does not require operator action. It is reported
through an autonomous message. A not-alarmed condition can be either standing or
transient. Visual indications are not triggered.
For conditions that are declared but not autonomously reported, the system supports a
“Not Reported (NR)” notification code. Not-alarmed conditions are logged by the system
and are retrievable then.
The notification codes (CR, MJ, MN, WR, NA, NR) can provisioned separately for each
condition type (service-affecting [SA]) on a per-profile basis. Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
supports one profile type for each generic entity type that is able to rise alarm conditions.
That means that there is one profile type for each transmission facility type, one profile
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
type for all the equipment entities, one profile type the security entities, and one profile
type for the synchronization entities. For all equipment and facilities, autonomous
reporting and logging is available.
When an entity is deleted, all of its associated alarms and conditions are cleared.
When an entity is not provisioned, no alarms or conditions are set against that entity. The
only exception is the condition ABNORMAL, that is raised when a non compatible
module is inserted in an unprovisioned slot and no autoprovisioning is possible:
ABNORMAL is raised in the unprovisioned slot.
The abnormal indication which is shown at the network element is visible on the
management interfaces. The operator can retrieve the root causes for the abnormal
condition to support the craft personnel to bring the system back to normal mode.
Alarms and events

If the severity of a condition is “Critical”, “Major”, “Minor”, or “Warning”, the condition
is called “alarm” and is reported autonomously.
If the severity of a condition is “Non-Alarmed”, the condition is called “event” and is
reported autonomously. Not reported events are not reported autonomously.
The operator can retrieve all existing alarms, events, and not reported events.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports alarm synchronization management.
Alarm severity assignment profiles (ASAP)

The condition severities are managed by means of alarm severity assignment profiles
(ASAP). For each condition, the ASAP indicates the SA/NSA severity and the notification
code.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports one ASAP type for each entity that supports conditions
with configurable severity. Each ASAP type contains only those conditions that apply to
the related entity.
Table 5-1 System-defined ASAP instances
Instance Userlabel Contains

suffix
0 None All conditions with severity “Not Reported”
1 SYSDFLT Factory default severities
2 NotPrimary Not primary conditions with severity disabled
3 FerfAis FERF and AIS conditions disabled
4 ALL All conditions enabled
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Users with appropriate privileges are able to create new ASAP instances (profiles) for
each ASAP type.
Network element alarm indicators

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS provides an alarm summary that is signaled by LEDs on the
active FLC, the rack top lamp interface, and the remote alarms interface.
Each FLC is equipped with an alarm acknowledge (alarm cut-off, ACO) button that is
used to clear this alarm summary. If the ACO button is pressed, both FLCs (active and
standby) are informed, but only the active one processes the function.
Figure 5-2 Alarm indicators on NE level
HPCFAP
1
HPCFAP MON / RA/RL
TRU MON 4
PSF_A
5
ACO CPU CPU ACO
FLC_A FLC_B 6
CO
HPCFAP MON / RA/RL
TRU MON PSF_B
g-pipg-0184
Legend:
1 Alarm collection connector
2 Rack top lamps
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Extension alarm connectors
4 Backplane links
5 FLC front plate LEDs
6 Remote alarming to central office

ACO Alarm cut-off button, signal to backplane

HPCFAP High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel
HPCFAP MON Interfaces for HPCFAP supervision at the PSF3T8 card (Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-64 subrack)
TRU MON Interfaces for HPCFAP supervision at the PFC card (Alcatel-Lucent
PSF3T8 Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card (Alcatel-Lucent

PFC Power filter card (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack)
RA/RL If the PSF3T8 (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack) or the PFC

(Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack) respectively is positioned as
PSF_A, this interface provides four output line for the rack top lamps.
If the PSF3T8 (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack) or the PFC
(Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack) respectively is positioned as
PSF_B, this interface provides eight output lines for remote alarms.
The rack top lamps are located on the HPCFAP. The active FLC controls the rack top
alarms through the PSF3T8 (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack) or the PFC
(Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack) respectively located in position PSF_A. The
remote alarm interface is located on the PSF3T8 (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack)
or the PFC (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack) respectively in position PSF_B. The
PSF3T8 or PCF cards are controlled through backplane links.
The alarm summary management is always performed by the active FLC.
Remote alarms interface
The remote alarms interface (RA) is physically located on the PSF3T8 (Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-64 subrack) or the PFC (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack) respectively
positioned as PSF_B. The remote alarms interface controls the elements of the station
alarm grid.
The following remote alarms are supported:
• Internal alarm: active when two FLCs are equipped, the two FLCs are protected with
EPS protection, and one of the FLCs is failed.
• Fault or loss of station battery alarm: active when one of the two batteries is failed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Indeterminate alarm: cause is software generated.
• Urgent alarm: active if an urgent alarm is present on the network element
• Non-urgent alarm: active if a non-urgent alarm is present on the network element
Visual indications
Most card types have status LEDs to visualize their operating condition.
Port and card status LEDs behave the same.
The general meaning of the LEDs, their state and their colors is as follows:
• LEDs represent alarm issues and alarm “Free”by permanent LED light
• Maintenance/Configuration issues are represented by blinking LEDs
• Blinking LEDs have higher priority as solid LEDs; highest priority is “Switched off”
Reference
See “Operations interfaces” (p. 5-58) for more specific information about the meaning of
the LEDs located on the components of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Loopbacks
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loopbacks
Loopback definition
A loopback is a troubleshooting test in which a signal is transmitted through a port unit to
a set destination and then returned to the originating port unit. The transmitted and
received signals are measured and evaluated by the user to ensure that the received signal
is accurate and complete when compared to the originating signal.
Note that a loopback is a disruptive operation. It is normally employed as a diagnostic on
a failed facility which must be taken out of service. Therefore it is not expected that an
entity in loopback will function correctly as a member of a protection group. Signal and
overhead monitoring will be affected by an inserted signal (for example, AIS). In the case
of a terminal loopback, ingress monitoring is compromised for both transparent and
nontransparent overhead modes since the ingress signal is overwritten by the looped back
signal at the interface.
Special consideration needs to be taken when looping back a facility that is designated as
a possible timing reference in the network, or may contain a signal that is designated as a
possible timing reference. The loopback may affect network timing. One situation in
which this can happen is if a facility loopback is set on a signal that is being used by the
far end network element as a timing reference. It may also occur if a terminal loopback is
set on a facility that can be used at that same network element as a timing reference. The
operator needs to ensure that the affected timing reference is locked out at the appropriate
network elements.
Controlling loopbacks
Loopbacks can be enabled and disabled using Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS or
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC. See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS User Provisioning Guide
or the respective management system documentation.
Loopback types
In general, the following types of loopbacks are possible:
• Facility loopback (supported in the current software release)
• Terminal loopback (supported in the current software release)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-3 Loopback types
Facility loopback
Client port card Matrix Client port card
O/E E/O
(AIS)
O/E E/O
Matrix loopback
O/E E/O
(AIS)
O/E E/O
Terminal loopback
O/E E/O
(AIS)
O/E E/O
g-pipg-0275
Loopbacks are possible on the following facility types:

• OTN (OTU2, OTU3)
• SDH (STM-16, STM-64)
• SONET (OC-48, OC-192)
• Ethernet (1 Gb/s, 10 Gb/s)
If a facility is used in a loopback, the condition type “ACTLPBK” is assigned to it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Facility loopbacks
In a facility loopback, the received incoming signal is connected to the associated
transmitter in the return direction. These loopbacks can be used to test the correct cabling
between two network elements including the involved interface ports. In the current
software release, facility loopbacks are supported for OTH, SDH/SONET, and Ethernet
signals.
Facility loopbacks can be set up as follows:
• Transparent, that means, the signal transmitted in the downstream direction is not
changed
• Force AIS insertion (for OTH/SDH/SONET)
• CSF insertion (for Ethernet)
• Shut off the transmitter
The incoming signal in the upstream direction is terminated during the loopback and an
AIS is created.
Terminal loopbacks
In a terminal loopback, the signal that is about to be transmitted is connected to the
associated incoming receiver. These loopbacks can be used to test signal paths through a
network element. In the current software release, terminal loopbacks are supported for
SDH/SONET, and Ethernet signals.
Terminal loopbacks can be set up as follows:
• Transparent, that means, the signal transmitted in the downstream direction is not
changed
• Force AIS insertion (for SDH/SONET)
• Shut off the transmitter (for Ethernet)
The incoming signal in the upstream direction is terminated during the loopback and an
AIS is created.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning System diagnostics and tests
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System diagnostics and tests

Introduction
Inherent automatic diagnostics functionality has been proven to significantly reduce
network operators’ ongoing operating expense. Consequently, this functionality is
demanded by customers in all public network quality telecommunications systems /
products. Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) offers diagnostic
functionality to support service availability and reliability commensurate with customer
expectations for this very high bandwidth.
Equipment protection switching diagnostics

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS autonomously detects and reports hardware and software (for
example, watchdog timer) failures, independent of whether the failed module or unit is in
an active or standby (inactive) mode. Unless otherwise specified, failures in all units will
be detected within 5 minutes of occurrence. Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS autonomously
detects and reports failures of any intra-system transmission path (for example, includes
communication paths such as LAN cables and traffic carrying paths).
Communication bus diagnostics

Communication or routing discrepancies on the internal communication buses are
resolved autonomously.
Card Presence and Fault Indication Signal diagnostics

The Card Presence Indication signal is used within a subrack so that the FLC or SLC
processors are able to detect when a circuit pack is removed or a circuit pack is installed.
The system detects failed or missing passive (for example, data and LAN cables) and
non-processor-based system components, as well as “intelligent” processor-based
modules.
Database operation and monitoring diagnostics

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS monitors and takes appropriate corrective action to insure data
consistency. This implies successful transfer of data between processors, consistent data
throughout processors and storage devices, data consistent with hardware. Database
discrepancies between the L1 (Control Complex) L2, and L3 databases are autonomously
resolved, for example, after resolution of any faults causing the discrepancy.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning System diagnostics and tests
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Autonomous module diagnostics
Before a module is allowed to transition into an in-service state, the module will be
autonomously tested and verified to be free of any faults. The tests are intrusive or non
intrusive depending on module function/level.
All modules provide autonomous module power-up self-test diagnostics when the module
is powered on, inserted, and recovered to its previous state, or hardware reset.
The power-on self test is triggered by any type of reset of a circuit pack or a device (for
example, an FPGA). This includes resets caused by the following:
• Power on of device / circuit pack / system
• Autonomous or operator triggered reset
• Reset as a consequence of a software or firmware download
The visual indicators of the plug-in units change dependent on the result of the self test
(see “Operations interfaces” (p. 5-58)).
Autonomous recovery of failed modules

Once a module has been declared failed and the detected failure is caused by the system's
environment (for example, too high temperature), then the system periodically tests the
module to see if the failure of the module has gone away. When the failure has gone
away, the module will be put back into service. A persistency filter interval of at least 10 s
avoids too frequent changes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Performance monitoring
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performance monitoring
Overview
Performance monitoring (PM) provides the user with the facility to systematically track
the quality of a any transport entity simultaneously. This is done by means of continuous
collection and analysis of the data derived from defined measurement points.
In OTH networks, the PM functionality complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.874.
In SDH networks, the PM functionality of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS complies with the
error performance parameters and objectives of the ITU-T Recommendation G.798,
“Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit-rate
synchronous digital paths” (including its Corrigendum 1). Note: the optional parameters
SEP (Severely Errored Period) and SEPI (Severely Errored Period Intensity) are not
supported.
In SONET networks, the PM functionality complies with Telcordia ® Requirement
GR-253-CORE and ANSI Standard T1.231.
The system provides the possibility to monitor all higher-order PM points simultaneously.
Process description
The performance monitoring process is a three-stage process:
• Primitive processing
• Event processing
• Binning and reporting
Figure 5-4 Performance monitoring process
Multiplex section,
line
Regenerator section,
section Binning
Primitive Event
and
processing processing
reporting
Path
g-upg-0010
Primitive processing
Fundamental parameters are derived from errors detected in the transport signal,
classified into bit errors and defects, and accumulated over one-second periods.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Event processing
Performance parameters are calculated based on the evaluation and correlation of the
fundamental parameters obtained during the primitive processing.
Binning and reporting
In the binning and reporting phase, the performance parameters obtained during the event
processing are accumulated in registers over measurement periods of 15 minutes and 1
day. The collection of registers associated to a monitoring point and accumulation period
is called a “bin”.
The start of the 15-minutes measurement periods is aligned with the quarter boundaries
(00,15,30, 45) of the NE clock. The 1-day measurement periods start at 00:00 (midnight)
related to UTC. The start and the length of 15-minute and 1-day counts are accurate to
within ±10 s with respect to the NE clock.
Counting is done in current bins. At the end of the measurement period the bin is kept in
store as the first recent bin. In case more than one past measurement period is kept in
store, that entire collection is called the history bins. The first recent bin is also called
previous bin.
Overview of OTN performance monitoring parameters
Table 5-2 OTUk near-end PM parameters
Parameter Mnemonic Definition
BBE (background block BBE-OTU Count of BIP-8 (SM BIP-8) errors for all seconds in which there is no LOF,
errors) LOM, LOS, or AIS.
ES (errored seconds) ES-OTU Count of seconds with (SM BIP-8) errors ≥ 1 or LOF = true or LOM = true or
LOS = true or AIS = true or TIM-S = true.
SES (severely errored SES-OTU Count of seconds with (SM BIP-8) errors ≥ x or LOF = true or LOM = true or
seconds) LOS = true or AIS = true or TIM-S = true, where x depends on the hierarchy
level (see Table 5-8, “Number of BBEs per SES” (p. 5-26)).
UAS (unavailable UAS-OTU A period of unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SES events.
seconds) These 10 seconds are considered to be part of unavailable time. A new period of
near-end available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.
These 10 seconds are considered to be part of available time.
FECC (FEC corrected FECC Count of FEC errors corrected. This counter is not incremented during the time
errors) LOS, LOF, LOM, or AIS defects are present.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-3 OTUk far-end PM parameters
BBE (background block BBE-OTU The count of Far-End Errored Block is incremented if one or more errors is
errors) indicated by BEI in the ODUkT/P frame (One Block is defined as one frame)
(SM BEI/BIAE) for all seconds in which there is no URU-O, URU-S, LOF,
LOM, LOS or AIS. A farend block error has occurred if the BEI/BIAE value is
between 1 [0001] and 8 [1000]; otherwise, no far-end block error has occurred.
ES (errored seconds) ES-OTU Count of seconds with (SM BEI) Errors ≥ 1 or BDI-S (SM BDI) =True.
SES (severely errored SES-OTU Count of seconds with (SM BEI) Errors ≥ x or BDI-S (SM BDI)=True
seconds)
UAS (unavailable UAS-OTU A second of Unavailability which begins at the on-set of 10 contiguous SES-Ss
seconds) and ends at the on-set of 10 contiguous seconds with no SES-Ss.
Table 5-4 ODUk near-end PM parameters
Parameter Mnemonic Definition (terminated ODU) Definition (unterminated ODU)
BBE (background block BBE-ODU Count of BIP-8 (PM BIP-8) errors for all seconds in which there is no AIS, OCI,
errors) LCK.
ES (errored seconds) ES-ODU Count of seconds with (PM BIP-8) errors ≥ 1 or AIS = true or OCI = true or
LCK = true or TIM-P = true.
SES (severely errored SES-ODU Count of seconds with (PM BIP-8) Count of seconds with (PM BIP-8)
seconds) errors ≥ x or AIS = true or OCI = true errors ≥ x or AIS = true or OCI = true
or LCK = true or TIM-P = true or or LCK = true or TIM-P = true, where
PLM-P = true (for lower-order ODU x depends on the hierarchy level (see
only), where x depends on the Table 5-8, “Number of BBEs per
hierarchy level (see Table 5-8, SES” (p. 5-26)).
“Number of BBEs per SES”
(p. 5-26)).
UAS (unavailable UAS-ODU A period of unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SES events.
seconds) These 10 seconds are considered to be part of unavailable time. A new period of
near-end available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.
These 10 seconds are considered to be part of available time.
Table 5-5 ODUk far-end PM parameters
BBE (background block BBE-ODU The count of Far-End Errored Block is incremented if one or more errors is
(PM BEI) for all seconds in which there is no SSF-P, OCI, LCK. A far-end block
error has occurred if the BEI/BIAE value is between 1 [0001] and 8 [1000];
otherwise, no far-end block error has occurred.
ES (errored seconds) ES-ODU Count of seconds with (PM BEI) Count of seconds with (PM BIP-8)
Errors ≥ 1 or BDI-P (PM BDI) =True. Errors ≥ 1 or or BDI-P (PM BDI)
=True.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-5 ODUk far-end PM parameters (continued)
SES (severely errored SES-ODU Count of seconds with (PM BIP-8) Errors ≥ x or BDI-P (PM BDI) =True.
seconds)
UAS (unavailable UAS-ODU A second of Unavailability which begins at the on-set of 10 contiguous SES-Ss
seconds) and ends at the on-set of 10 contiguous seconds with no SES-Ss
Table 5-6 ODUk TCM near-end PM parameters
BBE (background block BBE-TCM The count of Near-End Errored Block is incremented if the computed BIP8
errors) value of the 2nd preceding frame does not match the BIP8 value extracted from
the current frame (One Block is defined as one frame) for all seconds in which
there is no SSF-T3, OCI-T, LCK-T or LTC defect.
ES (errored seconds) ES-TCM Count of seconds with (TCM BIP-8) Errors ≥ 1 or SSF-T = True or OCI-T =
True or LCK-T = True or LTC=True or TIM-T = True
SES (severely errored SES-TCM Count of seconds with (TCM BIP-8) Errors ≥ x or SSF-T = True or OCI-T =
seconds) True or LCK-T = True or LTC=True or TIM-T = True
UAS (unavailable UAS-TCM A second of Unavailability which begins at the on-set of 10 contiguous SES
seconds) events and ends at the on-set of 10 contiguous seconds with no SES events.
Table 5-7 ODUk TCM far-end PM parameters
BBE (background block BBE-TCM The count of Far-End Errored Block is incremented if one or more errors is
(TCM BEI) for all seconds in which there is no SSF-T, OCI-T, LCK_T or LTC
defect. A far-end block error has occurred if the BEI/BIAE value is between 1
[0001] and 8 [1000]; otherwise, no far-end block error has occurred.
ES (errored seconds) ES-TCM Count of seconds with (TCM BEI) Errors ≥ 1 or BDI-T (TCM BDI) =True.
SES (severely errored SES-TCM Count of seconds with (TCM BIP-8) Errors ≥ x or BDI-T (TCM BDI) =True.
seconds)
UAS (unavailable UAS-TCM A second of unavailability which begins at the on-set of 10 contiguous SES
seconds) events and ends at the on-set of 10 contiguous seconds with no SES events.
Table 5-8 Number of BBEs per SES
Entity (hierarchy level) Value of x
ODU1 ≥ 3064 BIP-8 errors


OTU2 ≥ 12304 BIP-8 errors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-8 Number of BBEs per SES (continued)
Entity (hierarchy level) Value of x
OTU3 ≥ 49424 BIP-8 errors
Client signal monitoring

On non-terminated STM-n/OC-n clients, non-intrusive monitoring (NIM) on regenerator
section level (RS) is supported.
Overview of Ethernet performance monitoring parameters
Table 5-9 Ethernet PM parameters
Parameter Definition Directions
EIFE Ethernet incoming frames with errors in receive direction Receive

EINB Ethernet incoming number of bytes in receive direction Receive
EINF Ethernet incoming number of frames in receive direction Receive
Enabling performance measurement points

Performance measurement points can be enabled and disabled using Alcatel-Lucent
1350 OMS and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC. See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS User
Provisioning Guide or the respective management system documentation.
Performance monitoring data can be collected for all provisioned facilities. This includes
the following:
• Working and protection facilities
• Terminated and unterminated facilities
• Facilities under loopback operation
Performance monitoring registers can be reset, enabled, and disabled as follows:
• For 15-minute periods and 1-day periods independently
• For 15-minute periods and 1-day periods together
• For section, line, and path independently
The deletion of performance monitoring registers has no effect on the monitoring for
defects and for the alarming of the facility. When the PM data collection is disabled for a
facility, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS still generates alarms on that facility.
If the PM data collection is disabled for a facility, no threshold crossing alerts can be
generated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Data storage
All data is stored in the current bin. The managed NE has a current data register (current
bin) for 15 minutes and 24 hours. Once a facility for measurements has been configured,
you are able to get a snapshot view of the data gathered at any time (default).
The “previous” bins store the immediately preceding PM data from the current bin.
The “recent” bins work as push-down stack containing the data of the most recent
periods. At the end of each period, the content of the “previous” bin is transferred to the
top of the stack. The PM data at the top of the stack will be pushed down to the next bin
and so forth. The data at the bottom of the stack will be pushed off and lost.
For each performance monitoring point the following bins exist:
Table 5-10 Performance monitoring - available bins
Types of bins Number of 15-minutes bins Number of 1-day bins
Current bins 1 1
History bins Previous 1 1
Recent 31 6
Each bin has an associated validity (VLDTY) flag. This flag indicates the status of the
collected bin.
Data transfer
Performance monitoring data can be transferred to and viewed from Alcatel-Lucent
1350 OMS. The system is capable to transmit all monitored higher-order performance
monitoring point data within 10 minutes to Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS through the LAN
connection. The data is transported using the file transfer service (FTS) protocol.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Thresholding
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Thresholding
Threshold crossing alerts (TCAs) and TCA profiles
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems support threshold crossing alerts (TCAs) on a per
performance parameter basis by using TCA profiles. The TCA profiles are used to store
the threshold values of the performance parameters related to a specific parameter group
(for example parameters related to the SONET section or line).
Note: Thresholding is supported for OTH, SDH and SONET performance parameters
only, but not for Ethernet performance parameters.
When thresholding is activated for a performance parameter the value of the parameter is
compared against the threshold value on a second by second basis. When the current
counter value equals or exceeds the threshold value, then a threshold crossing alert will be
reported as an event notification with a resolution of one second.
As threshold crossing alerts are events, they are stored in the network element event log,
and displayed in the list of TCA events.
Types of TCA profiles

The following types of TCA profiles are supported:
• In OTH mode:
– OTU2,
– OTU2E,
– OTU3,
– ODU0
– ODU1
– ODU2
– ODU2E
– ODU3
– ODU0TCM (TCM TCA profile)
– ODU2ETCM (TCM TCA profile)
– ODU3TCM} (TCM TCA profile)
• In ANSI mode:
– OC-48 (SONET section)
– OC-192 (SONET section)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• In ETSI mode:
– STM-16 (SDH regenerator section)
– STM-64 (SDH regenerator section)
A default profile is predefined for each of these TCA profile types. Furthermore, you can
create, modify or delete TCA profiles of these types.
Note: Thresholding is disabled by default.
TCA modes
Two different TCA modes (or thresholding methods) can be distinguished:
1. Transient condition method (“TR only mode”).
2. Standing condition method (“TR/RTR mode”).
Transient condition method
In the transient condition method, only one threshold, the so-called threshold report (TR)
threshold, is defined.
Note: The transient condition method is used in ANSI mode.
When the counter value of a performance parameter equals or exceeds this threshold, then
a threshold report (TR, synonymous to threshold crossing alert) is generated and stored in
the network element alarm log.
No more than one threshold crossing alert will be generated per performance parameter
during a measurement interval unless the threshold value has been changed, or the
performance parameter has been reset (to zero). When the counter value again reaches or
exceeds the threshold, another threshold crossing alert will be reported.
The following figure illustrates the transient condition method:
Figure 5-5 Thresholding – transient condition method
t
TR TR TR
g-upg-0037
Legend:
1 Threshold for generating a threshold report (TR)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Standing condition method
In the standing condition method, two thresholds are defined, a threshold report (TR)
threshold and a reset threshold report (RTR) threshold.
Note: The standing condition method is used in ETSI mode.
When the counter value of a performance parameter equals or exceeds the TR threshold,
then a threshold report (TR, synonymous to threshold crossing alert) is generated.
Only the first threshold crossing in a sequence of measurement intervals is reported. At
the end of the first interval in which the counter value did not exceed the RTR threshold, a
reset threshold report (RTR) is generated.
The following figure illustrates the standing condition method:
Figure 5-6 Thresholding – standing condition method
2
t
TR RTR
g-upg-0038
Legend:
1 Threshold for generating a threshold report (TR).

2 Threshold for generating a reset threshold report (RTR)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Software management
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software management
Initial software installation
For the initial download of the system software to the NE, a USB flash drive is to be
prepared by the operator on a PC. The software release needs to be copied from the
distribution media, for example from a single DVD to the USB flash drive. This USB
flash drive is used to transfer and to load the SW generic on the disk of the First-Level
Controller (FLC). The operator plugs the USB flash drive into the USB connector on the
FLC front panel, then presses the “ACO” button during an FLC reboot.
Using a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack the download of the system software has to
be performed for each of the two FLCs. Using a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack
only the first FLC needs be installed via USB, the second FLC is auto-replicated from the
first.
The release software in default configuration applied on the FLC supports a TL1
connection from a PC connected through a direct LAN cable or an isolated LAN to the
CIT LAN interface. The consecutive NE setup can be performed using TL1 commands.
The process used to perform an initial software installation and turn-up on the NE system
is documented for customers and customer service personnel in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Installation and System Turn-Up Guide.
Technical requirements
The USB flash drive (“USB stick”) to be used is not part of the Alcatel-Lucent delivery.
Table 5-11 USB flash drive specifications
Property Value
Capacity ≥ 4 GB
Interface type USB 2.0
Formatted with 1 single FAT32 partition
Alcatel-Lucent successfully tested the following types of USB flash drives:

• SanDisk Ultra Cruizer 4GB
• SmartModular 4GB.
If the USB flash drive is supplied with a “smart device”, “application auto start”, or
password protection option, these have to be removed by the operator using the tools
provided by the USB flash drive vendor before it can be used for the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS software. The USB flash drive used must be empty before the software load is
copied to it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software download principles
The software download feature provides a mechanism to load the software from a remote
file server onto a network element system without impact on service. The software to be
downloaded is identified by a release identifier.
A software release is logically composed of a set of software builds. For an in-service
upgrade, some of these builds will be replaced by new versions, while other builds may
remain unchanged. Examples for software builds are the FLC platform software including
the operating system, the application software, and the upgrade software required to
perform the upgrade itself. Each software build is identified by a build identifier.
A software build is physically composed of a set of software packages, which are
downloaded from a remote file server and installed on the NE during the in-service
upgrade procedure. All software packages belonging to a software build are identified
with a package identifier.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network element provides two independent storage areas
on its solid-state disk (DSK). One storage area holds the active system and application
software, the other storage area holds the standby system and application software.
Software download from a remote file server to the NE modifies the standby storage area
only. The downloaded software release files are stored on the standby storage area of each
FLC. Any previous content of the standby storage area is overwritten by the remote file
transfer operation.
The software download capability includes the following functions:
• The set of files is also containing the firmware for all FLC cards and the second-level
controllers (SLC) and the firmware needed for any of the devices on I/O cards, where
an in-field update is needed.
• The FLC supports the ability to receive a set of files containing the software for all
FLC and SLC processors in the control hierarchy.
• The FLC supports the download function through TL1 request.
• The FLC supports the download function from a remote file server.
• The DSK is capable to store all files downloaded.
Commands are provided to retrieve the firmware version and software version (release
ID) of the software being run on the NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software download performance
The following table summarizes the estimated time to download the software into an
inactive image through different transmission channels.
Table 5-12 Software download performance
Download through Estimated download time [h]
LAN 0.25
LAN and one DCCm hop 5

LAN and one ODU-2 GCC hop 3.5
LAN and one ODU-3 GCC hop 1
In-service upgrade
The in-service upgrade process converts the existing system database to the new release
database and upgrades the existing release software to a new release software while in
service, without impact to existing traffic.
The in-service upgrade process is designed to perform the upgrade within one
maintenance window and requires a single TL1 command. After successful completion of
the software download and the autonomous FPGA image distribution and the upgrade
feasibility validation, the system is in the ISU state “STA-ISU background activity
completed successfully” (STAC). The TL1 command INIT-SYS-NEW will then activate
the new release software on both FLCs.
The in-service upgrade process by default delegates the activation of new release I/O
FPGA firmware to a provisioning on port group level within the new release SW. This
way, the operator can plan the activities in case an FPGA upgrade cannot be performed
without traffic impact.
To minimize the traffic impact on OTH, SDH, or SONET ports, the following
mechanisms could be used:
• In a control plane managed network: control plane link maintenance mode (avoids CP
re-routing storms)
• In a control plane managed network: roll traffic away before FPGA image update, roll
back afterward
• bridge and roll at neighboring nodes on path layer
• SNC/Nc on STM-v/OC-v ports
• SNCP on OTH ports
It is recommended to create a database backup on an external device before the in-service
upgrade starts. This backup will serve for disaster robustness, for example being subject
to be restored on a major in service upgrade failure that cannot be compensated
otherwise.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
While the in-service upgrade process is performed, the system will be in a restricted TL1
command execution mode. Any TL1 command that does not change the NE configuration
(for example RTRV-XXX commands) can be executed during an ongoing in-service
upgrade. TL1 commands that will modify the NE configuration are denied during an
ongoing in-service upgrade. This mechanism ensures that the NE starts operation in the
new release with the same provisioned database as when the upgrade was started in the
old release.
The new software packages are installed by the appropriate TL1 command directly on the
active FLC. The standby FLC will be updated automatically.
The following figure in principal depicts the in-service upgrade model with an initial
generic software transfer to the NE:
Figure 5-7 In-service upgrade process
Release X: active Release X: standby
Release Y: downloaded Release Y: downloaded

INIT-SYS-OLD (cntd.)
FLC_A FLC_B
1830 PSS NE INIT-SYS-NEW
Release X: OOS Release X: OOS
Release Y: OOS Release Y: OOS
FLC_A FLC_B
1830 PSS NE
INIT-SYS-NEW (cntd.) INIT-SYS-OLD
Release X: OOS Release X: OOS
Release Y: active Release Y: standby
FLC_A FLC_B
1830 PSS NE
RMV-ISU-OLD
Release Y: active Release Y: standby
FLC_A FLC_B
1830 PSS NE
g_pipg_0304
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Legend:

OOS Out of service
Aspects for control plane managed networks

In a control plane (CP) managed network, a phased approach in order to upgrade all
nodes within a network is supported. To coordinate the deployment of new versions of
network signaling and routing protocols in service, the CP provides nodal attributes to
allow for retrieval of installed SW Version (ISV) and the provisioning of an active SW
version (ASV) value. In addition, a backward compatibility mode for CP network
protocols is supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Configuration management
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management
Overview
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) maintains all its configuration in a
volatile memory database. Non-volatile disk backup databases are maintained implicitly
by the network element, and explicitly by operator commands. The NE is able to restore
its memory database from the contents of a disk backup database at restart time or
triggered by an operator command.
It is possible to transfer a locally stored disk database backup to a remote file system
(RFS) and the other way round. The operator can reset the memory and primary backup
database to a factory installed default configuration. For database upload and download,
secure FTP or FISH (a dedicated file transfer combined with SSH) can be used.
Database types
The volatile memory database (ACTV CPU DB) in the RAM of the First-Level
Controller (FLC) is maintained by the NE. It reflects the current NE configuration, the
NE alarm states and conditions, and the control plane-related information.
Two non-volatile disk database types exist for the NE: the primary backup database
(ACTV DSK DB) and the secondary backup data base (STBY DB). Both are realized by
the solid-state disks located on the FLC. At FLC (re-)start time, the contents of the ACTV
DSK DB is copied into the ACTV CPU DB.
The primary backup database is maintained implicitly by the NE during its normal
operation. At any time, it reflects the state of the volatile memory database. Updating the
primary backup database occurs online without interrupting the normal service operation
of the NE. The operator can initiate a copy of the primary backup database to the
secondary backup database.
The secondary backup database can be copied to the primary backup database. After an
FLC restart (or FLC switch) the memory database will be reloaded from the restored disk
database. The secondary backup database can be copied to/from a remote file server
(RFS) by operator commands (remote backup and remote restore).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-8 Database types and transitions
Memory
DB
CPU
RESTORE-DB
Factory Primary Secondary

Default DB Backup DB Backup DB
ACT-DB-BACKUP
SSD
FLC
COPY-RFILE
Implicit alignment
By TL1 command Remote

file system
By debug command
g_pipg_0306
Legend:
CPU Central processing unit

DB Database
OOS Out of service
SSD Solid-state disk
Disk redundancy
The NE disk is located on the First-Level Controller (FLC). The system ensures
consistency between the active and the standby FLC autonomously. Operator commands
related to database management refer to the active FLC. The system replicates any change
of the disk databases on the active FLC to the corresponding disk on the standby FLC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Database download performance
The following table summarizes the estimated time to download and process the
configuration database through different transmission channels.
Table 5-13 Database download performance
Download through Estimated download time [h]
LAN 0.25
LAN and one ODU-2 or OTU-2 GCC hop 3.5

LAN and one ODU-3 GCC hop 1
Database upload performance

The following table summarizes the estimated time to upload the configuration database
to a management system through different transmission channels.
Table 5-14 Database upload performance
Download through Estimated upload time [h]
LAN 0.25
LAN and 1 ODU-2 or OTU-2 GCC hop 3.5
LAN and 1 ODU-3 GCC hop 1
CLEI ™ codes
The COMMON LANGUAGE ® equipment codes (CLEI ™ codes) of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS system components can be retrieved by the operator.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Reports
(OAM&P)
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reports
Failure reports are generated for software faults.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisioning
Overview
Purpose
This section informs about the provisioning concepts realized with Alcatel-Lucent
1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS).
Reference
For detailed provisioning procedures and information about specific parameters and their
possible values see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS User Provisioning Guide.
Contents
Equipment provisioning 5-42

Primary and secondary states of system components 5-45
Facility protection switching 5-48
Equipment protection switching 5-55
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Equipment provisioning
(OAM&P)
Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment provisioning
Definition
Equipment provisioning refers to assigning values to parameters used for specific
functions by network elements. The values of the provisioned parameters determine many
operating characteristics of a network element.
NE start-up provisioning
During the very first startup of the network element, the operator sets important
parameters for the system as a whole:
• Region (ETSI or ANSI), defining if the system works in SDH or SONET mode
• Provisioning mode (autoprovisioning or manual provisioning)
• Automatic in-service threshold time, determining how long a customer signal must be
present on the facility without a failure condition before the system puts the facility in
service.
• Altitude of the NE above sea level
• Operator-defined user label
Equipment types
In Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS, two basic types of equipment exist:
• Mandatory equipment entities: These components are essential for the operation of the
system:
1830 PSS - 64 subrack
– 2 First-Level Controllers (EHC/FLC)
– 2 agnostic matrix cards (MT1T9), including second-level controller function
– 2 Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Cards (PSF3T8)
– 2 Fan Units (FAN3T8)
– 4 Bus Termination Cards (BT3T8)
– 2 Bus Termination Cards CMISS (BTC3T8)
– 1 High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP)
1830 PSS - 36 subrack
– 2 First-Level Controllers (FLC36EA)
– 2 agnostic matrix cards (MT960C), with each 960G switching capacity Two slots
wide, also covers the shared IO/MTX slot left of the dedicated MTX slot.
– 2 Power Supply Filter, and Clock Interface Cards (PFC)
– 1 Fan Unit (FAN3T8)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– 2 Bus Termination & Card (BT36)
– 1 Power Distribution Panel with circuit breakers, but without Alarm Panel;
(PDU1C for ETSI One Rack; PDU2C for ANSI rack)
• Non-mandatory equipment entities: These components can be installed or activated
optionally, for example depending on the required network interfaces:
– I/O cards (see “Part lists” (p. 4-6) for a comprehensive list)
– Ports
– Optical modules (SFP, XFP, see “Part lists” (p. 4-6) for a comprehensive list)
The system checks if a provisioned optical module is compatible to the related hosting
I/O card. In case of a mismatch, an alarm is raised.
Provisioning modes
The mandatory equipment entities are provisioned autonomously by the system
independent from their presence in the system.
For non-mandatory equipment entities, the following provisioning modes are supported:
• Autoprovisioning
• Manual provisioning
• Preprovisioning
Autoprovisioning
Autoprovisioning means assigning default configuration parameters to an equipment
component at the time when the component is installed the first time. The default
configuration parameters are read from the NE database.
If no alarm conditions are detected during insertion or power-on diagnostics,
autoprovisioned modules are placed in the state “IS” (in service) automatically.
Manual provisioning
Autoprovisioning will not happen at equipment insertion if disabled on NE parameter
level.
Functionally, manual provisioning is the same as preprovisioning, except that it also
serves to provision a card / module already inserted.
Preprovisioning
Preprovisioning means setting configuration parameters in advance, that means before the
corresponding equipment component is physically present in the system. The
preprovisioned configuration settings are stored in the NE database, and take effect as
soon as the equipment component is installed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If no alarm conditions are detected during insertion or power-on diagnostics, modules
inserted in a preprovisioned slot are automatically placed in the state “IS” (in service) or
“OOS-MA” (out of service - management). The operator can set this target state for the
equipment being provisioned.
It is not possible to preprovision or autoprovision an entity (for example an XFP) when its
related hosting entity (in this example an I/O card) is not provisioned.
Card management
Card failure, card mismatch, card out, and unconfigured equipment are alarmed. Card
type and status indication can be retrieved using the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Primary and secondary states of system components
(OAM&P)
Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Primary and secondary states of system components

Primary states
The following primary states are defined:
• IS – In service
The entity is capable and allowed to provide its provisioned functions. The IS primary
state usually relates to equipment entities.
• IS-NR – In service, Normal
The entity is capable and allowed to provide its provisioned functions. The IS-NR
primary state usually relates to facilities.
• IS-ANR – In service, Abnormal
The entity is capable to provide most of its functions, is allowed to provide its
provisioned functions, but is operating in a degraded or abnormal state.
• OOS-AU – Out of service, Autonomous
The entity is not available for providing its provisioned functions but the entity is not
intentionally suspended by an external management command (from an OS or craft
interface) from performing these functions. In general, the cause of the incapability is
due to an unsolicited autonomous event detected in the system or in the associated
network (for instance, OC-3 LOS detected).
• OOS-MA – Out of service, Management
The entity is intentionally suspended by external management command from
performing its provisioned functions, but the entity may still be operationally capable
of performing its provisioned functions.
• OOS-AUMA – Out of service, Autonomous and Management
The entity is not available for providing its provisioned functions because an
OOS-AU state transition has occurred and the entity is intentionally suspended by
external management command from performing its provisioned functions.
Secondary states
The following secondary states are defined:
• ACT – Active
The entity is currently in use and has spare operating capacity for further usage
demand. When applied to a facility entity, this value means that the entity is
cross-connected (the entity is a constituent leg of a cross-connection) and additional
cross-connection capacity is available, such that more one-way cross-connections can
be added.
• AINS – Automatic In-Service
The entity is allowed to transition to the in-service state if it is operationally capable.
For example, an OC-3 transitions from OOS-AU,AINS to IS when all OC-3 alarm
conditions have cleared.
• BUSY – Busy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The entity is currently in use and has no spare operating capacity for further usage
demand. For example, a head end bridge with 2 broadcast legs, or a connected test
access port are both BUSY.
• CLKNA – Clock Not Aligned
The clock of the standby matrix is not aligned to the clock of the active matrix.
• CP – Control Plane
The facility or connection is under management by the control plane for data services.
• CPMP – Control Plane
The facility or connection is shared between management plane and the control plane.
• DSBLD – Disabled
The facility entity is prohibited from carrying traffic, for example because the
required supporting equipment is not provisioned or provisioned for another service.
• FAF – Facility Failure
The associated facility entity has failed, for example a LOS, LOF or AIS condition is
present.
• LPBK – Loopback
A loopback activity is currently being performed on the entity.
• MDLT – Manual Delete
The ODU path-terminated facility has been manually provisioned, and can only be
deleted by manual command. The MDLT secondary state is valid for ODU
path-terminated facilities only.
• MEA – Mismatch of Equipment and Attributes
An incompatible system component is physically present in a provisioned slot.
• MT – Maintenance
The standby FLC is in a temporary maintenance state (for example during
Backup/Restore).
• NOIMP – Not Implemented in Hardware
The higher-order ODU path termination function (HO ODUPTF) and lower-order
ODU path termination function (LO ODUPTF; if any) entities are not connected
toward the NNI side.
• PMD – Performance monitoring inhibited and disabled
The performance monitoring counters (current and history counters) have been
removed from memory.
• PSI – Protection Switching Inhibited
The working entity is inhibited from automatic protection switching by means of an
operator command, that means, it is locked out from automatic protection switching.
• SDEE – Supported Entity Service Exists
The entity is currently supporting services such as cross-connections or VCGs, or is
supporting other entities that are carrying such services.
• SGEO – Supporting Entity Outage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The associated supporting entity has failed (OOS-AU) or is out-of-service due to a
management action (OOS-MA or OOS-AUMA), or set itself to state SGEO.
• STBYC – Standby Cold
The system component is the standby unit for another system component. A standby
unit with a cold standby status will not be immediately able to take over the role of
the active unit, and will require some initialization activity. An autonomous or manual
switch cannot be performed within 50 ms. Note that the STBYC state will be
maintained even when the standby unit is out of service. The STBYC state is mutually
exclusive with the WRK and STBYH states.
• STBYH – Standby Hot
In a facility protection scheme, this secondary state is declared on the standby facility
whenever a switch request or signal fail or signal degrade (SF/SD) condition is not
present.
• STBYS – Standby Switched
In a facility protection scheme, this secondary state is declared on the standby facility
whenever any switch request (other than WTR, DNR, or NR) is present.
• SWDL – Software Download
A software download is in progress, the system component is out of service because it
is in the process of acquiring, loading, and/or initializing its software.
• TRM – Terminated
The facility entity has been given termination parameters, that means, the entity has
been connected and its path has been terminated (as a result of the connection) or the
parent entity has been terminated as a result of its subentities being connected. For
line entities, this state indicates that the entity is supporting cross-connections.
• UAS – Unassigned
The entity has not been assigned with the necessary provisioning data. No service
activity or maintenance activity (including monitoring, testing, or service recovery) is
permitted in this state since the necessary data has not been assigned.
• UEQ – Unequipped
There is no system component in the addressed position.
• WRK – Working
The entity is currently providing service as part of a protection group (for instance,
selector is selecting this entity in a path protection configuration).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Facility protection switching
(OAM&P)
Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Facility protection switching

Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP)
1+1 subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) is a dedicated protection technique for
enhancing the availability of a given transmission facility, for example a path.
In the current software release, a transmission facility may be one of the following (both
for unidirectional and bidirectional transmission):
• ODU0
• ODU1
• ODU2
• ODU2e
Figure 5-9 SNC protection functionality

Protected facility
A Unidirectional SNCP - 1WAYSNCP
F-PED
B
TC
F-PING
F-PED: From incoming (source) protected

Protecting facility F-PING: From incoming (source) protecting
Protected facility
Bidirectional SNCP - 2WAYSNCP

A
F-PED
B
TC
F-PING
g-pipg-0310
Protecting facility
A 1WAYSNCP cross connection connects a protected facility (A) with an outgoing

facility (B). The protected facility (A) is protected by a protecting facility (C). The traffic
is selected by the selector from the protected or protecting facility depending on the
switch's criteria.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A 2WAYSNCP cross connection connects a protected facility (A) with an outgoing
facility (B). The protected facility (A) is protected by a protecting facility (C). The traffic
is selected by the selector from the protected or protecting facility depending on the
switch’s criteria. In the other direction the traffic of the facility B is bridged to facility A
and C.
Architecture
A 1+1 bidirectional SNCP consists of one 1:2 bridge and one 2:1 selector.
Figure 5-10 1+1 SNCP architecture for a single network element
Working
Normal
Protection
Protection
switch
SNCP bridge function bridge
Working
Wait-to-
SF/SD Working restore
SF/SD timer Normal
Protection
SF/SD SF/SD Protection
Hold-off switch
timer control
Protection
Protection
switch
SNCP selector function selector
g-pipg-0300
The SNCP bridge function permanently outputs the received normal facility onto a
working and a protection facility.
The SNCP selector contains a protection switch selector that outputs as normal facility the
signal received via either the working or the protection facility. The selection is
performed according to the current protection switch state. The selection changes (from
working to protection or the other way round) are also known as “protection switches”.
The working/protection assignment is provisionable as part of cross-connection
provisioning. The selection dynamically changes according to the protection switch state.
Existing unprotected facilities can be modified to be protected. The other way round,
existing protected facilities can be modified to be unprotected. In that case, the operator
preserve either the former working facility or the former protection facility.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SNCP protection type
The SNCP protection type determines the criteria used for the calculation of the SF and
SD signal fail condition.
Multiple 1+1 SNC protection types are defined:
• SNC/N
non-intrusive end-to-end trail monitored SNC
• SNC/Nc
ODUk non-intrusive client protection
In the current software release, the following SNC protection types are supported:
• SNC/N: non-intrusive monitoring of the ODUk layer and its associated server layer
• SNC/Nc: ODUk SNC/Nc based on ODUkP client signal non-intrusive monitoring -
“Single NE protection” subtype
SNC/Nc: ODUk non-intrusive client protection
The protection scheme, where client signals are protected based on defects within the
client signals, is known as ODUk SNC/Nc (non-intrusive client subnetwork protection).
This protection scheme has been standardized recently and will be part of the Annex A of
the ITU-T Recommendation G.873.1 (2003), “Optical Transport Network: Linear
protection.”. SNC/Nc is also known as dual homed client signal protection, where the
term “dual homed” refers to a duplicated client signal that is protected.
Figure 5-11 Single NE client signal protection
NE
Dual homed client

ODUk signal, for example
SNC/Nc SDH/SONET, Ethernet
g-pipg-0311
Two client signals that are transported transparently are fed into a single network element
(NE). The NE selects one of the two client signals based on the client signal specific
signal fail detection. The selected client signal is transported in an ODU through the
network.
The signal fail condition derived from the client signal is not only used for local client
protection, but is inserted into the OPUk overhead, so that it can also be used for
protection within the OTN network:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-12 SNC/Nc protection in the network
NE 3 NE 1
Maps client
into ODUk
Dual homed client
ODUk signal, for example
SNC/Nc SDH/SONET, Ethernet
NE 2
Maps client
into ODUk
g-pipg-0312
In the current software release only the single NE client protection is supported.
SNCP operation type
The protection operation type of SNCPs can be revertive or non-revertive. With revertive
protection, the service returns to the working facility after the condition that led the
switching to the protection facility has been cleared. With non-revertive protection, the
service stays on the protection facility after the condition has been cleared.
The SNCP operation type can be selected by the operator. Changing the operation type
from revertive to non-revertive or the other way round does not have an effect on the
traffic.
SNCP switch type
In the current software version, the protection switch type is unidirectional. That means,
that both ends of a bidirectional subnetwork connection are controlled independently of
each other.
In OTH networks, the unidirectional operation means also that there is no access to the
APS channel. The respective overhead bytes are set to 0.
SNCP hold-off timer
The hold-off timer provides a delay between the moment that the signal fail or signal
degrade condition is changed and the start of the switching process. The hold-off timer is
used to cope with fail and degrade conditions which can be solved on the server layer. It
also copes with a differential delay between the working and the protection paths.
The hold-off timer is provisionable by the operator in pre-defined intervals within a
certain range.
SNCP wait-to-restore timer
If the SNCP operation type is revertive, a wait-to-restore timer is started after a protection
switch. The selector is switched back to the working state when the timer expires. If the
working tributary is defect, the switch back does not take place.
The wait-to-restore timer is provisionable by the operator in pre-defined intervals within a
certain range. A wait-to-restore time of 0 is not recommended although it is supported. A
value of 0 implies the risk of selector oscillations resulting in an instable working facility.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Dynamic behavior of the SNCP selector
The dynamic behavior of the SNCP selector in a given protection scheme is determined
from the following:
• External switch commands
• Failure of the supporting equipment module
• TSF/TSD conditions
• SSF/SSD conditions
The protection state transitions from one protection switch state to another take place
according to protection switch event tables.
SNCP external switch commands
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports the following external switch commands:
• Clear (Clr): Clears an active external switch command and the wait-to-restore timer
(if active).
• Lockout of Protection (LO): The working facility is requested to be active (support
only for OTH).
• Forced Switch to Working (FSw-W): The working facility is requested to be active.
The switch will take place even if this facility is faulty.
• Forced Switch to Protection (FSw-P): The protection facility is requested to be active.
The switch will take place even if this facility is faulty.
• Manual Switch to Working (MSw-W): The working facility is requested to be active.
The switch will only take place if this facility is not faulty.
• Manual Switch to Protection (MSw-P): The protection tributary is requested to be
active. The switch will only take place if this facility is not faulty.
SNCP switching hierarchy
Table 5-15 OTN SNCP request/state priorities without APS protocol
Priority Request/state
1 (highest) Lockout for protection (LO)
2 Forced switch (FS)

3 Signal fail (SF)
4 Signal degrade (SD)
5 Manual switch (MS)

6 Wait-to-restore (WTR)
7 Do not revert (DNR)
8 (lowest) No request (NR)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SNCP protection switch states
The protection switch state value summarizes information about the active tributary
(working or protection) and the switch type (the status of the protection group).
Table 5-16 SNCP protection switch states
Protection switch state Meaning
W, LO Working, Locked Out The working facility is active and the group state is
Locked Out (support only for OTH).
W, FSw Working, Forced Switched The protection facility is active and the group state is
Forced Switched.
P, FSw Protection, Forced Switched The protection facility is active and the group state is
Forced Switched.
W, SF Working, Signal Failed The working facility is active and the group state is
Signal Failed.
P, SF Protection, Signal Failed The protection facility is active and the group state is
Signal Failed.
W, SD Working, Signal Degraded The working facility is active and the group state is
Signal Degraded.
P, SD Protection, Signal Degraded The protection facility is active and the group state is
Signal Degraded.
W, MSw Working, Manual Switched The working facility is active and the group state is
Manual Switched.
P, MSw Protection, Manual Switched The protection facility is active and the group state is
Manual Switched.
P, WTR Protection, Wait To Restore The protection facility is active and the group state is
Wait To Restore. This state only applies to revertive
protection.
W, NR Working, No Request The working facility is active and the group state is No
Request.
P, DNR Protection, Do Not Revert The protection facility is active and the group state is Do
Not Revert. This state only applies to non-revertive
protection.
Protection switch performance

The time to perform a protection switch due to signal fail or signal degrade is below
50 ms. This time does not include the wait-to-restore time and the defect detection times.
In case of a protection switch due to an external switch command, the service interruption
is shorter than 10 ms.
In an OTH network, the time to complete a protection switch does not increase if multiple
ODUk SNCP selectors need to be switched simultaneously.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SNCP back-to-back configuration
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports back-to-back configurations within one network
element.
The following back-to-back configurations are supported:
• SNCP-protected terminated ODUk with SNCP-protected terminated ODUk
• SNCP-protected non-terminated ODUk with SNCP-protected non-terminated ODUk
• SNCP-protected terminated ODUk with SNCP-protected terminated ODUj
• SNCP-protected terminated ODUk with SNCP-protected non-terminated ODUj
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Equipment protection switching
(OAM&P)
Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment protection switching

Introduction
To enhance the reliability of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system, permanent 1+1
equipment protection is supported and mandatory for the following units:
• Agnostic matrix card (MT960C and MT1T9, respectively)
• First-Level Controller (FLC)
Equipment protection means that the respective entity exists twice in one system. One of
the entities is in an active state while the other one is inactive. If the inactive unit is
capable to take over the active role, it is in a “standby” state.
Other units
Even though other units are present more than once in the system, they do not operate in
equipment protection schemes. This applies to the Fan Units (FAN3T8), the Bus
Termination Cards (BT3T8), and the Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Cards
(PSF3T8) in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 system and to the Bus Termination Cards
(BT36), and the Power Supply Filter Cards (PFC) in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36
system. All instances of these units are always in an active state and not protected by
another one.
Provisioning
When the shelf is created during system initialization, the required equipment protection
groups are created automatically. The unit provisioned in the protected slot is called
“protected” unit, the other of the two units is called “protecting” unit – despite of their
current state. The currently active FLC, for example, can be the one provisioned in the
protected slot or the one provisioned in the protecting slot.
Equipment protection switching

The automatic switching of an equipment protection group is initiated autonomously by
the system and is triggered by so called “local defects” and “interface defects”. Local
defects can be uniquely associated with an involved unit of the referring equipment
protection group. Interface defects may be caused by those units but could also be related
to their communication partners.
Before an inactive entity becomes standby, this card needs to be adapted with respect to
all configurations and states so that it really can replace the functionality of the active
entity. This adaptation phase is called “initial alignment”. Once the inactive card is
standby (the initial alignment has been finished), this entity will be kept in the same state
with respect to the same configurations and states. This process is further called
“permanent alignment”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1+1 equipment protection groups
The following 1+1 equipment protection groups are created automatically and apply in
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 system:
• FLC EQP: Protected slot 73, protecting slot 75
• MTX EQP: Protected slot 71, protecting slot 72
The following 1+1 equipment protection groups are created automatically and apply in
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 system:
• FLC EQP: Protected slot 23, protecting slot 72
• MTX EQP: Protected slot 11, protecting slot 15
Automatically initiated switches

A local defect triggers an automatic protection switch to the other entity immediately
provided that an autonomous switch is allowed as well as the standby equipment is
capable and allowed to take over the active role.
An interface defect only triggers an automatic protection switch once the other entity does
not have the same defect provided that the inactive card is capable and allowed to take
over the active role.
Externally initiated switches

The operator can manually initiate an equipment protection switch. The respective
command performs a switch regardless of which entity of the involved equipment is
addressed (the active entity becomes standby and the standby entity becomes active).
The switching command can be executed in a normal and in a forced mode. The normal
mode is supported by the FLC equipment protection group and the MTX equipment
protection group. The forced mode is only supported by the MTX equipment protection
group.
In the normal mode, the protection switching only takes place if the following conditions
are fulfilled:
• The inactive unit has no hardware failure
• The inactive unit is standby, that means it has been initially aligned and is being kept
aligned permanently
• The equipment protection group is not locked, that means no forced or inhibit switch
is active
• The software version of both units involved is identical
• The inactive unit is not logically removed
In the forced mode, the protection switching only takes place if the inactive card is
powered and present and if the equipment protection group is not locked.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC, it is also possible to inhibit and to allow the
automatic protection switching of the agnostic matrix cards.
State indications
The operator is able to retrieve the location of the active unit of each equipment
protection group using Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC.
The agnostic matrix cards (MT960C and MT1T9, respectively) indicate their state of the
equipment protection also with an LED on the front plate (see “LEDs of the agnostic
matrix cards ” (p. 5-69)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section provides information about the operations interfaces of Alcatel-Lucent
1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS), such as Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC and the LEDs
on the front plates.
Contents
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC) 5-59
LED of the Fan Unit (FAN3T8) 5-60
LEDs of the High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP) 5-61
LEDs of the Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8) 5-62
LEDs of the Power Filter Card (PFC) 5-64
LEDs of the First-Level Controller (FLC) 5-66
LEDs of the agnostic matrix cards 5-69
LED of the I/O cards 5-71
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
(OAM&P) Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal

(ZIC)
Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is shipped with the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation
Craft Terminal (ZIC) – a GUI that runs on a customer-furnished desktop or laptop
computer. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC software can be downloaded from the
network element as an executable file using an HTML page.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC provides the following main functions:
• Control of operations, administration, maintenance and provisioning activities
• Security features to prevent unauthorized access
• Easy-to-use Transaction Language 1 (TL1) interface.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC domains

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC user interface is divided into the following main
domains:
• Equipment
• Facilities
• Cross-connection
• Protection
• System
• Security
• Message management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning LED of the Fan Unit (FAN3T8)
(OAM&P)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LED of the Fan Unit (FAN3T8)

Fan Unit LED 1 (PWR)
Color Function
Green Power on
Fan Unit LED 2 (STAT)
Color Function
Green Normal operation
Amber Local fan temperature or ambient temperature = High

Red Fan failure / local fan temperature or ambient temperature = Critical
Reference
For the location of the LED, see Figure 4-6, “FAN3T8 front view” (p. 4-20).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning LEDs of the High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel
(OAM&P) (HPCFAP)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LEDs of the High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel

(HPCFAP)
Table 5-17 HPCFAP LEDs (rack top lamps)
LED Color ANSI market ETSI market
Label Function Label Function
1 Red Critical Alarm Critical alarm URG (urgent Critical alarm

alarm)
2 Red Major Alarm Major alarm NURG (non-urgent Major alarm

alarm)
3 Amber Minor Alarm Minor alarm or MEM Attended

attended
4 Green No function BUZ Reception of

service calls (future
rel.)
Reference
For the location of the LEDs, see Figure 4-14, “HPCFAP front view” (p. 4-32).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning LEDs of the Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card
(OAM&P) (PSF3T8)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LEDs of the Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card

(PSF3T8)
Table 5-18 PSF3T8 LED 1 (STATUS)
Color Function
Switched off All battery inputs missing or voltage too low
Green All battery inputs available, no hardware failure

Amber At least one battery input missing, no hardware failure (for example
fuse blown)
Red Card failure (hardware failure, for example fuse blown)
Table 5-19 PSF3T8 LED 2 (SOURCE)
Color Function
Switched off Timing interface not among synchronization sources

Green Timing source configured – no errors
Red Timing source configured – source has errors
Table 5-20 PSF3T8 LED 3 (BATT I)
Color Function
Switched off Branch 1: Battery voltage < 35V

Green Branch 1: Battery voltage > 35V
Table 5-21 PSF3T8 LED 4 (BATT II)
Color Function
Table 5-22 PSF3T8 LED 5 (BATT III)
Color Function

The tables above describe the behavior of the LED in case SW control is available.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning LEDs of the Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card
(OAM&P) (PSF3T8)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
During power-up state (after power on of the system and service voltage is present until
SW control is available):
• LED 1 will be red
• LED 2 will be switched off and
• LEDs 3 to 5 will indicate presence of battery voltage
Reference
For the location of the LEDs, see Figure 4-11, “PSF3T8 front view” (p. 4-27).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning LEDs of the Power Filter Card (PFC)
(OAM&P)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LEDs of the Power Filter Card (PFC)
Table 5-23 PFC STATUS LED
Color Function
Switched off All battery inputs missing or voltage too low
Green All battery inputs available, no hardware failure

Amber At least one battery input missing, no hardware failure (for example
fuse blown)
Red Card failure (hardware failure, for example fuse blown)
Table 5-24 PFC SOURCE LED
Color Function
Switched off Timing interface not among synchronization sources

Green Timing source configured – no errors
Red Timing source configured – source has errors
Table 5-25 PFC BATT I LED
Color Function

Table 5-26 PFC BATT II LED
Color Function
Table 5-27 PFC BATT III LED
Color Function

The tables above describe the behavior of the LED in case SW control is available.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning LEDs of the Power Filter Card (PFC)
(OAM&P)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
During power-up state (after power on of the system and service voltage is present until
SW control is available):
• The STATUS LED will be red
• The SOURCE LED will be switched off and
• BATT LEDs will indicate presence of battery voltage
Reference
For the location of the LEDs, see Figure 4-13, “PFC front view” (p. 4-30).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning LEDs of the First-Level Controller (FLC)
(OAM&P)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LEDs of the First-Level Controller (FLC)

LED 1 (STAT)
Table 5-28 FLC LED 1 (STAT)
Color Function
Switched off Card equipped and not provisioned or card out of service after
shutdown has been performed successfully. The operator can plug out
the card.
Green blink Card starting, autotesting, or graceful shutdown, or FPGA download
Green Card properly equipped, provisioned, and in service No alarm is

present.
Amber blink Card out of service but provisioned
Amber Minor alarm is present

Red blink Card misconfigured or card mismatch. Limited Mode (FLC) / FLC SW
Adaptation
Red Critical or major red alarm is present
LED 2 (EPS)
Table 5-29 FLC LED 2 (EPS)
Color Function
Switched off EPS not decided

Green blink EPS configured – active card in recovery
Green EPS configured – active card
Amber blink EPS configured – standby card not yet aligned
Amber EPS configured – standby card
LED 3 (C)
Table 5-30 FLC LED 3 (C)
Color Function
Switched off No critical alarm

Red Critical alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LED 4 (M)
Table 5-31 FLC LED 4 (M)
Color Function
Switched off No major alarm
Red Major alarm
LED 5 (m)
Table 5-32 FLC LED 5 (m)
Color Function
Switched off No minor alarm

Amber Minor alarm
LED 6 (W)
Table 5-33 FLC LED 6 (W)
Color Function
Switched off No warning

Amber Warning
LED 7 (AT)
Table 5-34 FLC LED 7 (AT)
Color Function
Switched off No attended alarm condition
Amber Attended alarm condition
LED 8 (AB)
Table 5-35 FLC LED 8 (AB)
Color Function
Switched off No abnormal condition
Amber Abnormal condition
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
(OAM&P)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LAN interface LED 1
Table 5-36 FLC LAN interface LED 1
Color Function
Switched off Not connected
Amber blink Activity

Amber Connected
LAN interface LED 2
Table 5-37 FLC LAN interface LED 2
Color Function
Switched off Speed 10 Mb/s

Amber Speed 1 Gb/s
Green Speed 100 Mb/s
Reference
For the location of the LEDs, see Figure 4-18, “ Front view of the PSS-64 FLC” (p. 4-37).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning LEDs of the agnostic matrix cards
(OAM&P)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LEDs of the agnostic matrix cards

LED 1 (STAT)
Table 5-38 Agnostic matrix card LED 1 (STAT)
Color Function
Switched off Card equipped and not provisioned or card out of service after
shutdown has been performed successfully. The operator can plug out
the card.
Green blink Card in startup, autotesting, graceful shutdown, or FPGA download
Green Card properly equipped, provisioned, and in service. No alarm is

present.
Amber blink Card out of service but provisioned

Red blink Card misconfigured or card mismatch
LED 2 (EPS)
Table 5-39 Agnostic matrix card LED 2 (EPS)
Color Function
Switched off EPS not decided

Green blink EPS configured – active card in recovery
Green EPS configured – active card
Amber blink EPS configured – standby card not yet aligned
Amber EPS configured – standby card
LAN interface LED 1
Table 5-40 Agnostic matrix card LAN interface LED 1
Color Function
Switched off Not connected

Amber blink Activity
Amber Connected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning LEDs of the agnostic matrix cards
(OAM&P)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LAN interface LED 2
Table 5-41 Agnostic matrix card LAN interface LED 2
Color Function
Switched off Speed 10 Mb/s
Amber Speed 1 Gb/s

Green Speed 100 Mb/s
Reference
For the location of the LEDs, see Figure 4-20, “Agnostic matrix card front view
(MT1T9)” (p. 4-42).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning LED of the I/O cards
(OAM&P)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LED of the I/O cards

LED 1
Table 5-42 I/O card LED 1
Color Function
Switched off Card “Not in use” (SST=UAS) (Note: user can plug out the card )
Green blink Entity : Starting or graceful shutdown

SW in boot, autotesting, or FPGA download / Warm-up (Laser)
Green Card properly equipped, provisioned, and in service. No alarm is
present.
Amber blink Entity : Out of Service (OOS-[AU]MA)

Red blink Wrong Plug-In-Unit

Reference
For the location of the LED, see:
• Figure 4-25, “10XANY10G front view” (p. 4-51)
• Figure 4-28, “10XOTH10G front view” (p. 4-56)
• Figure 4-31, “10XETH10G front view” (p. 4-61)
• Figure 4-34, “2XANY40G front view” (p. 4-67)
• Figure 4-37, “24XANYMR front view” (p. 4-72)
• Figure 4-40, “24XETH1G front view” (p. 4-76)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning LED of the I/O cards
(OAM&P)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
6 Ordering
6
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides an overview of the ordering process and the current software and
license ordering information for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS).
Contents
Ordering information 6-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Ordering Ordering information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ordering information
Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) has been carefully engineered and all
equipment kitted to simplify the ordering process. In this chapter the current software and
license items and the test service items are shown, as available on the issue date of this
document.
For ordering information on mechanical items, see “Part lists” (p. 4-6). For ordering
information on customer documentation, see “Related information” (p. xxiv).
Software and license items
Table 6-1 Ordering information for software and license items
Item description Part number
Software license Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS application OCS 3AG 33545 ACAA
Software license Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS application GMPLS 3AG 33545 ADAA
Test services
Table 6-2 Ordering information for test services
Item description Part number
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS direct shipment standard 3AG 33543 AAAA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS direct shipment extra temperature 3AG 33543 ABAA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS direct shipment extra test in duration 3AG 33543 ADAA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS FAT standard 3AG 33544 AAAA
Contact and further information

For all questions concerning ordering of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS, for any information
about the marketable items and their part numbers, and for ordering the equipment, please
contact your Account Executive for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS or your Alcatel-Lucent
local customer team.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
7 S7ystem planning and
engineering
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides general system planning and engineering information for
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS).
Contents
General planning information 7-2

Power planning 7-3
Cooling equipment 7-5
Environmental conditions 7-7
Transmission capacity 7-16
Location rules 7-18
Floorplan guidelines (ETSI/ANSI) 7-20
Equipment interconnection 7-25
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
System planning and engineering General planning information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General planning information

This section provides general planning information for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS.
Planning considerations
When planning your network, you should consider the
• Power planning
• Cooling Equipment
• Transmission capacity
• Port location rules
• Synchronization
• Floor plan layout
• Equipment interconnection.
Engineering and installation services group

Alcatel-Lucent maintains an Engineering and Installation Services group to assist you in
planning and engineering a new system. The Engineering and Installation Services group
is a highly skilled force of support personnel dedicated to providing customers with
quality engineering and installation services. These specialists use state-of-the-art
technology, equipment, and procedures to provide customers with highly competent,
rapid response services.
Intended use
This equipment must be used only in accordance with intended use, corresponding
installation and maintenance statements as specified in this documentation. Any other use
or modification is prohibited.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
System planning and engineering Power planning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power planning
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 system power consumption
The power consumption of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 depends on its configuration and
on its equipage.
Table 7-1 Power dissipation of typical system configurations
System configuration Power consumption
Common I/O cards Total Per Gb/s

parts1
OTN NE fully loaded (1.9 Tb/s) using 9 1354 W 2991 W 4345 W 2.5 W
× 10x10GANY, 8 × 24xANY and 2 x
2x40GANY cards
OTN NE fully loaded (1.9 Tb/s) using 10 1354 W 3440 W 4794 W 2.5 W
× 10GANY card only
Notes:
1. Common parts include: Agnostic matrix cards, First-Level Controllers, Fan Units, Bus
Termination Cards, Bus Termination Cards CMISS, Power Supply, Filter, and Clock
Interface Cards, High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel and the backplane.
The worst-case power dissipation of a fully loaded Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 system
with MT3T8 is less than 10.6 kW.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 system power consumption

The power consumption of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 depends on its configuration and
on its equipage.
Table 7-2 Power dissipation of typical system configurations
System configuration Power consumption
Common I/O cards Total Per Gb/s

parts1
OTN NE fully loaded (~580 Gb/s) using 3 666 W 1089 W 1755 W 3.0 W
× 10x10GANY and 2 × 24xANY cards
OTN NE fully loaded (900 Gb/s) using 9 666 W 3440 W 2601 W 2.9 W
× 10GANY card only
Notes:
1. Common parts include: Agnostic matrix cards, First-Level Controllers, Fan Units, Bus
Termination Cards, Power Filter Cards, Top Rack Unit and the backplane.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
System planning and engineering Power planning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The worst-case power dissipation of a fully loaded Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 system
with MT960C is less than 5.4 kW.
References
For details about power distribution and grounding, see “PSS-64 Power distribution
concept” (p. 4-80).
For more information about power consumption of the individual circuit packs, see
“Weight and power consumption” (p. 10-18).
For equipment heat release information, see “Cooling equipment” (p. 7-5).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
System planning and engineering Cooling equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cooling equipment
Fan Units
The Fan Unit (FAN3T8) provides air flow for thermal dissipation inside the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS subrack. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack hosts two
fan units – one mounted below and one mounted above all slots used for circuit packs.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack hosts one fan unit mounted above all slots used
for circuit packs.
See “Fan Unit (FAN3T8)” (p. 4-17) for more detailed information.
Heat dissipation in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack

The cooling of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack is designed for a maximum
11.0 kW power consumption resulting in a heat dissipation of nearly the same. This value
includes the heat dissipation of all units, of the fan trays, and the PSF3T8 modules as well
as the heat losses in the backplane.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 is a high-integrated system. The heat release may exceed the
objective values recommended by Telcordia ® Requirement GR-63-CORE, (NEBS ™
Requirement) “Physical Protection” Section 4.1.4, depending on the system equipage
and on the rack configuration. If one system is installed in place 1 of a rack lineup, the
next system may only be installed in place 9. The other eight rack footprints must not be
installed with other heat dissipating equipment.
Throughout the telecom industry, it is acknowledged that most systems exceed the
Telcordia ® NEBS ™ heat release objective. It remains the responsibility of the customer to
provide adequate room cooling for the installed heat generating equipment.
The rounded maximum heat release per footprint area for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 is:
• 300-mm ETSI One Rack: 64000 W/m2
• 7-feet ANSI rack: 17700 W/m2
Depending on the footprint definition (ETSI or ANSI) and the associated aisle space, the
figures may deviate. A considerable approach would be to have a product installation in a
data center instead of an installation in a “classical” central office to overcome these
constraints.
Heat dissipation in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack

The cooling of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack is designed for a maximum
5400 W power consumption resulting in a heat dissipation of nearly the same. This value
includes the heat dissipation of all units, of the fan trays, and the PFC modules as well as
the heat losses in the backplane.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
System planning and engineering Cooling equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 is a high-integrated system. The heat release may exceed the
objective values recommended by Telcordia ® Requirement GR-63-CORE, (NEBS ™
Requirement) “Physical Protection” Section 4.1.4, depending on the system equipage
and on the rack configuration. If one system is installed in place 1 of a rack lineup, the
next system may only be installed in place 5. The other four rack footprints must not be
installed with other heat dissipating equipment.
Throughout the telecom industry, it is acknowledged that most systems exceed the
Telcordia ® NEBS ™ heat release objective. It remains the responsibility of the customer to
provide adequate room cooling for the installed heat generating equipment.
The rounded maximum heat release per footprint area for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 is:
• 300-mm ETSI One Rack with two subracks: 60000 W/m2
• 7-feet ANSI rack with one subrack only: 8300 W/m2
Depending on the footprint definition (ETSI or ANSI) and the associated aisle space, the
figures may deviate.
Air flow baffle

The air intake to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS subrack is done from the front. For that
purpose an air deflector (air baffle) below the subrack is needed which provides an
opening on the front side of at least 100 mm in height measured between the dust filter
bottom and the air baffle bottom. The space in front of the PSF3T8 module and PFC
module respectively is included in the space for air inlet. The purpose of the air baffle is
to prevent the intake of hot air which would flow from the subrack top through the
uprights and through the gap between the subrack rear wall and the rack rear wall
downwards. In other words, the hot air recirculation inside the rack has to be avoided.
The air baffle shape has been optimized by simulation. Recirculation of hot air at the
bottom side of the subrack side plates has to be avoided also since there will be fairly
large cut-outs for electrical cabling.
The average air velocity at the air inlet opening will be approx. 3.5 m/s. The system
internal air velocity within an individual slot can exceed this airflow velocity
significantly.
The air baffle is not part of the subrack. It will be installed in the rack as a separate unit.
Blank front plates

The following “blank” front plates must be used to ensure proper air flow and cooling:
• Full-size blank front plate to cover unused I/O card slots.
• Growth controller slot blank front plate to cover unused GC slots in the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
System planning and engineering Environmental conditions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Environmental conditions
Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) complies with the latest industry
standards for environmental conditions during the phases of storage, transportation, and
operation as detailed in following sections.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is designed according to the following standards:
Protection”, level 3
• Telcordia ® Requirement GR-78, “Generic Requirements for the Physical Design and
Manufacture of Telecommunications Products and Equipment”
• ETSI Standard Series EN 300 019, “Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental
conditions and environmental tests for telecommunications equipment”
Environmental conditions for storage

ETSI market
For the storage phase, the requirements according to the ETSI Standard EN 300 019-1-1,
class 1.2 “Weather-protected, not temperature-controlled storage locations” are met. This
class applies to weather-protected storage having neither temperature nor humidity
control. The location may have openings directly to the open air, that means, it may be
only partly weather-protected.
For quick reference, Table 7-3, “Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI
market)” (p. 7-7) shows the most important climatic values specified in the requirement.
The related climatogram is shown in Figure 7-1, “Temperature and humidity levels for
storage (ETSI market)” (p. 7-8).
Table 7-3 Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI market)
Conditions Limits
Low air temperature –25°C (–13°F)

High air temperature 55°C (131°F)
Low relative humidity 10%
High relative humidity 100%

Rate of temperature change 0.5 K/min (0.9°F/min)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 7-1 Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI market)
o o
F C
194 90
176 80
158 70
140 60
122 50
104 40
86 30 29
68 20
50 10 4
32 0
14 –10
–4 –20 3
0.5
–22 –30
–40 –40
–58 –50
1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
2 g-pipg-0281
Legend:
1 Air temperature
2 Relative air humidity [%]
3 Absolute air humidity [g/m3]
4 Conditions for storage
ANSI market
For the storage phase, the following specifics of Telcordia ® Requirement GR-63-CORE
are met:
• R4-3 [69]: Low-temperature exposure and shock (packaged equipment)
• R4-4 [71]: High relative humidity exposure (packaged)
• R4-5 [70]: High-temperature exposure and thermal shock (packaged equipment)
For quick reference, Table 7-4, “Environmental conditions for storage (ANSI market)”
(p. 7-8) shows the most important limits specified in the requirement.
Table 7-4 Environmental conditions for storage (ANSI market)
Conditions Limits
Low air temperature (uncontrolled humidity) –40°C (–40°F)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 7-4 Environmental conditions for storage (ANSI market) (continued)
Conditions Limits
Low air temperature change (uncontrolled humidity) 23°C to –40°C (73°F to –40°F) with a change rate of
30°C (54°F) per hour
–40°C to 23°C (–40 °F to 73°F) within less than 5
minutes
High air temperature (uncontrolled humidity) 70°C (158°F)

High air temperature change (uncontrolled humidity) 23°C to 70°C (73°F to 158°F) with a change rate of 30°C
(54°F) per hour
70°C to 23°C (158°F to 73°F) within less than 5 minutes

Air temperature change (at a relative humidity of 50%) 23°C to 40°C (73°F to 104°F) with a change rate of 30°C
(54°F) per hour
40°C to 23°C (104°F to 73°F) with a change rate of 30°C

(54°F) per hour
Relative humidity not combined with rapid temperature 93% at 40°C (104°F)
changes
Relative humidity change 93% to 50% at 40°C (104°F) within less than 2 hours
50% to 93% at 40°C (104°F) within less than 2 hours
Environmental conditions for transportation

ETSI market
For the transportation phase, the requirements according to the ETSI Standard
EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3 “Public transportation” are met. This class applies to
transportation where no special precautions have been taken. The conditions covered
include transportation in unventilated enclosures and in non-weather-protected conditions
with restrictions on the general open-air climates, excluding cold climates.
For quick reference, Table 7-5, “Temperature and humidity levels for transportation
(ETSI market)” (p. 7-9) shows the most important climatic values specified in the
requirement.
Table 7-5 Temperature and humidity levels for transportation (ETSI market)
Conditions Limits
Low air temperature –40°C (–40°F)

High air temperature in unventilated enclosures 70°C (158°F)
High air temperature in ventilated enclosures or outdoor 40°C (104°F)

air
changes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 7-5 Temperature and humidity levels for transportation (ETSI market)
(continued)
Conditions Limits
Relative humidity combined with rapid temperature 95% at –40°C to 30°C (–40 to 86°F)
changes air/air
Absolute humidity combined with rapid temperature 60 g/m3 at 70°C to 15°C (158 to 58°F)
changes air/air
ANSI market
For the transportation phase, the following specifics of Telcordia ® Requirement
GR-63-CORE are met:
• R4-3 [69]: Low-temperature exposure and shock (packaged equipment)
• R4-4 [71]: High relative humidity exposure (packaged)
• R4-5 [70]: High-temperature exposure and thermal shock (packaged equipment)
• R4-65 [107]: Category A containers (<100 kg), packaged shock/drop criteria
• R4-66 [108]: Category B containers (>100 kg), shock/drop criteria
• R4-67 [109]: Unpackaged shock/drop criteria
• R4-83 [124]: Transportation vibration, no physical damage
For quick reference, Table 7-6, “Environmental conditions for transportation (ANSI
market)” (p. 7-10) shows the most important limits specified in the requirement.
Table 7-6 Environmental conditions for transportation (ANSI market)
Conditions Limits
Low air temperature (uncontrolled humidity) –40°C (–40°F)

Low air temperature change (uncontrolled humidity) 23°C to –40°C (73°F to –40°F) with a change rate of
30°C (54°F) per hour
–40°C to 23°C (–40 °F to 73°F) within less than 5
minutes
High air temperature (uncontrolled humidity) 70°C (158°F)
High air temperature change (uncontrolled humidity) 23°C to 70°C (73°F to 158°F) with a change rate of 30°C
(54°F) per hour
70°C to 23°C (158°F to 73°F) within less than 5 minutes
Air temperature change (at a relative humidity of 50%) 23°C to 40°C (73°F to 104°F) with a change rate of 30°C
(54°F) per hour
40°C to 23°C (104°F to 73°F) with a change rate of 30°C

(54°F) per hour
changes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 7-6 Environmental conditions for transportation (ANSI market)
(continued)
Conditions Limits
Relative humidity change 93% to 50% at 40°C (104°F) within less than 2 hours
50% to 93% at 40°C (104°F) within less than 2 hours

Robustness against mechanical shocks (fully-equipped Permissible drop height for packaged equipment: 100
rack or subrack) mm (3.9 in)
Permissible drop height for unpackaged equipment: 2.5

mm (1 in)
Vibration levels which can typically be expected during

transportation.
Climatic conditions for stationary operation

The cold start temperature of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is –5°C (+23°F).
ETSI market
For the stationary operation phase, the requirements according to the ETSI Standard EN
300 019-1-3E, class 3.1 “Temperature-controlled location with exceptional conditions”
are met. This class applies to a permanently temperature-controlled enclosed location.
Humidity is usually not controlled.
For quick reference, Table 7-7, “Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ETSI
market)” (p. 7-11) shows the most important climatic values specified in the requirement.
The related climatogram is shown in Figure 7-2, “Temperature and humidity levels for
operation (ETSI market)” (p. 7-12).
Table 7-7 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ETSI market)
Conditions Limits
Low air temperature Normal operating:

5°C (41.0°F)
Exceptional:
–5°C (28.4°F)
High air temperature Normal operating:

40°C (104.0°F)
Exceptional:
45°C (113.0°F)
Low relative humidity 5%
High relative humidity 90%

Rate of temperature change 0.5 K/min (0.9°F/min)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 7-2 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ETSI market)
o o
F C
140 60
122 50
6 5
104 40
86 30
25
20
68 20 4
50 10
32 0 6
14 –10
1.5 3
1.0
–4 –20
–22 –30
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
1
2
g-pipg-0282
Legend:
1 Air temperature
4 Values outside of this field have a probability of occurrence of less than 10%
5 Normal operating conditions: values outside of this field have a probability of occurrence of less than 1%
6 Exceptional climatic limits
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ANSI market
For the stationary operation phase, the following specifics of Telcordia ® Requirement
GR-63-CORE are met:
• R4-6 [72]: Ambient temperature and humidity limits as shown in Table 7-8,
“Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market)” (p. 7-13) and Figure
7-3, “Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market)” (p. 7-14)
• R4-8 [74], R4-9 [136], R4-10 [75]: Requirements for altitude
• R4-68 [110], R4-69 [111], R4-70 [112], R4-72 [114], R4-75 [117], R4-81 [122],
R4-82 [123]: Requirements for dynamic shock, vibration, and earthquake. The chassis
resistance of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is compliant with zone 4 earthquake and office
vibrations.
Table 7-8 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market)
Conditions Limits
Ambient1 temperature Range

• Operating (up to 1800 m) • 5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F)
2
• Short-term • –5°C to 50°C (23°F to 122°F)
Rate of temperature change 30 K/h (54°F/min)
Ambient1 relative humidity Range
• Operating • 5% to 85%
• Short-term • 5% to 90%, but not to exceed 0.24 kg water/kg of
dry air
Notes:
1. “Ambient” refers to conditions at a location 1.5 m (59 in) above the floor and 400 mm
(15.8 in) in front of the equipment. For shelf-level equipment (see “Frame/Shelf level
according to Telcordia and ETSI” (p. 7-14)) there are to be 5°C added to the upper
temperature limit of the operational environmental conditions.
2. “Short-term” refers to a period of not more than 96 consecutive hours and a total of not more
than 15 days in 1 year. This refers to a total of 360 hours in any given year, but no more than
15 occurrences during that 1-year period. The long-term operating temperature range is 0°C
to 40°C (32°F to 104°F) and is given for the purposes of reliability assessment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 7-3 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market)
o o
F C
158 70
140 60
5
122 50
104 40
86 30 24
68 20 4
50 10
3
32 0
14 –10
1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
2 g-pipg-0280
Legend:
1 Air temperature
4 Normal operating conditions
5 Short-term conditions
Frame/Shelf level according to Telcordia and ETSI

The following describes the Frame/Shelf level according to Telcordia and ETSI
• Telcordia frame-level (subrack is more than 36” [=914.4mm] in height)
All Telcordia GR-63-CORE environmental conditions apply to a 12" or 14” deep
SNBF (ANSI rack) with one installed subrack (1830 PSS-64), including subrack
covers.
• Telcordia shelf-level (subrack is less than or equal to 36” [=914.4mm] in height)
All Telcordia GR-63-CORE environmental conditions apply to a stand-alone subrack
(1830 PSS-36). For certain tests the subrack may have to be mounted into an open
rack.
• ETSI rack-level
All ETSI EN 300 019 environmental conditions apply to a 300mm ETSI rack with
one installed subrack (1830 PSS-64), including optional rack doors and side-panels.
• ETSI subrack-level
All ETSI EN 300 019 environmental conditions apply to a stand-alone subrack (1830
PSS-36). For certain tests the subrack may have to be mounted into an open rack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS meets the following emissions requirements:
• FCC Regulation FCC 47 CFR part 15 Subpart B for class A computing device
• CISPR 22 ed. 2008, class A
• EN Standard 55 022, ed. 2006, +A1, 2007, Class A
• ETSI Standard EN 300 386, V1.4.1 environment “telecommunication centers”
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and
must be installed and used in accordance with the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation
and System Turn-Up Guide. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Limits above 1 GHz
The emitted electrical field in the frequency range 1 to 6 GHz complies with the standards
as defined in IEC CISPR 22.
Acoustic noise
The generated noise complies with
• ETSI Standard EN 300 019, class 3.1
Protection”, R4-72, R4-96, and R4-97
Building requirements for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS operation

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is designed for areas with restricted access, in particular:
• For central office (CO) applications Telcordia ® Requirement GR-1089-CORE, section
1.1 and Telcordia ® Requirement GR-63-CORE, (NEBS ™ Requirement) “Physical
Protection”, section 1.1
• For telecommunication centers ETSI ETS Standard 300 119-3, section 4.1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
System planning and engineering Transmission capacity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transmission capacity
Switching capacity
The available switching capacity of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS depends on the type of
matrix card used.
Table 7-9 Overall switching capacity
Matrix card type Subrack Switching capacity

for ODU traffic
960G Agnostic Matrix (MT960C) Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 960 Gb/s
1T9 Agnostic Matrix (MT1T9) Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 1.92 Tb/s
Capacity per Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack

Using the 1T9 Agnostic Matrix (MT1T9), the following maximum number of ports per
subrack and per port type are supported:
• 624 1-Gb/s ports
• 624 2.5-Gb/s ports (ODU1)
• 160 10-Gb/s ports (ODU2/ODU2e)
• 40 40-Gb/s ports (ODU3)
Capacity per Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack

Using the 960G Agnostic Matrix (MT960C), the following maximum number of ports per
subrack and per port type are supported:
• 312 1-Gb/s ports
• 312 2.5-Gb/s ports (ODU1)
I/O card capacities

The following table lists the transmission capacity provided by each port and per card.
Table 7-10 I/O card capacities
I/O card Ports per Capacity per port Capacity per card
card Gb/s Gb/s OPU0 equiv.
10XANY10G 10 10.3125 103.125 80
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
System planning and engineering Transmission capacity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 7-10 I/O card capacities (continued)
I/O card Ports per Capacity per port Capacity per card
card Gb/s Gb/s OPU0 equiv.
10XOTH10G 10 10.037 100.37 80
10XETH10G 10 10.3125 103.125 n.a.
2XANY40G 2 39.81312 79.62624 64
24XANYMR 24 2.48832 59.71968 48
24XETH1G 24 2.48832 59.71968 24
Reference
See Chapter 4, “Product description” for more detailed information about the available
I/O cards and optical modules.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
System planning and engineering Location rules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Location rules
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: Possible slot usage
The following table shows the possible slots for each card or unit of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-36:
Table 7-11 Slot assignment Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36
Unit Possible slots
Name Number
Full-slot I/O cards I/O 2 to 9, 12, 13, and 16 to 21
Agnostic matrix card (MT960C) A MT_A 10 to 11

Agnostic matrix card (MT960C) B MT_B 14 to 15
First-Level Controller (FLC) A FLC_A 23

First-Level Controller (FLC) B FLC_B 40
Bus Termination Card including CMISS (BTC36) A BTC36_A 1
Bus Termination Card including CMISS (BTC36) B BTC36_B 22
Power Distribution Panel (PDU1C, PDU2C) PDU1C, PDU2C
Fan Unit (FAN3T8) FAN 41

Power Supply Filter Card (PFC) A PSF_A 44
Power Supply Filter Card (PFC) B PSF_B 45
Notes:
1. A card must be replaced within 5 minutes. If this is not possible, the empty slot must be covered by a blank
front plate.
Blank front plates

To cover unused slots, the following “blank” front plates are available:
• Timing card blank faceplate to cover unused IST locations in the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-36 subrack.
The blank front plates must be used to ensure proper air flow and cooling.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: Possible slot usage

The following table shows the possible slots for each card or unit of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-64:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
System planning and engineering Location rules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 7-12 Slot assignment Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64
Unit Possible slots
Name Number
Full-slot I/O cards1 I/O • Quadrant 1: slot 1 to 8

Agnostic matrix card (MT1T9) A MT_A 71
Agnostic matrix card (MT1T9) B MT_B 72
First-Level Controller (FLC) A FLC_A 73

First-Level Controller (FLC) B FLC_B 75
Bus Termination Card (BT3T8) 1 BT_1 81
Bus Termination Card CMISS (BTC3T8) 1 BTC_1 83

Bus Termination Card CMISS (BTC3T8) 2 BTC_2 84

High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP) HPCFAP 90
Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8) A PSF_A 91
Fan Unit (FAN3T8) A FAN_A 92
Fan Unit (FAN3T8) B FAN_B 93
Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8) B PSF_B 94
Notes:
1. I/O cards (parent boards) hosting the tunable DWDM XFP (LRT11G1TU) must be located in the lower half
of the subrack (slots 33 to 40 or 41 to 48, respectively).
2. A card must be replaced within 5 minutes. If this is not possible, the empty slot must be covered by a blank
front plate.
Blank front plates

To cover unused slots, the following “blank” front plates are available:
• Growth controller slot blank front plate to cover unused GC slots in the
The blank front plates must be used to ensure proper air flow and cooling.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
System planning and engineering Floorplan guidelines (ETSI/ANSI)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Floorplan guidelines (ETSI/ANSI)

Overview
This section describes the floorplan data for both rack types (ETSI and SNBF rack).
Note: For exact measurements see the customer specific requirements. Local
circumstances can allow deviations from these guidelines.
Guidelines
The guidelines for horizontal dimensioning are shown in Figure 7-4, “Floorplan
guidelines (top view)” (p. 7-21).
The following rules apply:
• a ≥ 1200 mm [47.244 in]
• b ≥ 1800 mm [70.86 in]
• d = n × 600 mm [23.622 in] (n = number of cabinets).
The guidelines for the vertical dimensioning are shown in Figure 7-5, “Floorplan
guidelines (side view) ” (p. 7-22).
The following rule applies:
• c ≥ 3400 mm [133.85 in].
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 7-4 Floorplan guidelines (top view)
or
Legend:
mm Inch
600 23.622
750 29.527
1350 53.149
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 7-5 Floorplan guidelines (side view)
Legend:
mm Inch
300 11.811
600 23.622
750 29.527
1350 53.149
2134 84.015
2200 86.615
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 7-6 Floorplan guidelines for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 in accordance with
“Telcordia ® Requirement GR-63-CORE”
Installation space
660 mm [26 in]

Wiring aisle 610 mm [24 in]
Rack with one 1830 PSS-64 subrack (11.5 kW)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 305 mm [12 in]
Maintenance aisle 762 mm [30 in]

Empty rack space (8 spare foot prints)
g-itg-1003
The guidelines depict the heat dissipation limits in ANSI central office. As a result only
one rack with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack out of nine racks can be used based
on the Telcordia objective.
Figure 7-7 Floorplan guidelines for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 in accordance with
“Telcordia ® Requirement GR-63-CORE”
2
Installation space with 8308 W/m
Rack with one 1830 PSS-36 subrack (5.4 kW)

660 mm [26 in]
Wiring aisle 610 mm [24 in]
1 2 3 4 7 8 305 mm [12 in]
Empty rack space (4 spare foot prints)
Maintenance aisle 762 mm [30 in]
g-itg-1003b
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The guidelines depict the heat dissipation limits in ANSI central office. As a result only
one rack with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack out of five racks can be used based on
the Telcordia objective.
ETSI One Rack footprint options
Figure 7-8 Possible floor arrangement (example) in accordance with ETSI 300119-2
Rear line Possible rack arrangement

back to back
600 mm
300 mm
Front line
Aisle space
Min. 750 mm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
System planning and engineering Equipment interconnection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment interconnection
Optical connectors
The optical I/O cards provide optical connections either through front plate-mounted LC
connectors or through LC connectors located on the optical modules.
It is mandatory to use LC connectors with angled boots (45 °).
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 electrical connectors

The following table shows the types of electrical connectors used for the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-64 external interfaces. Interfaces not shown in this table are reserved for
internal debug purposes or for future software releases.
Table 7-13 Connector types per interface
Interface Location Connector type Usage

designation
DCN FLC RJ45 LAN interface for the management communications network
(MCN)
HPCFAP MON PSF3T8 RJ45 Interfaces for HPCFAP supervision
RA/RL PSF3T8 D-Sub9 If the PSF3T8 is positioned as PSF_A, this interface provides
four output line for the rack top lamps.
If the PSF3T8 is positioned as PSF_B, this interface provides
eight output lines for remote alarms.
SYNC PSF3T8 D-Sub9 External timing input
USB FLC USB type A Disk-on-key interface, used for software installation
RJ45
ZIC/DBG.N FLC RJ45 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC)
LAN interface
The details of these interfaces, for example, the pin assignment and the recommended
cable types, are shown in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up
Guide (ITG).
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 electrical connectors

The following table shows the types of electrical connectors used for the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-36 external interfaces. Interfaces not shown in this table are reserved for
internal debug purposes or for future software releases.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
System planning and engineering Equipment interconnection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 7-14 Connector types per interface
Interface Location Connector type Usage

designation
OAMP FLC RJ45 LAN interface for the management communications network
(MCN)
TRU MON PFC RJ45 Interfaces for TRU supervision
RA/RL PFC D-Sub9 If the PFC is positioned as PSF_A, this interface provides four
output line for the rack top lamps.
If the PFC is positioned as PSF_B, this interface provides eight
output lines for remote alarms.
SYNC PFC D-Sub9 External timing input

USB FLC USB type A Disk-on-key interface, used for software installation
RJ45
CIT FLC RJ45 LAN interface for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation
Craft Terminal (ZIC) access and debug
The details of these interfaces, for example, the pin assignment and the recommended
cable types, are shown in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up
Guide (ITG).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
8 Product support
8
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides information about the support options for Alcatel-Lucent
Contents
Accessing and navigating the OLCS web site 8-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Product support Accessing and navigating the OLCS web site
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Accessing and navigating the OLCS web site

Introduction
The online customer support (OLCS) web site is part of the Alcatel-Lucent Customer and
Business Partner Portals (http://support.alcatel-lucent.com). The web site is designed
mainly for registered customers and business partners.
Registration benefits
Depending on your service level as outlined in your customer contract, you can enjoy the
following benefits as a registered user:
• Create, view, edit, delete, and share your product lists.
• Receive 24/7 technical support service to help you operate and maintain your
communications network at peak performance.
• Keep current on relevant news and events with customized alerts.
• Review a library of technical documents, case studies, white papers, catalogs, industry
intelligence, and expert articles to help advance your research and business practices.
The level of benefits to which you may be entitled is determined by the customer contract
for your company or organization.
If your company or organization is a registered business partner, you can use the
following options:
• Gain access to powerful marketing tools that help you make the most of your
Alcatel-Lucent products and solutions.
• Enhance the cooperation and efficiency of your team by sharing documents and ideas
in the collaboration work space.
• Create, view, edit, delete, and share your product lists.
• Draw on our extensive library of case studies, white papers, catalogs, and expert
articles to advance your research and work.
Registering for the portals

To register for the Alcatel-Lucent Customer and Business Partner Portals
(http://support.alcatel-lucent.com), proceed as follows:
1. Click Register for Access.
2. On the Registration for access to Alcatel-Lucent Customer and Business Partner
Portals page, follow the steps displayed under Registration Progress.
You will receive an e-mail confirmation of your registration and site access privileges.
Alcatel-Lucent strives for two business days or less response.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How the site is designed
The “My Customer Support” portal is the umbrella portal to all of the underlying content
and tools. Product-specific content is organized by product. You can also gain access to
content and tools by going directly to each of the underlying applications.
Navigating on OLCS
The following primary ways to navigate are provided on OLCS.
• Jump to Content Page list
This option is the primary means to navigate between “My Customer Support” home
and the underlying applications or among the applications without returning home.
• Technical Content for portlet
This option allows easy access to product-specific content without navigating deeper
into the product pages.
• My Products
This option takes you to the My Products page, the access to both product-specific
content and any other available applications. The names of products for which your
company has service agreements or warranties are displayed on this page. If your
company has purchased a number of products from Alcatel-Lucent, and you wish to
shorten the list to only those products that you are responsible for, select Manage My
Products.
• Quick access portlets
These portlets provide easy access from the home page to heavily used applications
and useful support information. For example, the portlets provide quick access to the
“CARES” system and the “ask AL Knowledgebase” .
Technical support information

To locate technical support telephone numbers and e-mail contact information for your
area, use the Product Technical Support, Phone and E-mail Contact Information
drop-down menu.
Technical documentation on OLCS

Depending on the product, technical documentation may include:
• Manuals and guides
• Technical notes
• Release information
The Manuals and Guides category of documentation points directly to corporate libraries
for our highest volume products. In addition to listing documents available for online
viewing, the libraries may include CD-ROMs, videos, and other tangible media for
purchase. The libraries use “Topic Finder” which is a search engine designed to search
documents more efficiently than full text search.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
9 Quality and reliability
9
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides information about the quality and reliability of the Alcatel-Lucent
Contents
Conformance statements 9-2

Canada 9-3
China 9-5
European Union 9-7
United States 9-12
Quality 9-14
Alcatel-Lucent's commitment to quality and reliability 9-15
Ensuring quality 9-16
Reliability 9-17
General reliability specifications 9-18
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS failure-in-time rates 9-20
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Quality and reliability Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section presents the product conformance statements that apply to Alcatel-Lucent
In regions such as North America and the European Union, the statements that are
required are determined primarily by national or multi-national regulations. However, in
some regions, contract terms determine which statements are required.
The presence of the statement indicates that the product does comply with that statement
wherever it is required to do so.
Contents
Canada 9-3
China 9-5
European Union 9-7
United States 9-12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Quality and reliability Canada
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Canada
Introduction
The statements that follow are the product conformance statements that apply to the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) when deployed in Canada.
Industry Canada statements

ICES-003: Interference-Causing Equipment Standard Digital Apparatus
This digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Product safety conformance statements

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) is Safety Certified by UL/CSA
UL/CSA 60950-1, “Safety of Electronic Equipment within the Field of Audio/Video,
Information Technology and Communication Technology; Second Edition; April 2004”.
This Certification is marked on the equipment main nameplate label. Should the local
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) require prior or additional verification of this
Certification, a Product Certificate of Compliance can be obtained from the specific
Certification Body by the Business/Product Unit Applicant for the product or by
contacting your Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the Alcatel-Lucent Support
web site (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support/) for contact information.
Any modifications to this equipment are not permitted without review and official written
authorization from the specific Certification Body. Unauthorized changes may violate the
Product Safety Certification. Modifications or changes authorized by official CN/CNN
are assumed to have received prior approval from this Lab.
Indoor applications statement
This equipment is intended for installation in restricted access locations where access is
controlled or where access can only be gained by service personnel with a key or tool.
Access to this equipment is restricted to qualified service personnel only.
Optical transmitter statements

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) complies with ITU-T
Recommendation G.783, “Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical
transport systems”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Quality and reliability Canada
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical transmitters
Alcatel-Lucent declares that Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS)
complies with the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standards IEC
60825-1 Edition 2.0 (2007) and IEC 60825-2 Edition 3.1 (2007). It is a Class I/1 laser
optical fiber communication systems “product” under the IEC classifications.
This product is designed to ensure that personnel operating the product are not
endangered by laser radiation during normal operation and fault conditions. This product
does not present a risk of eye injury because it is fully enclosed and does not contain
embedded lasers greater than Class I/1 unless otherwise noted.
Laser warning statement
WARNING
Laser hazard
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified
herein may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
Do not view directly into the laser beam with optical instruments such as a fiber
microscope because viewing of laser emission in excess of Class 1 limits significantly
increases the risk of eye damage.
Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector as long as the optical
source is switched on.
Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber
connectors.
Eco-environmental statements
Packaging collection and recovery requirements
Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be established
for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or other end user,
or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling targets for the
return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established. For more information
regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging waste within specific
jurisdictions, contact the Alcatel-Lucent Environment, Health and Safety organization.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Quality and reliability China
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
China
Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) when deployed in China.
Product safety
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS complies with the following standards and requirements
related to product safety:
• The common standard on safety of information technology equipment IEC Standard
60950-1, “Information technology equipment – Safety”
• ITU-T Recommendation G.783, “Optical safety procedures and requirements for
optical transport systems”
• IEC Standard 60825, “Safety of laser products”, Part 1, “Equipment classification
and requirements”
• IEC Standard 60825, “Safety of laser products”, Part 2, “Safety of optical fibre
communication systems (OFCS) ”

FDA/IEC optical transmitter product compliance
60825-1 Edition 1.0 and its amendment 1 (1997) and amendment 2 (2001) and IEC
60825-2 Edition 3.1 (2007). It is a Class I/1 laser optical fiber communication systems
“product” under the IEC classifications.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Quality and reliability China
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Laser hazard
connectors.
Eco-Environmental statements
Material content compliance
The People's Republic of China Ministry of Information Industry has published a
regulation (Order #39) and associated standards regarding restrictions on hazardous
substances (China RoHS). Currently, the legislation requires all Electronic and
Information Products (EIP) to comply with certain labeling and documentation
requirements. Alcatel-Lucent products manufactured on or after 1 March 2007, that are
intended for sale to customers in the China market, must comply with these requirements.
In accordance with the People's Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard Marking
for the Control of Pollution Caused by Electronic Information Products
(SJ/T11364-2006), customers may access the Alcatel-Lucent Hazardous Substances Table
(http://www.alcatel-sbell.com.cn/wwwroot/images/upload/private/1/media/ChinaRoHS.
pdf).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Quality and reliability European Union
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
European Union
Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) when deployed in the European
Union.
Declaration of Conformity for equipment not in the scope of Directive 1999/5/EC statements
Hereby, Alcatel-Lucent declares that the equipment documented in this publication is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
2004/108/EC for EMC and Directive 2006/95/EC for safety requirements.
The technical documentation as required by the Conformity Assessment procedure is kept
at the Alcatel-Lucent location which is responsible for this product. For more information,
contact your local Alcatel-Lucent Customer Service Organization. by contacting your
Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the Alcatel-Lucent Support web site
(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support/) for contact information.
CE Marking
This product has been CE-marked in accordance with the following European Directives:
• 2004/108/EC Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS meets emissions requirements as defined in EMC directive
2004/108/ECFCC.
The equipment described in this manual has been tested and found to comply with the
following requirements:
• ETSI Standard EN 300 386, V1.4.1 environment “telecommunication centers”
• EN Standard 55 022, ed. 2006, +A1, 2007, Class A
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and
must be installed and used in accordance with the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation
and System Turn-Up Guide. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Limits above 1 GHz
The emitted electrical field in the frequency range 1 to 6 GHz complies with the standards
as defined in IEC CISPR 22.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Product safety
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS complies with the following standards and requirements related
to product safety:
• The common standard on safety of information technology equipment IEC Standard
60950-1, “Information technology equipment – Safety”, CAN/CSA -C22.2 No.
60950-1, Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 60950
• ITU-T Recommendation G.783, “Optical safety procedures and requirements for
optical transport systems”
• IEC Standard 60825, “Safety of laser products”, Part 1, “Equipment classification
and requirements”
• IEC Standard 60825, “Safety of laser products”, Part 2, “Safety of optical fibre
communication systems (OFCS) ”

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Laser hazard
connectors.
Recycling / take-back / disposal of products and batteries
In compliance with Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive (WEEE
Directive) 2002/96/EC 01/2003, amended by WEEE Directive 2003/108/EC 12/2003,
electronic products and batteries bearing or referencing the symbols shown below shall be
collected and treated at the end of their useful life, in compliance with applicable
European Union and other local legislation. They shall not be disposed of as part of
unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials that may be contained in the product and
batteries, such as heavy metals, the environment and human health may be negatively
impacted as a result of inappropriate disposal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 9-1 Wheeled bin symbol
Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where

applicable, Alcatel-Lucent will offer to provide for the collection and treatment of
Alcatel-Lucent products bearing the logo at the end of their useful life, or products
displaced by Alcatel-Lucent equipment offers.
For information regarding take-back of equipment by Alcatel-Lucent, or for more
information regarding the requirements for recycling/disposal of a product, please contact
your Alcatel-Lucent account manager. Visit the Alcatel-Lucent Take-Back
(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/product_takeback) web page, or contact Alcatel-Lucent
Takeback Support (mailto:takeback@alcatel-lucent.com). For technical information on
product treatment, consult the Alcatel-Lucent Recycling Information (http://www.alcatel-
lucent.com/product_recycling) web page.
Material content compliance
Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003
on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic
equipment (RoHS Directive) restricts the use of lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent
chromium, and certain flame retardants in electrical and electronic equipment. This
Directive applies to electrical and electronic products placed on the EU market after 1
July 2006, with various exemptions, including an exemption for lead solder in network
infrastructure equipment. Alcatel-Lucent products shipped to the EU after 1 July 2006
comply with the EU RoHS Directive.
ECMA TR/70
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS can be supported by an eco-Declaration according to ECMA
Technical Report TR/70.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Energy saving
In addition to the general Alcatel-Lucent standards for sustainable development, the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) complies with the following:
• Reduction of energy consumption according to the Directive on Eco-design
Requirements for Energy-using Products (EuP Directive) 2005/32/EC 07/2005
(L191/29)
• IEC Standard 62018, “Power consumption of Information Technology Equipment –
Measurement Methods”
• IEC Standard 60275, “Information and Communication Technology Equipment –
Environmentally Conscious Design”
• ATIS-0600015.2009: “Energy Efficiency for Telecommunication Equipment:
Methodology for Measurement and Reporting – General Requirements”
• ATIS-0600015.02.2009: “Energy Efficiency for Telecommunication Equipment:
Methodology for Measurement and Reporting – Transport Requirements”
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Quality and reliability United States
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
United States
Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) when deployed in the United States.
Federal Communications Commission

Important! Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Alcatel-Lucent could
void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC Part 15 Class A
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protections against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at the user's expense.
Product safety
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS complies with the common standard on safety of information
technology equipment IEC Standard 60950-1, “Information technology equipment –
Safety”, CAN/CSA -C22.2 No. 60950-1, Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 60950-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Quality and reliability United States
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Laser hazard
connectors.
jurisdictions, contact the Alcatel-Lucent Environment, Health and Safety organization or
Alcatel-Lucent Hazardous Waste Center technical support at +1 888 539-2783.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Quality
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Quality
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the commitment of Alcatel-Lucent to quality and reliability and
how quality is ensured.
Contents
Alcatel-Lucent's commitment to quality and reliability 9-15

Ensuring quality 9-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Quality and reliability Alcatel-Lucent's commitment to quality and reliability
Quality
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent's commitment to quality and reliability

Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent is extremely committed to providing our customers with products of the
highest level of quality and reliability in the industry. Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is a prime
example of this commitment.
Quality policy
Alcatel-Lucent is committed to achieving sustained business excellence by integrating
quality principles and methods into all we do at every level of our company to
• Anticipate and meet customer needs and exceed their expectations, every time
• Relentlessly improve how we work – to deliver the world's best and most innovative
communications solutions – faster and more cost-effectively than our competitors
Reliability in the product lifecycle

Each stage of the life cycle of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS relies on people and processes
that contribute to the highest product quality and reliability possible. The reliability of a
product begins at the earliest planning stage and continues into
• Product architecture
• Design and simulation
• Documentation
• Prototype testing during development
• Design change control
• Manufacturing and product testing (including 100% screening)
• Product quality assurance
• Product field performance
• Product field return management
The research and development (R&D) community of Alcatel-Lucent is certified according
to ISO 9001.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Quality and reliability Ensuring quality
Quality
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensuring quality
Critical elements of product development
The product development group’s strict adherence to the following critical elements
ensures the product’s reliability
• Design standards
• Design and test practices
• Comprehensive qualification programs
• System-level reliability integration
• Reliability audits and predictions
• Development of quality assurance standards for manufactured products
Critical elements of manufacturing

Note: Independent quality representatives are also present at manufacturing locations
to ensure shipped product quality.
The manufacturing and field deployment groups’ strict adherence to the following critical
elements ensures the product’s reliability
• Pre-manufacturing
• Qualification
• Accelerated product testing
• Product screening
• Production quality tracking
• Failure mode analysis
• Feedback and corrective actions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Reliability
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reliability
Overview
Purpose
This section presents reliability data for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
(PSS).
Contents
General reliability specifications 9-18

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS failure-in-time rates 9-20
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Quality and reliability General reliability specifications
Reliability
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General reliability specifications

Service life
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) system is designed and complies
with 15 years of live time. Exceptions are the Fan Units (L10 = 6.5 years), the hard drives
(7.5 years), flash memory cards (7.5 years), the solid-state disks (7.5 years), and the dust
filters.
The recommended replacement interval for the dust filters (used in Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-64 subracks) in central offices with air conditioning and filtering is six months.
This interval can be kept if the average dust load in the central office does not exceed
0.031 mg/m3 .
The recommended replacement interval for the dust filters (used in Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-36 subracks) in central offices with air conditioning and filtering is seven
months. This interval can be kept if the average dust load in the central office does not
exceed 0.020 mg/m3 .
Supervision and operation availability

The downtime of the control/configuration functions in case of duplex control due to
hardware failures does not exceed 3 minute per year according to Telcordia ® Requirement
GR-1339-CORE, “Generic Reliability Requirements for Digital Cross-Connect Systems”,
related to R3-9, DCS system.
Transmission plane availability

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS provides 99.999 % availability across its transmission plane
from ingress port to egress port in a central office environment (according to Telcordia ®
Requirement GR-418-CORE and GR-499-CORE) . This is equivalent to an annual
downtime of 5.26 minutes (port-to-port due to all causes). Transmission plane availability
is interpreted as the client-to-line transmission path availability.
Transmission unavailability
The unavailability per two-way channel, caused by hardware failures does not exceed
0.75 min per year in a central office environment, measured according to Telcordia ®
Requirement GR-499. According to GR-1339, all interruptions due to defect detection and
switch completion time (10 ms to 50 ms) are excluded from the downtime metric.
The system operates error free under worst case environmental conditions, with the input
signals in the middle of their allowed signal strength range, for at least one period of 24
hours out of two consecutive periods of 24 hours.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Quality and reliability General reliability specifications
Reliability
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Management plane availability/unavailability
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS provides at least 99.999 % availability per network element
across its management plane in a central office environment. This is equivalent to an
annual OAM&P downtime of 5.26 minutes per network element. According to Telcordia ®
Requirement GR-929-CORE, a total NE outage is a failure that results in loss of
functionality of the entire network element. The downtime could be caused by hardware,
software, or procedures.
Mean time between failures

The mean time between failures (MTBF) for the whole Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS depends
on the equipage of the system and on the specific hardware FIT rates, see “Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS failure-in-time rates” (p. 9-20). For further information please contact your
Customer Team.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Quality and reliability Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS failure-in-time rates
Reliability
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS failure-in-time rates

This section provides failure-in-time (FIT) rates for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
components, the calculated number of failures in 109 hours of operation.
Table 9-1 FIT rate per item
Abbreviation Description Item FIT rate
S3T8 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 basic subrack including S3T8 5884

backplane
CMSHF Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 basic subrack including CMSHF 3420

backplane
Fan Unit Fan Unit FAN3T8 2525
BT3T8 Bus Termination Card BT3T8 75

BTC3T8 Bus Termination Card CMISS BTC3T8 149
BT36 Bus Termination Card including CMISS BT36 376
HPCFAP High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel HPCFAP 810
PDU1C Power Distribution Unit - ETSI PDU1C 840
PDU2C Power Distribution Unit - ANSI PDU2C 840

PSF3T8 Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card PSF3T8 2501
PFC Power Supply Filter PFC 1948
FLC Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSSFirst-Level Controller EC_HC_R2 2895
FLC Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSSFirst-Level Controller FLC36EA 2895
Matrix
MT960C 960G Agnostic Matrix MT960 5718

MT1T9 1T9 Agnostic Matrix MT1T9 7170
I/O cards
10XANY10G 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit 10AN10G 5113
10XOTH10G 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit 10OT10G 5113

10XETH10G 10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit 10ET10G 5113
2XANY40G 2 × 40G ANY Port Unit 2AN40F1 5122
24XANYMR 24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit 24ANM 3996

24XETH1G 24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit 24ET1G 3996
STM-16 modules
SR12G7TU ALU SFP I-16.1 –40/+85 S2G7D2I 376
IR12G7TU ALU SFP S-16.1 –5/+85 S2G7D15E 376

LR12G7TU ALU SFP L-16.1 –5/+85 S2G7D40E 376
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Reliability
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-1 FIT rate per item (continued)
Abbreviation Description Item FIT rate
LR22G7TU ALU SFP L-16.2 –5/+85 S2G7D80E 376

IR12G7AU ALU SFP S-16.1 ANY RATE –40/+85 S2G7M15I 376
STM-64 modules
SR111G1AU ALU XFP I-64.1 / 10 GbE BASE-L –40/+85 X11M10I 922
IR211G1AU ALU XFP S-64.2.b-2B / 10 GbE BASE-E –40/+85 X11M40I 922

LR211G1AU ALU XFP P1L1-2D2 / 10 GbE BASE-Z –40/+85 X11M80E 922
GbE modules
1000BSXU ALU SFP GbE SX –40/+85 S1GE05I 376
1000BLXU ALU SFP GbE LX –40/+85 S1GE10I 376

1000BZXU ALU SFP GbE ZX –40/+85 S1GE80I 376
DWDM modules
LRT11G1TU 50 GHz wide tunable DWDM XFP X11MDTNC 575
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
10 Technical specifications
10
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the technical specifications for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic
Service Switch (PSS).
Contents
Interfaces 10-2
Transmission parameters 10-3
Performance 10-10
Supervision and alarms 10-11
Timing and synchronization 10-12
OAM & P 10-13
Network management 10-14
Physical design 10-15
Weight and power consumption 10-18
Spare part information 10-22
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Technical specifications Interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Interfaces
Robustness
All electrical transmission and synchronization interfaces conform to overvoltage and
signal immunity levels as laid down in ITU-T Recommendation G.703 and Telcordia ®
Requirement GR-1089-CORE.
Optical and Ethernet interfaces

See “Transmission parameters” (p. 10-3).
Timing interfaces
See “Timing interfaces” (p. 2-7).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Technical specifications Transmission parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transmission parameters
Optical interfaces (TDM)
Table 10-1 Parameters specified for STM-16 optical interfaces
Parameter ETSI STM-16 I-16.1 STM-16 S-16.1 STM-16 L-16.1 STM-16 L-16.2
ANSI SR-1 OC-48 IR-1 OC-48 LR-2 OC-48 LR-1 OC-48
Digital signal STM-16 according to ITU-T Recommendations G.707, G957
Nominal bit rate 2488320 kb/s

Laser type DFB DFB DFB DFB
Operating wavelength range 1270 to 1360 nm 1270 to 1360 nm 1280 to 1335 nm 1500 to 1580 nm
Transmitter at reference point S
Source type MLM SLM SLM SLM

Spectral characteristics:
– maximum RMS width 4 nm - - -
– maximum –20 dB width - 1 nm 1 nm 1 nm
– minimum side mode suppression ratio - 30 dB 30 dB 30 dB
Mean launch power:
– maximum –3 dBm 0 dBm +2 dBm +2 dBm
– minimum –10 dBm –5 dBm –2 dBm –2 dBm
Minimum extinction ratio 8.2 dB 8.2 dB 8.2 dB 8.2 dB
Optical path between S and R

Attenuation range 0 to 7 dB 0 to 12 dB 10 to 24 dB 10 to 24 dB
Maximum dispersion 12 ps/nm 100 ps/nm 250 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm
Minimum ORL at S (including connectors) 24 dB 24 dB 24 dB 24 dB
Maximum discrete reflectance between S and R –27 dB –27 dB –27 dB -27 dB
Receiver at reference point R
Type of detector In Ga As PIN In Ga As APD

Mean received power (@ BER = 10-10):
– minimum (sensitivity) –18 dBm –18 dBm –27 dBm –28 dBm
– maximum (overload) –3 dBm 0 dBm –8 dBm –8 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty 1 dB 1 dB 1 dB 2 dB

Maximum reflectance of receiver measured at R –27 dB –27 dB –27 dB –27 dB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 10-2 Parameters specified for STM-64/OC-192/OTU-2 optical interfaces
Parameter ETSI STM-64 I-64.1 STM-64 S-64.2b STM-64 P1L1-2D2
ANSI OC-192 SR-1 OC-192 IR-2 OC-192 P1L1-2D2
OTN OTU-2 P1I1-2D1 OTU-2 P1S1-2D2b OTU-2 P1L1-2D2
Digital signal STM-64 according to ITU-T Recommendations G.707, G.959.1, G.691
Nominal bit rate 9953280kb/s

Laser type DFB DFB DFB
Operating wavelength range 1290 to 1330 nm 1530 to 1565 nm 1530 to 1565 nm

Source type SLM EA-ILM SLM
– maximum spectral power density t.b.d. mW/MHz 1 t.b.d. ffs
– maximum -20 dB width 1 nm t.b.d. G.959.14
– minimum side mode suppression ratio 30 dB 30 dB 30dB
– chirp parameter t.b.d. radians t.b.d. t.b.d.

Mean launch power:
– maximum –1 dBm +2 dBm 12 dBm
– minimum –6 dBm –1 dBm 10 dBm
Minimum extinction ratio 6 dB 8.2 dB 9 dB
Optical path between S and R
Attenuation range 0 to 4 dB 3 to 11 dB 11 to 22 dB
Maximm chromatic dispersion: 6.6 ps/nm 800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm

Maximum DGD 30 ps/nm 30 ps/nm 30 ps/nm
Minimum ORL at S (including connectors) 14 dB 24 dB 24 dB

Maxim. discrete reflectance between S and R –27 dB –27 dB –27 dB
Receiver at reference point R

Type of detector PIN PIN PIN
–12
Mean received power: (@ BER = 10 and OSNR=19 dB/0.1 nm)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 10-2 Parameters specified for STM-64/OC-192/OTU-2 optical interfaces
(continued)
Parameter ETSI STM-64 I-64.1 STM-64 S-64.2b STM-64 P1L1-2D2
ANSI OC-192 SR-1 OC-192 IR-2 OC-192 P1L1-2D2
OTN OTU-2 P1I1-2D1 OTU-2 P1S1-2D2b OTU-2 P1L1-2D2
– minimum (sensitivity) –11 dBm –14 dBm –24 dBm
– maximum (overload) –1 dBm –1 dBm –7 dBm

Maximum optical path penalty 1 dB 2 dB 2 dB3
Maxim. reflectance of receiver measured at R –14 dB –27 dB –27 dB
Notes:
1. t.b.d. = to be defined
2. n.a. = not applicable
3. With 10 dB attenuation
4. Maximum -20dB spectral width (in nm) of an SLM laser is specified by the maximum full width of the
central wavelength peak, measured 20dB down from the maximum amplitude of the central wavelength
under standard operating conditions.
Optical interfaces (Ethernet)
Table 10-3 Parameters specified for 1 GbE optical interfaces

1000BASE-SX/-LX/-ZX
Parameter 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-ZX (1)
BOL EOL BOL EOL BOL EOL
Digital signal 1 GbE according to IEEE 802.3
Baud rate and reference pattern Bit rate: 1.25 GBd ± 100 ppm
Line code: PRBS 223–1, K28.5 characters
Laser type VCSEL FP DFB
2 3
Target distance 550 m ( ) 10 km over SMF (550 m ( , 80 km
4
)
Transmitter at reference point TP2

Source type MLM MLM SLM
Nominal center wavelength 770 to 860 nm 1270 to 1355 nm 1500 to 1580 nm

– maximum RMS width (σ) 0.85 nm 3.5 nm NA

– maximum –20 dB width 1 nm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 10-3 Parameters specified for 1 GbE optical interfaces
1000BASE-SX/-LX/-ZX (continued)
Parameter 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-ZX (1)
– minimum side mode suppression ration 30 dB
Mean launched power:

– maximum –1 dBm 0 dBm –4 dBm –3 dBm +4 dBm +5 dBm
– minimum –8.5 dBm –9.5 dBm –8 dBm –9 dBm +1 dBm 0 dBm

Maximum mean launched power for Tx –40 dBm –40 dBm –40 dBm
disabled
Minimum extinction ratio 10 dB 9 dB 10 dB 9 dB 10.0 dB 9.0 dB
Eye mask definition IEEE 802.3 IEEE 802.3ah - 2004 IEEE 802.3
Mask margin 10 % 10 % 10 %
Max opt. power overshoot vs. shutdown 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB

deactivation
Rise and fall time (unfiltered 20%/80%) 210 ps (5) 260 ps 260 ps
Maximum relative intensity noise –117 db/Hz –120 db/Hz –120 db/Hz
Maximum total transmitter jitter 345 ps 345 ps 345 ps
Optical return loss tolerance 12 dB 12 dB 20 dB
Optical path between TP2 and TP3

Attenuation range (6) 0 to 7.5 dB 0 to 10.5 0 to 7.5 dB
dB (7)
Maximum dispersion 1600 ps/nm

Optical path penalty 2 dB
Maximum discrete reflectance between –25 dB
TP2 and TP3
Receiver at reference point TP3
Optical wavelength range 770 to 860 nm 1270 to 1355 nm 1500 to 1580 nm

8
Minimum sensitivity ( ) with fiber –19 dBm –17 dBm –21.5 dBm –19.5 dBm –26 dBm –24 dBm
Stressed receiver sensitivity (9) –13.5 dBm –15.4 dBm

(10)
Minimum overload 1 dBm 0 dBm –2 dBm –3 dBm +1 dBm 0 dBm
Minimum acceptable jitter 408 ps 408 ps 408 ps

Maximum reflectance of receiver, 12 dB 12 dB 12 dB
measured at TP3
LOS assert level (11) –30 to –23 –33 to –39 to –30
dBm –25.5 dBm dBm
LOS hysteresis 0.5 to 5 dB 0.5 to 5 dB 0.5 to 5 dB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notes:
1. The 1 GbE long reach device, 1000BASE-ZX, is based upon the 1000BASE-LX devices in the IEEE 802.3
standard. However, wavelength and reach were re-defined supporting an 80 km interface.
2. For a modal bandwidth of 500 MHz × km @ 850 nm (min. overfilled launch). Summary of reaches vs. BL
product: 550 m MMF 50 mm (500 MHz × km @ 850 nm); 500 m MMF 50 mm (400 MHz × km @ 850 nm);
275 m MMF 62.5 mm (200 MHz × km @ 850 nm); 220 m MMF 62.5 mm (160 MHz × km @ 850 nm)
3. For a modal bandwidth of 500 MHz × km @ 1310 nm (min. overfilled launch) using a singlemode fiber
offset-launch mode-conditioning patch cord. Summary of reaches vs. BL product: 550 m MMF 50 mm (400
MHz × km @ 1300 nm); 550 m MMF 62.5 mm (500 MHz × km @ 1300 nm)
4. Values in brackets deviate from the SMF interface specifications and apply to MMF operation using a
single-mode fiber offset-launch mode-conditioning patch cord.
5. Trise/Tfall ≤ 0.26 ns for wavelengths > 830 nm.
6. Attenuation assumed to be worst-case values including losses due to splices, connectors, optical attenuators
(if used) and any additional cable margin.
7. Link power budget for 50 μm and 62.5 μm MMF is 7.5 dB using a single-mode fiber offset-launch
mode-conditioning patch cord.
8. Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point TP3 to
achieve a 1 × 10–12 BER at 1.25 Gb/s both with a PRBS 223–1 and repetitive K28.5 characters. It takes into
account power penalties caused by use of a transmitter under all operating conditions with worst-case values
of extinction ratio, pulse rise and fall times, optical return loss at point TP2, receiver connector degradations
and measurement tolerances.
9. Measured with a conformance test signal as defined in the applicable standard.
10. Stressed receiver sensitivity ≤ –12.5 dBm for 62.5 µm MMF.
11. It is expected that the LOS assert level always occurs at power levels below that of the receiver sensitivity
power level. LOS is not asserted at power levels where there is error-free transmission.
Table 10-4 Parameters specified for 10 GbE optical interfaces 10GBASE-LR/LW,

10GBASE-ER/EW, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW
Parameter 10GBASE-LR/LW 10GBASE-ER/EW 10GBASE-ZR/ZW
Digital signal 10 GbE according to IEEE 802.3
Laser type DFB DFB DFB
Target distance 2/10 km 40 km 80 km

Fiber type G.652 G.652 G.652
Source type Single longitudinal mode Single longitudinal mode Single longitudinal mode
laser (SLM) laser (SLM) laser (SLM)
Nominal center wavelength 1290 to 1330 nm 1530 to 1565 nm 1530 to 1565 nm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10GBASE-ER/EW, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW (continued)
– maximum –20 dB width 1 nm 0.5 nm 0.25 nm

– minimum side mode suppression ration 30 dB 30 dB 30 dB
– chirp parameter (α) rad rad rad for further rad negative
study chirp
– maximum spectral power density 0.1 0.1 0.1

mW/MHz mW/MHz mW/MHz
Mean launched power:

– maximum –2 dBm –1 dBm +1.5 dBm +2 dBm +3.5 dBm +4 dBm
– minimum –4 dBm –6 dBm 0 dBm –1 dBm +1 dBm 0 dBm

Maximum mean launched in case Tx_Dis –30 dBm –40 dBm –40 dBm
and/or P_Down are high
Minimum extinction ratio 6.5 dB 6 dB 9.0 dB 8.2 dB 10 dB 9 dB
Eye mask margin 10 % 10 % 10 %
Optical modulation amplitude (OMA) –4.2 dBm –5.2 dBm –0.7 dBm –1.7 dBm –0.7 dBm –1.7 dBm
RIN12 OMA –128 dB/Hz –128 dB/Hz
Optical path between point S and point R
Attenuation range (@ BER = 1 × 10–12) 0 to 4 dB 3 to 11 dB 11 to 22 dB
Maximum dispersion 60 ps/nm 800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm
Maximum PMD 10 ps 10 ps 10 ps
Minimum optical return loss of cable plant 14 dB 24 dB 24 dB
at point S, including any connectors
Maximum discrete reflectance between –27 dB –27 dB –27 dB
point S and point R
Receiver at reference point TP3
Optical wavelength range 1260 to 1360 nm/ 1530 to 1565 nm 1530 to 1565 nm
5
1530 to 1565 nm ( )
Minimum receiver sensitivity –13 dBm –11 dBm –16 dBm –14 dBm –16 dBm –24 dBm
Minimum overload 1.5 dBm 0.5 dBm 0 dBm –1 dBm 0 dBm –7 dBm
Minimum receiver sensitivity in OMA –13.6 dBm –12.6 dBm –15.1 dBm –14.1 dBm
Stressed receiver sensitivity in OMA –11.3 dBm –10.3 dBm –12.3 dBm –11.3 dBm
Maximum reflectance of receiver, 12 dB

measured at TP3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10GBASE-ER/EW, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW (continued)

3
RX-LOS assert level (see )
Hysteresis for RX-LOS, assert deassert 0.5 to 2.0 0.5 to 2.0 0.5 to 2.0
dB dB dB
Maximum optical path penalty (4) 1 dB 1.8 dB 2 dB 1.8 dB 2 dB
Maximum reflectance of receiver, –14 dB –27 dB –27 dB

measured at point R
Notes:
1. The receiver is specified for the 1550 nm window; in the 1310 nm window, the receiver will have
comparable performance to I-64.1, SR-1.
2. The receiver is specified for the 1550 nm window; in the 1310 nm window, the receiver will have sensitivity
degradation lower than 1 dB.
3. RX_LOS is pin 14 of the XFP’s electrical connector. This alarm is based upon total optical power received at
the photodiode. The assert level occurs at the optical input power that corresponds to an equivalent BER of 1
× 10–2 to 1 × 10–4. LOS will not be asserted at power levels where there is error-free transmission.
4. Due to chromatic dispersion + PMD + optical reflections.
5. To be guaranteed by design, no testing in production is required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Technical specifications Performance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performance
Performance independence
As long as the system is not in recovery state, the transmission and protection
performance of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is independent of the operation load and the
other way round. That means, for example, that in case of a software download or/and
configuration database download the protection performance still meets the requirements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Technical specifications Supervision and alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Supervision and alarms

Specifications
The following specifications apply to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS with regard to supervision
and alarms:
• Plug-in circuit pack indication: service/active LED per card, see “Operations
interfaces” (p. 5-58)
• Push buttons:
– First-Level Controller: ACO button to acknowledge alarms, reset button , see
“First-Level Controller (FLC)” (p. 4-34)
– Agnostic matrix cards: Reset button, see “Agnostic matrix cards (MT960C,
MT1T9)” (p. 4-39)
• Remote alarm interface: Can be used to extend the alarm signals from the system into
the station alarm scheme, see “Network element alarm indicators” (p. 5-15)
• Rack top alarm lamps to display a visible summary of the current alarm status of the
network element, see “PSS-64 High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel
(HPCFAP)” (p. 4-31), “PSS-64 Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card
(PSF3T8)” (p. 4-25) , and “Network element alarm indicators” (p. 5-15).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Technical specifications Timing and synchronization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Timing and synchronization

In the present release, system timing is derived from internal oscillators, operated in
free-running mode; see also “Synchronization” (p. 4-79).
The frequency stability in the free-running mode is better than ±4.6 ppm, in compliance
with the ITU-T Recommendation G.813, Option 1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Technical specifications OAM & P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OAM & P
Specifications
The following specifications apply to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS with regard to operation,
administration, maintenance, and provisioning:
• Testing
– Power-on self test after start up and recovery
– LAN interface self test
– Facility loopbacks for interface testing
• Recovery
Auto recovery after power failure
• Local surveillance through front plate LEDs, local maintenance through buttons on
First-Level Controller and agnostic matrix cards
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC LAN interface
• Centralized O & M via LAN interface, ECC link
• SW-downloading via LAN interface, ECC link
• Database backup and restore
• Alarms:
– Categories for indication of alarm severity
– Alarm reporting to management systems
– Alarm filtering
– Alarm hierarchies
– Alarm logging
– Remote alarm interfaces
– Rack top lamps on HPCFAP
• Local workstation (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC) - only fpr PSS-64
• Autoprovisioning by the insertion of a circuit pack or optical module once the
referring slot is pre-provisioned
Reference
See Chapter 5, “Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P)”
for more detailed information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Technical specifications Network management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network management
Specifications
The following specifications apply to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS with regard to network
management:
• Fully manageable by Alcatel-Lucent 1350 Optical Management System (OMS)
• Integration into path management of Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS
• Access to embedded communication channels (ECC)
• Integration into the management network by features such as:
– LAN redundancy
– TCP/IP communication stack support including translation functions
– Level 2 routing
– Gateway NE functions
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC for network element management: RJ45 interface /
100BASE-T interface
• Manageable by Alcatel-Lucent 1340 Integrated Network Controller (INC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Technical specifications Physical design
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Physical design
Specifications overview
The following specifications apply to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 with regard to physical
design:
Rack dimensions 300-mm ETSI One Rack:

2200 mm (7.2 ft) × 600 mm (23.6 in) × 300 mm (11.8 in) (H × W × D)
7-feet Seismic Network Bay frame rack:
2133.6 mm (7 ft) × 584.2 mm (23 in) × 304.8 mm (12 in) (H × W × D)
Subrack dimensions 1552 mm (5.0 ft) × 500 mm (1.64 ft) × 300 mm (11.8 in) (H × W × D)
Connectors optical LC connectors on all optical interfaces
Available slots • 32 slots for I/O cards
• 2 slots for agnostic matrix cards (MT1T9)
• 2 slots for First-Level Controllers (FLC)
• 4 slots for Bus Termination Cards (BT3T8) (pre-mounted, comes
together with the shelf, no separate order needed)
• 2 slots Bus Termination Cards CMISS (BTC3T8) (pre-mounted,
comes together with the shelf, no separate order needed)
• 2 slots reserved for future use
Power supply and • 1 High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP)
distribution
• 2 Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Cards (PSF3T8)
Cooling 2 Fan Units (FAN3T8)
Connectors electrical D-Sub on Alarm, Timing,
RJ45 on LAN interfaces
Station power input –48 V / –60 VDC (max. range: –40…–72 VDC)
(battery)
Power consumption < 10000 W for a typical configuration, 11.0 kW maximum.
The following specifications apply to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 with regard to physical
design:
Rack dimensions 300-mm ETSI One Rack:

2200 mm (7.2 ft) × 600 mm (23.6 in) × 300 mm (11.8 in) (H × W × D)
7-feet Seismic Network Bay frame rack:
2133.6 mm (7 ft) × 584.2 mm (23 in) × 304.8 mm (12 in) (H × W × D)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Subrack dimensions 650 mm (25.59 in) × 500 mm (1.64 ft) × 300 mm (11.8 in) (H × W × D)
Connectors optical LC connectors on all optical interfaces
Available slots • 16 slots for I/O cards
• 2 slots for agnostic matrix cards (MT960C,)
• 2 slots for First-Level Controllers (FLC)
• 2 slots for Bus Termination Cards including CMISS (BTC36)
• 2 slots reserved in front of the Bus Termination Cards for future use
(shelf synchronization interconnection)
Power supply and • 1 Power Distribution Unit (PDU)
distribution
• 2 Power Supply Filters (PFC)
Cooling 1 Fan Unit (FAN3T8)
Connectors electrical D-Sub on Alarm, Timing,
RJ45 on LAN interfaces
Station power input –48 V / –60 VDC (max. range: –40…–72 VDC)
(battery)
Power consumption 5429 W maximum
For more detailed information on weight and power consumption, see “Weight and power
consumption” (p. 10-18) and “Power planning” (p. 7-3).
Floor loading
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS racks meet the following floor-loading and point-loading
requirements:
• ETSI ETS Standard 300 119-3, clause 5.1:
Less than 15 kN/m2, that means, 550 kg for a footprint of 60 × 60 cm
Protection”
Less than 735 kg/m2
The racks are also able to support the static of a superstructure (cable ducts) as specified
in ETSI ETS Standard 300 119-3, clause 5.2, with a limit of at most 8 kN/m2.
Labeling
Each field-replaceable unit is labeled in such a way that information needed to install
proper units in the proper slot is contained on that label. The label includes a serial
(production) number as well as 2D barcodes MicroPDF417 syntax.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
On each field-replaceable unit space is reserved for customer labels. If the front plate is
entirely filled with interfaces and signaling elements, then space is available on the top
latch of the circuit pack.
Halogen-free cabling
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is completely equipped with halogen-free internal and
external cables.
Subrack fiber handling

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 supports up to 1536 working fibers (diameter: 1.6 mm),
that means, 768 per side of the subrack (sufficient for 24 interfaces per slot).
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 supports up to 768 working fibers (diameter: 1.6 mm),
that means, 384 per side of the subrack (sufficient for 24 interfaces per slot).
The use of 2 mm simplex-cables is only possible in exceptional cases where this is
feasible from a system configuration viewpoint. The system cannot be fully installed with
fiber cables thicker than 2 mm diameter (for example 2.5 mm or 3.0 mm).
It is recommended to use LC connectors with angled boots (45 °), but straight boots can
be used, too; LC-LC-Allwave-Attenuators cannot be installed at the system side but must
be mounted, for example, to an optical distribution frame.
Mechanical robustness
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS as well as all its individual items are designed for mechanical
robustness and with respect to shipping, handling, installation, and maintainability.
Sensitive components are protected against touch during handling.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Technical specifications Weight and power consumption
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Weight and power consumption

The following specifications apply to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS with regard to weight and
typical power consumption of the individual parts/circuit packs. The values for the worst
case power consumption are roughly 20 % higher.
Table 10-5 Weight and power consumption Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64
Abbreviation Description Item Weight [kg] Typical power

(mnemonic) consumption [W]
Rack
7-feet Seismic Network Bay Frame 90.5 (including HPCFAP

ANSI rack and rack cables)
300-mm ETSI One Rack (including HPCFAP and

rack cables)
HPCFAP High Power Connection Fuse and HPCFAP 10.5
Alarm Panel
S3T8 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 basic S3T8 43.0 190
subrack including backplane
FAN3T8 Fan Unit FAN3T8 4.3 170.0
BT3T8 Bus Termination Card BT3T8 0.1
BTC3T8 Bus Termination Card CMISS BTC3T8 0.1
PSF3T8 Power Supply, Filter, and Clock PSF3T8 2.3 30.0

Interface Card
FLC First-Level Controller EC_HC 0.9 48.0

Matrix
MT1T9 1T9 Agnostic Matrix MT1T9 7.0 344.8
I/O cards
10XANY10G 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit 10AN10G 2.2 215.0
10XOTH10G 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit 10OT10G 2.2 215.0
10XETH10G 10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit 10ET10G 2.2 215.0
2XANY40G 2 × 40G ANY Port Unit 2AN40F1 2.2 120.0

24XANYMR 24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit 24ANM 2.2 102.0
24XETH1G 24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit 24ET1G 2.2 102.0
Miscellaneous
Full slot blank front plate 0.55
Growth controller slot blank front 0.35
plate
Dust filter 0.4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(continued)

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS installation 20

kit (ETSI)
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS installation 40

kit (ANSI)
STM-16 modules (SFP)
SR12G7TU 2.5 Gb/s module: STM-16/OC- S2G7D2I 0.2 1.0

48/OTM-0.1 (I-16.1/SR-1/P1I1-1D1)
IR12G7TU 2.5 Gb/s module: STM-16/OC- S2G7D15E 0.2 1.0

48/OTM-0.1 (S-16.1/IR-1/P1S1-
1D1)
LR12G7TU 2.5 Gb/s module: STM-16/OC- S2G7D40E 0.2 1.0

48/OTM-0.1 (L-16.1/LR-1/P1L1-
1D1)
LR22G7TU 2.5 Gb/s module: STM-16/OC- S2G7D80E 0.2 1.2
48/OTM-0.1 (L-16.2/LR-2/P1L1-
1D2)
IR12G7AU Multirate module: GbE, STM-16, S2G7M15I 0.2 1.2
OTU1 (S-16.1/IR-1/P1S1-1D1)
10G multi-rate modules (XFP)
SR111G1AU 10 Gb/s multirate module: X11M10I 0.2 2.0
STM-64/OC-192/OTM-0.2
(I-64.1/SR-1/P1I1-2D1),
10GBASE-LR/LW
IR211G1AU 10 Gb/s multirate module: X11M40I 0.2 2.8
STM-64/OC-192/OTM-0.2
(S-64.2b/IR-2/P1S1-2D2b),
10GBASE-ER/EW
LR211G1AU 10 Gb/s multirate module: X11M80E 0.2 2.8

STM-64/OC-192/OTM-0.2
(L-64.2b/LR-2/P1L1-2D2),
10GBASE-ZR/ZW
GbE modules
1000BSXU GbE module: 1000BASE-SX S1GE05I 0.2 0.6
1000BLXU GbE module: 1000BASE-LX S1GE10I 0.2 0.6

1000BZXU GbE module: 1000BASE-ZX S1GE80I 0.2 0.9
DWDM modules
LRT11G1TU 50 GHz wide tunable STM-64 X11MDTNC 0.2 2.8
DWDM XFP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Rack
7-feet Seismic Network Bay Frame 90.5 (including HPCFAP

ANSI rack and rack cables)
300-mm ETSI One Rack (including HPCFAP and

rack cables)
Power Distribution Unit - ETSI PDU1C 5.8

Power Distribution Unit - ANSI PDU2C 5.7

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack 26.0
kit
FAN3T8 Fan Unit FAN3T8 4.3 170
BTC36 Bus Termination Card including BTC36 0.2 12

CMISS
PFC Power Supply Filter PFC 1.4 24
FLC First-Level Controller FLC36EA 0.9 48
Matrix
MT960C 960G Agnostic Matrix MT960C 7.0 166
I/O cards, see I/O cards for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 .
Miscellaneous
Full slot blank front plate BFP 0.55
Half slot blank - PSS-36, PSS-64 HSBNK36 0.22
TC Blank (PSS-36) - 1/3 high, 20mm TIBNK 0.13

wide
Dust filter 0
Circuit breaker 50 A 0.12

SFP dummy plug kit (16 pieces) 0.16
XFP dummy plug kit (10 pieces)
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 10.8

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 10.8

STM-16 modules, see STM-16 modules for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 .

STM-16 multi-rate, multi-format module, see STM-16 multi-rate, multi-format module for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 .
STM-64 modules, see STM-64 modules for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(continued)

GbE modules, see GbE modules for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 .
DWDM modules, see DWDM modules for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 .
For the fields marked with “n.a.”, data was not available on the issue date.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Technical specifications Spare part information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Spare part information

The following tables indicate how many units are required in the customer's substitution
spare stock. The calculation for all parts is based on a lead time of 30 days. For more
specific information please contact your Alcatel-Lucent local customer team.
Table 10-7 Recommended spare stock levels for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64
Abbr. Description Item Number of units used
10 25 50 75 100 150 200 500 1000
Rack
HPCFAP High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm HPCFAP 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 5 6

Panel

FAN3T8 Fan Unit FAN3T8 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 7 11
BT3T8 Bus Termination Card BT3T8 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4
BTC3T8 Bus Termination Card CMISS BTC3T8 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 4
PSF3T8 Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface PSF3T8 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 8 12

Card
FLC First-Level Controller EC_HC 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 9 14

Matrix
MT1T9 1T9 Agnostic Matrix MT1T9 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 15 24

I/O cards
10XANY10G 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit 10AN10G 3 3 4 5 6 7 7 12 18
10XOTH10G 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit 10OT10G 3 3 4 5 6 7 7 12 18
10XETH10G 10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit 10ET10G 3 3 4 5 6 7 7 12 18
2XANY40G 2 × 40G ANY Port Unit 2AN40F1 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 14 22
24XANYMR 24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit 24ANM 3 3 4 5 5 6 7 11 17
24XETH1G 24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit 24ET1G 3 3 4 5 5 6 7 11 17
STM-16 modules
SR12G7TU 2.5 Gb/s module: STM-16/OC- S2G7D2I 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4
48/OTM-0.1 (I-16.1/SR-1/P1I1-1D1)
IR12G7TU 2.5 Gb/s module: STM-16/OC- S2G7D15E 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4
48/OTM-0.1 (S-16.1/IR-1/P1S1-1D1)
LR12G7TU 2.5 Gb/s module: STM-16/OC- S2G7D40E 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4
48/OTM-0.1 (L-16.1/LR-1/P1L1-1D1)
48/OTM-0.1 (L-16.2/LR-2/P1L1-1D2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(continued)
10 25 50 75 100 150 200 500 1000
IR12G7AU Multirate module: GbE, STM-16, OTU1 S2G7M15I 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4

(S-16.1/IR-1/P1S1-1D1)
STM-64 modules
SR111G1AU 10 Gb/s multirate module: X11M10I 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 5 6

STM-64/OC-192/OTM-0.2
(I-64.1/SR-1/P1I1-2D1),
10GBASE-LR/LW
IR211G1AU 10 Gb/s multirate module: X11M40I 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 5 6
STM-64/OC-192/OTM-0.2
(S-64.2b/IR-2/P1S1-2D2b),
10GBASE-ER/EW
LR211G1AU 10 Gb/s multirate module: X11M80E 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 5 6
STM-64/OC-192/OTM-0.2
(L-64.2b/LR-2/P1L1-2D2),
10GBASE-ZR/ZW
GbE modules
1000BSXU GbE module: 1000BASE-SX S1GE05I 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4
1000BLXU GbE module: 1000BASE-LX S1GE10I 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4
1000BZXU GbE module: 1000BASE-ZX S1GE80I 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4
DWDM modules
LRT11G1TU 50 GHz wide tunable STM-64 DWDM X11MDTNC 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 5

XFP
10 25 50 75 100 150 200 500 1000
Rack
Power Distribution Unit - ETSI PDU1C 2 2 3 4 4 4 5 6 9
Power Distribution Unit - ANSI PDU2C 2 2 3 4 4 4 5 6 9
FAN3T8 Fan Unit FAN3T8 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 7 11

BT36 Bus Termination Card including CMISS BT36 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 7
PFC Power Supply Filter PFC 2 4 4 5 5 5 6 7 13
FLC First-Level Controller FLC36EA 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 9 15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(continued)
10 25 50 75 100 150 200 500 1000
Matrix
MT960C 960G Agnostic Matrix MT960 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 15 24

I/O cards
10XANY10G 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit 10AN10G 3 3 4 5 6 7 7 12 18

10XOTH10G 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit 10OT10G 3 3 4 5 6 7 7 12 18
10XETH10G 10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit 10ET10G 3 3 4 5 6 7 7 12 18

2XANY40G 2 × 40G ANY Port Unit 2AN40F1 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 14 22
24XANYMR 24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit 24ANM 3 3 4 5 5 6 7 11 17

24XETH1G 24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit 24ET1G 3 3 4 5 5 6 7 11 17
STM-16 modules
SR12G7TU 2.5 Gb/s module: STM-16/OC- S2G7D2I 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4
48/OTM-0.1 (I-16.1/SR-1/P1I1-1D1)
IR12G7TU 2.5 Gb/s module: STM-16/OC- S2G7D15E 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4

48/OTM-0.1 (S-16.1/IR-1/P1S1-1D1)

48/OTM-0.1 (L-16.1/LR-1/P1L1-1D1)
48/OTM-0.1 (L-16.2/LR-2/P1L1-1D2)
IR12G7AU Multirate module: GbE, STM-16, OTU1 S2G7M15I 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4
(S-16.1/IR-1/P1S1-1D1)
STM-64 modules
SR111G1AU 10 Gb/s multirate module: X11M10I 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 5 6
STM-64/OC-192/OTM-0.2
(I-64.1/SR-1/P1I1-2D1),
10GBASE-LR/LW
IR211G1AU 10 Gb/s multirate module: X11M40I 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 5 6

STM-64/OC-192/OTM-0.2
(S-64.2b/IR-2/P1S1-2D2b),
10GBASE-ER/EW
LR211G1AU 10 Gb/s multirate module: X11M80E 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 5 6
STM-64/OC-192/OTM-0.2
(L-64.2b/LR-2/P1L1-2D2),
10GBASE-ZR/ZW
GbE modules
1000BSXU GbE module: 1000BASE-SX S1GE05I 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(continued)
10 25 50 75 100 150 200 500 1000
1000BLXU GbE module: 1000BASE-LX S1GE10I 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4
1000BZXU GbE module: 1000BASE-ZX S1GE80I 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4

DWDM modules
LRT11G1TU 50 GHz wide tunable STM-64 DWDM X11MDTNC 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 5

XFP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Appendix A: An OTN overview
Overview
Purpose
This appendix contains a brief introduction to the Optical Transport Network (OTN) and
the Optical Transport Hierarchy (OTH). It covers the main functionalities as they are
currently standardized. Therefore, this appendix is not directly related to the
implementation in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS).
Contents
Introduction A-2
OTN layers A-4
The ODUflex concept A-10
OTN frame and information structures A-12
OTN multiplexing and mapping A-21
OTN tandem connection monitoring A-25
OTN maintenance signals A-27
OTN protection A-28
Error correction in OTN A-32
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Alcatel-Lucent – Internal A-1
Issue 1 July 2011
An OTN overview Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction
Definition
According to the ITU-T Recommendation G.709, an Optical Transport Network (OTN) is
composed of a set of optical network elements connected by optical fiber links. The
network provides functionality of transport, multiplexing, routing, management,
supervision, and survivability of optical channels carrying client signals.
This architecture can be seen as a combination of the advantages of SDH/SONET
technology with the flexibility of DWDM. Using OTN, the OAM&P functionality of
SDH/SONET is applied to DWDM optical networks.
Compared to SDH/SONET, OTN has the following advantages:
• Stronger error correction mechanisms
• More levels of tandem connection monitoring
• Transparent transport of client signals
• Switching scalability
References
For more detailed information on OTN and the obligatory standards, see:
• ITU-T Recommendation G.709 (2009), “Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network
(OTN)”, Amendment 3
• ITU-T Recommendation G.652 (2003), “Characteristics of a single-mode optical fibre
cable”
• ITU-T Recommendation G.653 (2003), “Characteristics of a dispersion-shifted
single-mode optical fibre cable”
• ITU-T Recommendation G.655 (2003), “Characteristics of a non-zero
dispersion-shifted single-mode optical fibre cable”
• ITU-T Recommendation G.693 (2001), “Optical interfaces for intra-office systems”
• ITU-T Recommendation G.707/Y.1322 (2003), “Network node interface for the
synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)”
• ITU-T Recommendation G.805 (2000), “Generic functional architecture of transport
networks”
• ITU-T Recommendation G.806 (2000), “Characteristics of transport equipment –
Description methodology and generic functionality”
• ITU-T Recommendation G.872 (2001), “Architecture of optical transport networks”
• ITU-T Recommendation G.873.1 (2003), “Optical Transport Network: Linear
protection.”
• ITU-T Recommendation G.959.1 (2003), “Optical transport network physical layer
interfaces”
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Internal 1830 PSS
Issue 1 July 2011
An OTN overview Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• ITU-T Recommendation G.984.1 (2009), “Gigabit-capable passive optical networks
(GPON): Reach extension”
• ITU-T Recommendation G.7041/Y.1303 (2003), “Generic framing procedure (GFP)”
• ITU-T Recommendation I.432.1 (1999), “B-ISDN user-network interface – Physical
layer specification: General characteristics”
• ITU-T Recommendation M.1400 (2001), “Designations for interconnections among
operators' networks”
• ITU-T Recommendation M.3100 (1995), “Generic network information model −
Amendment 3: Definition of the management interface for a generic alarm reporting
control (ARC) feature”
• ITU-T Recommendation O.150 (1996), “General requirements for instrumentation for
performance measurements on digital transmission equipment”
• ITU-T Recommendation G.7042/Y.1305 (2001), “Link capacity adjustment scheme
(LCAS) for virtual concatenated signals”
• ITU-T Recommendation G.801.11/Y.1307 (2009), “Ethernet Private Line Service”
• IEEE Standard 802.3 (2005), “Information Technology – Local and Metropolitan
Area Networks – Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection
(CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications”
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
An OTN overview OTN layers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OTN layers
Introduction
According to the ITU-T Recommendation G.709, the following layers are defined in
OTN:
• OPUk: Optical channel payload unit k.
OPUk is the information structure used to adapt or encapsulate client information for
transport over an optical channel. It comprises client information together with any
overhead needed to perform rate adaptation between the client signal rate and the
OPUk payload rate. OPUk capacities for k = 1, 2, 3 are defined. Client signals could
be, for example, SDH, SONET, ATM, IP, or Ethernet signals.
• ODUk: Optical channel data unit k.
ODUk consists of the OPUk information payload plus the ODU-specific overhead,
rate k = 1, 2, 3.
– ODUkP: Optical channel data unit k path
This information structure is used for the end-to-end ODUk.
– ODUkT: Optical channel data unit k tandem connection monitoring.
This information structure supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) on the
ODUk level.
• OTUk[V]: Optical transport unit k.
OTUk is the information structure necessary to transport an ODUk over an optical
channel. An important function on this layer is the forward error correction (FEC).
Two variants are defined:
– OTUk: The completely standardized optical channel transport unit k is used on
inter-domain OTM interfaces and may be used on intra-domain OTM interfaces.
– OTUkV: The partly standardized optical channel transport unit k is used on
intra-domain OTM interfaces.
• OCh[r]: Optical channel, a single wavelength.
Two variants are defined:
– OCh: Optical channel with full functionality. It consists of the information
payload plus non-associated overhead for management purposes.
– OChr: Optical channel with reduced functionality. It consists only of the
information payload and does not support overhead for management purposes.
• OMSn: Optical multiplex section of order n
• OTSn: Optical transmission section of order n
• OPSn: Optical physical section of order n. Combines the transport functionality of the
OMS and the OTS layer without their supervisory information. Capacities for n = 0
and n = 16 are defined.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• OTM-n[r].m: Optical transport module of rate m with n optical channels. Possible
values for m are: 1: 2.5 Gb/s, 2: 10 Gb/s, 3: 40 Gb/s, 4: 100 Gb/s. This is the
information structure that is transported across an optical transport network node
interface (ONNI).
Two OTM variants are defined:
– OTM-n.m: OTM with full functionality consisting of up to n multiplexed optical
channels (colors) and an OTM signal to support the non-associated overhead.
– OTM-nr.m and OTM-0.m: OTM with reduced functionality without support of
non-associated overhead. OTM-0.m consists of a single optical channel without a
specific color assigned. The OTM-nr.m consists of up to n multiplexed optical
channels (colors).
The standardized OTN layers and data forming the optical transport hierarchy (OTH) are
shown in the following figure.
Figure A-1 Standardized OTN layers and data units
Clients
(for example, STM-N, ATM, IP, ...)
LO OPUk
LO ODUkP
LO ODUk
LO ODUkT
HO OPUk OTUkV OTUk OTUkV OTUk

OTUk
HO ODUkP OCh OChr
HO ODUk
HO ODUkT OMSn
OPSn OPSn
OTUkV OTUk OTUkV OTUk OTSn
OTUk
OCh OChr
OMSn
OPSn OPSn
OTSn
OTM-n.m OTM-0.m, OTM-nr.m OTM-0.mvm OTM-n.m OTM-0.m, OTM-nr.m OTM-0.mvm
OTM interface with OTM interface with Multi lane, OTM interface with OTM interface with Multi lane,
full functionality reduced functionality OTM interface with full functionality reduced functionality OTM interface with
reduced functionality reduced functionality
g-pipg-0230
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A simplified version without variants and without the layers that are not currently
implemented is shown in the following figure.
Figure A-2 OTN layers and data units (simplified view)
Clients
(for example, STM-N, ATM, IP, ...)
OPUk
ODUk
OTUk
OCh
OTM-n.m
g-pipg-0231
OPUk, ODUk, and OTUk are electrical signals, while the OCh is an optical signal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure A-3 OTH network example
ODU
OTU OTU OTU OTU
OCh OCh OCHr OCh
OMS OMS OPS OMS OMS
OTS OTS OTS OTS OTS OTS OTS
opt.
opt. subnetwork subnetwork opt. subnetwork
domain domain
OTN
Client access (ODU termination)
3R regenerator (OCh, OTU termination)
Optical cross connect/add drop/terminal multiplexer (OMS termination)
Optical line amplifier (OTS termination) g-pipg-0232
A small optical network is shown in Figure A-3, “OTH network example” (p. A-7). It is
formed of optical line amplifiers, optical cross-connects, optical add/drop multiplexers,
optical terminal multiplexers, and 3R regenerators (where “3R” stands for
“reamplification, reshaping, and retiming”).
Bit rates
The possible bit rates were chosen to simplify the transfer of SDH/SONET signals.
Table A-1 OPU types and their capacities
OPU type Nominal bit rate (kb/s) Capacity (kb/s) Payload bit rate tolerance
OPU0 1238954.310 238/239 × 1244160 ±20 ppm

OPU1 2488320.000 2488320 ±20 ppm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-1 OPU types and their capacities (continued)
OPU type Nominal bit rate (kb/s) Capacity (kb/s) Payload bit rate tolerance
OPU2 9995276.962 238/237 × 9953280 ±20 ppm
OPU3 40150519.322 238/236 × 39813120 ±20 ppm

OPU4 104355975.330 238/227 × 99532800 ±20 ppm
OPU2e 10356012.658 238/237 × 10312500 ±100 ppm

OPUflex for CBR client Client signal bit rate Client signal bit rate
signals tolerance with a maximum
of ±100 ppm
OPUflex for GFP-F 238/239 × ODUflex signal rate ±20 ppm

mapped client signals
OPU1-Xv X × 2488320.000 X × 2488320 ±20 ppm
OPU2-Xv X × 9995276.962 X × 238/237 × 9953280 ±20 ppm

OPU3-Xv X × 40150519.322 X × 238/236 × 39813120 ±20 ppm
Table A-2 ODU types and their capacities
ODU type Nominal bit rate (kb/s) Capacity (kb/s) Bit rate tolerance
ODU0 1244160 1244160 ±20 ppm

ODU1 2498775.126 239/238 × 2488320 ±20 ppm
ODU2 10037273.924 239/237 × 9953280 ±20 ppm
ODU3 40319218.983 239/236 × 39813120 ±20 ppm
ODU4 104794445.815 239/227 × 99532800 ±20 ppm
ODU2e 10399525.316 239/237 × 10312500 ±100 ppm

ODUflex for CBR client 239/233 × client signal bit Client signal bit rate
signals rate tolerance, with a
maximum of ±100 ppm
ODUflex for GFP-F Configured bit rate ±20 ppm

mapped client signals
Table A-3 ODUflex (GFP) transporting higher-order ODU nominal bit rates
Originating ODUflex (GFP) nominal bit rate Default and Bit rate
server type maximum Cm tolerance
HO ODU2 476/3824 × n × Cm/15232 × ODU2 bit rate 15230 ±20 ppm

HO ODU3 119/3824 × n × Cm/15232 × ODU3 bit rate 15230 ±20 ppm
15165
HO ODU4 47.5/3824 × n × Cm/15200 × ODU4 bit rate 15198 ±20 ppm
14649
14587
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The bit-rate tolerance is ±20 ppm for all ODUflex types.
Table A-4 ODUflex bit rates
Minimum (kb/s) Nominal (kb/s) Maximum (kb/s)
ODUflex with ODU2 base n × Cm × 82024 n × Cm × 82025 n × Cm × 82027

clock
clock

clock
Table A-5 OTU types and their capacities
OTU type Nominal bit rate (kb/s) Capacity (kb/s)
OTU1 2666057.143 255/238 × 2488320

OTU2 10709225.316 255/237 × 9953280
OTU3 43018413.559 255/236 × 39813120
OTU4 111809973.568 255/227 × 99532800
The bit-rate tolerance is ±20 ppm for all OTU types.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
An OTN overview The ODUflex concept
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The ODUflex concept

Overview
The ODUflex concept has been introduced to enhance the flexibility in mapping data
streams to OTN containers.
Two flavors of ODUflex can be distinguished:
• Circuit ODUflex
• Packet ODUflex
The ODUflex concept is similar to the virtual concatenation approach. It avoids the
differential delay problem by constraining the entire ODUflex to be carried over the same
higher-order ODUk. ODUflex also provides one manageable transport entity per service.
Circuit ODUflex
The circuit ODUflex allows the transport of any possible client bit rate as a service in
circuit transport networks. Constant bit rate (CBR) clients use a bit-synchronous mapping
into ODUflex (239/238 × the client bit rate).
Figure A-4 Circuit ODUflex principle
Packet ODUflex
The packet ODUflex creates packet trunks of variable size containing GFP-F mapped
packet data for transporting packet flows using cross-connect switching of a lower-order
ODU. The packet ODUflex can be of any size, in a practical implementation it will be
chosen to be multiples of the lowest tributary slot size in the network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
An OTN overview The ODUflex concept
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure A-5 Packet ODUflex principle
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
An OTN overview OTN frame and information structures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OTN frame and information structures

Overhead assignment
The basic location of overhead in the optical channel transport unit, optical channel data
unit, and optical payload unit, respectively, is shown in the following figure.
Figure A-6 OTUk, ODUk, and OPUk overhead
1 7 8 14 15 16
1 Frame alignment area OTU-specific overhead area
2
OPU-
specific
overhead
3 ODU-specific overhead area
area
g-pipg-0234
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Information structure
The principal information relationships in the OTN are shown in the following figure.
Figure A-7 OTN information structure
Client
OPUk
OPUk OH
OPUk payload
ODUk ODUk
OPUk
(path) PMOH
ODUk
ODUk TC L1
TCMOH
ODUk ODUk 1 to 6 levels
(TCM) TCMOH of ODUk TCM
ODUk
ODUk TC Lm
TCMOH
OTUk[V] OTUk[V] OTUk[V]

(section) OH FEC
OCh
OCH OH
OCh payload
OCCo
OCCo
OCCo
OCCo
OCCo
OCG-n.m OCCp OCCp OCCp OCCp OCCp
OMU-n.m
OTM COMMs
OMSn OH OMSn payload
OTM-n.m OTSn OH OTSn payload
OOS g-pipg-0236
The OPUk frame

The optical channel payload unit (OPU) transports the client signals. According to this
purpose, the OPUk overhead provides information about the mapping and concatenation
of the client signals and on the type of signal transported.
The OPUk overhead consists of:
• payload structure identifier (PSI) including the payload type (PT)
• overhead associated with concatenation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure A-8 OPUk frame structure
15 16 3824
mapping- and
2 concatenation-
specific OPUk payload = client
overhead (4 × 3808 bytes)
3
4 PSI
0 PT
mapping-
and
concatenation
-specific
255
g-pipg-0242
Legend:
OPU Optical channel payload unit

PSI Payload structure identifier
PT Payload type
One byte in the OPUk overhead is allocated to transport a 256-byte payload structure
identifier (PSI) signal. The PSI signal is aligned with the ODUk multiframe (that means,
PSI[0] is present at ODUk multiframe position 0000 0000, PSI[1] at position 0000 0001,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PSI[2] at position 0000 0010, and so on). PSI[0] contains a one-byte payload type (PT).
PSI[1] to PSI[255] are mapping and concatenation specific. The use of these bytes
depends on the specific client signal mapping and the use of concatenation.
Table A-6 Payload type
Hex. value Interpretation
01 Experimental mapping
02 Asynchronous CBR mapping

03 Bit synchronous CBR mapping
04 ATM mapping
05 GFP mapping
06 Virtual concatenated signal

07 1000BASE-X into ODU0 mapping
08 FC-1200 into ODU2e mapping
09 GFP mapping into extended OPU2 payload
0A STM-1 mapping into ODU0
0B STM-4 mapping into ODU0
0C FC-100 mapping into ODU0
0D FC-200 mapping into ODU0

0E FC-400 mapping into ODU0
0F FC-800 mapping into ODU0

10 Bit stream with octet timing mapping
11 Bit stream without octet timing mapping
12…1F Reserved for future international standardization
20 ODU multiplexing structure supporting ODTUjk only (AMP only)
21 ODU multiplexing structure supporting ODTUk.ts or ODTUk.ts and
ODTUjk
22…54 Reserved for future international standardization
55 Not available
56…65 Reserved for future international standardization
66 Not available
67…7F Reserved for future international standardization
80…8F Reserved codes for proprietary use

90…FC Reserved for future international standardization
FD NULL test signal mapping
FE PRBS test signal mapping
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-6 Payload type (continued)
Hex. value Interpretation
FF Not available
The ODUk frame

The ODUk frame is based on the OPUk and extends it with overhead for path monitoring
(PM), automatic protection switching (APS), and tandem connection monitoring (TCM)
purposes.
Figure A-9 ODUk frame structure
1 14 15 16 3824
1 reserved for FA OH and OTUk OH
2
OPUk payload
OPUk OH
(4 × 3808 bytes)
3 ODUk OH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 Frame alignment overhead OTUk overhead
PM& TCM
2 RES TCM6 TCM5 TCM4 FTFL
TCM ACT
OPUk OH
3 TCM3 TCM2 TCM1 PM EXP
4 GCC1 GCC2 APS/PCC RES

g-pipg-0241
Legend:
APS/PCC Automatic protection switching coordination channel
EXP Experimental
FA OH Frame alignment overhead

FEC Forward error correction
FTFL Fault type and fault location reporting channel

GCC General communication channel (clear channel)
ODUk OH Optical channel transport unit overhead
OPUk OH Optical channel payload unit overhead
OTUk OH Optical channel transport unit overhead

PCC Protection communication channel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PM Path monitoring
RES Reserved for future standardization

SM Section monitoring, includes TTI
TCM1…6 Tandem connection monitoring
ODUk path monitoring (PM) overhead

The PM field contains the following subfields:
• trail trace identifier (TTI)
• bit interleaved parity (BIP-8)
• backward defect indication (BDI)
• backward error indication (BEI)
• status bits indicating the presence of a maintenance signal (STAT)
The PM&TCM field contains the following PM subfield:
• path delay measurement (DMp), a signal to convey the start of the delay measurement
test
ODUk tandem connection monitoring (TCM) overhead
Six fields for monitoring the ODUk connection, for example through the public transport
network (see “OTN tandem connection monitoring” (p. A-25)).
The PM&TCM field contains the following PM subfield:
• tandem connection delay measurement (DMti, i = 1 to 6), a signal to convey the start
of the delay measurement test
Delay measurement for ODUk path and TCM
Specific overhead bytes are defined in the ODUk overhead for a protocol that allows the
measurement of the round-trip delay on demand. The delay measurement signal is
inserted on the originating side and sent to the far-end NE. This far-end NE loops back
the signal toward the originating side. The originating side can now measure the number
of frame periods between sending and receiving the signal. The delay measurement is
specified for the ODUk path overhead (DMp) and for the ODUk TCM overhead (DMti).
ODUk general communication channels (GCC1, GCC2)
Two fields of two bytes are allocated in the ODUk overhead to support two general
communications channels between any two network elements with access to the ODUk
frame structure (that means, at 3R regeneration points). These are clear channels.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ODUk automatic protection switching and protection communication channel
(APS/PCC)
A four-byte ODUk-APS/PCC signal. Up to eight levels of nested APS/PCC signals may
be present in this field. The APS/PCC bytes in a given frame are assigned to a dedicated
connection monitoring level.
ODUk fault type and fault location reporting communication channel (FTFL)
One byte is allocated in the ODUk overhead to transport a 256-byte fault type and fault
location (FTFL) message. It consists of a forward and a backward field.
The OTUk frame

The OTUk[V] conditions the ODUk for transport over an optical channel network
connection. While OTUk is completely standardized, OTUkV (to be used only on
intra-domain OTM interfaces) is only partly standardized.
The OTUk[V] is based on the ODUk frame structure and extends it with a forward error
correction (FEC) as shown in Figure A-10, “OTUk frame structure ” (p. A-18). 256
columns are added to the ODUk frame for the FEC and the reserved overhead bytes in
row 1, columns 8 to 14 of the ODUk overhead are used for OTUk specific overhead,
resulting in an octet-based block frame structure with four rows and 4080 columns. The
MSB in each octet is bit 1, the LSB is bit 8.
Figure A-10 OTUk frame structure
1 14 15 3824 3825 4080
1 FA OH OTUk OH
OTUk FEC
2
Reed Solomon
(4 × 256 bytes)
or all 0
3 ODU
if FEC is not used
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 FAS MFAS SM GCC0 RES

g-pipg-0240
Legend:
FAS Frame alignment signal

GCC General communication channel (clear channel)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MFAS Multiframe alignment signal; some overhead signal span multiple

OTUk/ODUk frames, for example, TTI and PSI are overhead signals;
range: 0…t255.
ODU Optical channel data unit
PSI Payload structure identifier

RES Reserved for future standardization
TTI Trail trace identifier
The OCh structure

An optical channel (OCh) transports a digital client signal between reamplification,
reshaping, and retiming (3R) regeneration points. The OCh can be understood as the
result of converting the electrical OTU-k signal into an optical signal. The specifications
for the OCh can be found in ITU-T Recommendation G.872. This recommendation
contains also the definitions for the OTN layer networks including network management
and supervision.
ITU-T defines two OChs:
• OCh: optical channel with full functionality
• OCHr: optical channel with reduced functionality
The OCh payload can be transported by optical transport module (OTMn) connections.
The overhead related to the OCh with full functionality is not part of the OCh frame
itself. Instead it is transported over a different carrier as optical supervisory channel
(OSC).
Figure A-11 OCh structure
1 14 15 16 17 3824 3825 4080
1 FA OH OTUk OH
OCh-Section
2
ODUk OH OPUk OH OPUk payload FEC OCh-TC
3
OCh-Path
4
OCh payload OCh overhead

g-pipg-0246
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Legend:

OCh Optical channel
ODUk OH Optical channel data unit overhead
OPUk OH Optical channel payload unit overhead
TC Tandem connection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
An OTN overview OTN multiplexing and mapping
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OTN multiplexing and mapping

Multiplexing
The principle OTN multiplex structure as defined in the standard is shown in the
following simplified figure.
Figure A-12 OTN multiplex structure
ODUTUG1
1000BASE-X ODU0 ×2 ×1 ODU1
PT=20
CBR2G5
ODU1 ×1 OTU1
STM-16/OC-48
ODUTUG2
×4 ×1
CBRx PT=20
ODUflex
GFP data ODU2
×8 ODUTUG2
×4 ×1
×n PT=21
CBR10G
STM-64/OC-192 ODU2 ×1 OTU2
10GBASE-R AMCC
×16 ODUTUG3
×1
×4 PT=20
10GBASE-R ODU3
ODU2e ×32
FC1200
×16
ODUTUG3
×n ×1
×4 PT=21
×3
CBR40G
STM-256/OC-768 ODU3 ×1 OTU3
40GBASE-R
×80
×40
×n ODUTUG4
×10
×1 ODU3
PT=21
×10
×2
100GBASE-R ODU4 OTU4
ODU clients LO ODU HO ODU

: AMP, BMP, or GFP-F g-pipg-0238
: GMP
Legend:
AMCC Applied Micro Circuits Corporation

AMP Asynchronous mapping procedure
BMP Bit-synchronous mapping procedure
CBR2G5 2.5 Gb/s constant bit rate signal

CBR10G 10 Gb/s constant bit rate signal
CBR40G 40 Gb/s constant bit rate signal

CBRx Constant bit rate signal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FC1200 Fiber channel 1200 (10 Gb/s)
GFP-F Generic framing procedure

GMP Generic mapping procedure
HO ODU Higher-order optical channel data unit

LO ODU Lower-order optical channel data unit
ODUk Optical channel data unit
ODUTUGk Optical channel data tributary unit group
PT Payload type
OTUk Optical channel transport unit
Mappings for the transport of 10 GbE signals which are not yet standardized but covered
in Supplement 43 to ITU-T Recommendation Series G, are shown in the following
simplified figure.
Figure A-13 OTN multiplex structure, additions from supplement 43
ODU0
ODU1
ODUflex
ODU2
×1 OTU2e
×32
ODU2e ×16
×n
×4 ODU3e2
×4
×1
ODU3 OTU3e2
LO ODU HO ODU OTU
: AMP, BMP, or GFP-F

: GMP g-pipg-0239
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Legend:
AMP Asynchronous mapping procedure
BMP Bit-synchronous mapping procedure

GFP-F Generic framing procedure
GMP Generic mapping procedure

HO ODU Higher-order optical channel data unit
LO ODU Lower-order optical channel data unit

ODUk Optical channel data unit
OTUk Optical channel transport unit
Mapping of client signals

According to ITU-T Recommendation G.702, the following payload mappings are
supported:
1. Constant bit rate (CBR) mappings. This mapping type is used, for example, for
transparent STM-n or OC-n clients. The standard defines the mapping for CBR2G5,
CBR10G, and CBR40G signals – this relates to STM-16/OC-48, STM-64/OC-192,
and STM-256/OC-768, respectively.
2. Generic frame procedure (GFP) mappings. This mapping type is used for Ethernet
clients (GFP-frame [GFP-F] or GFP-transparent [GFP-T]). For this mapping, the byte
structure of every GFP frame has to be aligned with the byte structure of the OPUk
payload. Since the GFP frames are of variable length , a frame may cross the OPUk
frame boundary. GFP frames arrive as a continuous bit stream with a capacity that is
identical to the OPUk payload area, due to the insertion of idle frames at the GFP
encapsulation stage.
3. Generic mapping procedure (GMP) mappings.
4. AMCC GE10 mapping. This is a semi-transparent (related to payload and preamble)
mapping type for 10-GbE signals
5. Higher-order / lower-order ODU mapping, including 2.5 Gb/s and 1.25 Gb/s tributary
mapping
6. Null-client mapping. This mapping is used for test purposes. It results in an OPUk
payload with all zeros.
7. PRBS test signal. A 2147483647-bit pseudo-random test sequence (231–1) (PRBS) can
be mapped into the OPUk payload- Here, groups o eight successive bits are mapped
into eight data bits of the ODU3 payload.
The mapping of these signals into the OPU-k is controlled by designated bytes of the
OPUk overhead. The OPUk payload consists of 4 × 3808 bytes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Generic mapping procedure (GMP)
The generic mapping procedure (GMP) is an asynchronous generic mapping method for
the mapping of constant bit rate (CBR) client signals into lower-order OPUk and the
mapping of lower-order ODUj signals into a higher-order OPUk (via the ODTUk.ts).
GMP offers a single mechanism used to accommodate the nominal bit-rate difference
between the client and server and the clock variations that may occur between client and
server. That means that there is no distinction between “fixed” and “variable” stuff
locations.
In the mapping process, the server frame (or multi frame) is divided into a certain number
of GMP “words”, where word may contain either data or stuff bits. Words containing data
are distributed as evenly as possible (quantized to word size) across the server frame
using a distribution algorithm.
The correct operation depends only on the mapper and demapper knowing the number of
data words which are filled into each frame (or multi frame). This information is carried
in the OPU overhead.
Larger GMP word sizes are used for higher bit rate clients to avoid the need for large
barrel shifters in the implementation. If it is necessary to meet the timing requirements of
the client, additional timing information may be transmitted from the mapper to the
demapper. This mechanism enables the demapper to “know” how many client bytes are to
be emitted during each server frame period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
An OTN overview OTN tandem connection monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OTN tandem connection monitoring

Overview
Tandem connection monitoring offers a way to support network operators in the “carrier's
carrier” situation. In a complex optical network, like shown in Figure A-14, “OTN
tandem connection monitoring (example)” (p. A-25), network operator “A” wants
network operator “B” to carry a signal and also needs a way to monitor it. As a result, the
signal is monitored twice, by “A” and by “B” – this lead to the term “tandem connection
monitoring”. While SDH/SONET offer a single tandem connection monitoring field,
OTN offers six fields.
Operators sharing network resources have to agree on how to use the available TCM
resources.
Figure A-14 OTN tandem connection monitoring (example)
Network Network Network

User 1 operator A/1 operator B operator A/2 User 2
A1 B1 D3 D4 D5 E1 E2 D6 C2 A2
C1 D1 D2 working B2
protection
protection supervision (TCM4)
NNI-NNI connection monitoring (TCM3)
UNI-UNI connection monitoring (TCM2)
verify QoS connection monitoring (TCM1)
end-to-end path connection monitoring (PM)
TCM6 TCM6 TCM6

TCM5 TCM5 TCM5
TCM4 TCM4 TCM4
TCM3 TCM3 TCM3
TCM2 TCM2 TCM2
TCM1 TCM1 TCM1 g-pipg-0244
Legend:
NNI Network node interface
PM Path monitoring
QoS Quality of service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
An OTN overview OTN tandem connection monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UNI User-to-network interface
TCM Tandem connection monitoring
In Figure A-14, “OTN tandem connection monitoring (example)” (p. A-25), the colored
TCM fields symbolize used fields. The white fields are not used. Each connection
endpoint inserts or extracts its TCM overhead from one of the six TCM fields. The
specific field is provisioned by the network operator, network management system, or
switching control plane.
The number of monitored connections along an ODUk trail may vary between zero and
six. Monitored connections can be nested, overlapping, or cascaded. In the example,
A1↔A2, B1↔B2, C1↔C2, and D1↔D2 are nested. D1↔D2, D3↔D4, and D5↔D6 are
cascaded.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
An OTN overview OTN maintenance signals
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OTN maintenance signals

Overview
A number of maintenance signals is defined in ITU-T Recommendation G.709. This
section summarizes the maintenance signals that are of practical use in Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS.
OTUk alarm indication signal (OTUk-AIS)

This a generic AIS signal (PN-11 signal) sent downstream as an indication that an
upstream defect has been detected. Since the OTUk capacity (130560 bits) is not an
integer multiple of the PN-11 sequence length (2047 bits), the PN-11 sequence may cross
an OTUk frame boundary. As specified in ITU-T Recommendation G.709, Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS only detects OTUk-AIS but does not generate it.
ODUk alarm indication signal (ODUk-AIS)

As specified in ITU-T Recommendation G.709, ODUk-AIS is all “1”s in the entire ODUk
signal, excluding the frame alignment overhead (FA OH), the OTUk overhead (OTUk
OH), and the ODUk fault type and fault location reporting channel (ODUk-FTFL).
The presence of ODUk-AIS is detected by monitoring the ODUk STAT bits in the path
monitoring (PM) and tandem connection monitoring (TCMi) overhead fields.
ODUk open connection indication (ODUk-OCI)

As specified in ITU-T Recommendation G.709, ODUk-OCI is a repeating “01100110”
pattern in the entire ODUk signal, excluding the frame alignment overhead (FA OH) and
the OTUk overhead (OTUk OH).
The presence of ODUk-OCI is detected by monitoring the ODUk STAT bits in the path
ODUk locked (ODUk-LCK)

As specified in ITU-T Recommendation G.709, ODUk-LCK is a repeating “01010101”
pattern in the entire ODUk signal, excluding the frame alignment overhead (FA OH) and
the OTUk overhead (OTUk OH).
The presence of ODUk-LCK is detected by monitoring the ODUk STAT bits in the path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
An OTN overview OTN protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OTN protection
Overview
In ITU-T Recommendation G.873, the following linear protection schemes at the ODUk
level are defined:
• ODUk subnetwork connection protection with inherent monitoring (1+1 SNC/I, 1:n
SNC/I)
• ODUk subnetwork connection protection with non-intrusive monitoring (1+1 SNC/N)
• ODUk subnetwork connection protection with sublayer monitoring (1+1 SNC/S, 1:n
SNC/S)
The OTN ring protection is not yet internationally standardized and subject to further
development in the future.
Protection architectures
The following architectures are defined in the standards:
• 1+1: A single signal is protected by a single dedicated protection resource. Bridge and
selector are permanent.
• 1:n: A number of signals is protected by a single protection resource. The protection
resource can be used for low priority traffic (so-called extra traffic). The bridge will
not be established before the protection switch is necessary.
If n = 1, a 1:1 protection scheme will be constructed. Unlike with a 1+1 protection,
low priority traffic can be transported on the protection resource.
For bidirectional connections, the protection switching may be unidirectional or
bidirectional. Here, “unidirectional” means that the selection of working and protection
resource is performed independently for both traffic directions. In case of bidirectional
protection switching, the involved end points try to switch the traffic to use the same
resource for both directions.
If the protection scheme is configured as “revertive”, the traffic is restored to the working
entity as soon as the reason for the switch to protection has cleared. If the switch has been
caused by a defect, the switch back takes place after a configurable wait-to-restore time.
In protection schemes configured as “non-revertive”, the traffic continues to use the
protection resource even if the switch reason has cleared.
Monitoring methods and SNC subclasses

Protection switching occurs based on the detection of certain defects on the signals
(working and protection) within the protected domain.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An entity within the protected domain can have one of the following conditions:
• OK: no defect
• Signal degrade (SD): degraded
• Signal fail (SF): failed
According to ITU-T Recommendation G.873, possible monitoring methods are:
• SNC/I – Inherently monitored SNC
Defects detected at the ODUk link connection trigger the protection switching, no
defect detection is performed at the ODUk layer itself
• SNC/N – non-intrusive end-to-end trail monitored SNC
Protection switching is triggered by a non-intrusive monitoring of the ODUkP layer
or ODUkT sublayers at the tail end of the protected domain. The defects used for
protection switching are usually not limited to the protected domain.
• SNC/S – sublayer monitored SNC
Protection switching is triggered by defects detected at the ODUkT sublayer trail
(TCM). An ODUkT sublayer trail is established for each working and protection
entity. Protection switching is therefore triggered only on defects of the protected
domain.
APS channel and protocol

Most of the protection schemes defined require communications between both end points
involved. Only the 1+1 unidirectional SNC could work without such an information
exchange.
The automatic protection switching coordination channel (APS/PCC) is located in the
first three bytes of the APS/PCC field of the ODUk overhead, the fourth field is reserved
(see Figure A-15, “APS channel format” (p. A-30) and Table A-7, “Field values in the
APS channel” (p. A-30)). Eight independent APS channels are available to support
protection at the ODUkP, the six ODUkT (TCM) levels, and one level of ODUk SNC/I
protection
The APS/PCC information is transported on the protection entity. In ITU-T
Recommendation G.873, the protocols and processes to operate the protection schemes
are defined.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure A-15 APS channel format
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Protection type
Request / state Requested signal Bridged signal Reserved
A B D R
g-pipg-0250
Table A-7 Field values in the APS channel
Field Value Description
Request / state 1111 Lockout of protection (LO)

1110 Forced switch (FS)
1100 Signal fail (SF)
1010 Signal degrade (SD)
1000 Manual switch (MS)
0110 Wait-to-restore (WTR)

0100 Exercise (EXER)
0010 Reverse request (RR)
0001 Do not revert (DNR)
0000 No request (NR)
Others Reserved for future international standardization
Protection type A 0 No APS channel
1 APS channel
B 0 1+1 (permanent bridge)
1 1:n (no permanent bridge)
D 0 Unidirectional switching
1 Bidirectional switching
R 0 Non-revertive operation
1 Revertive operation
Requested signal 0 Null signal

1…254 Normal traffic signal 1…254
255 Extra traffic signal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-7 Field values in the APS channel (continued)
Field Value Description
Bridged signal 0 Null signal
1…254 Normal traffic signal 1…254

255 Extra traffic signal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
An OTN overview Error correction in OTN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Error correction in OTN

Overview
A strong error detection and correction mechanism is part of the OTN standardization to
achieve the high bit rates. In OTN, a forward error correcting (FEC) code is placed at the
trailing end of the payload frames.
The addition of FEC results in less overall bit errors at the receiver so that even longer
fiber spans or longer spans with higher bit rates meet the performance objectives.
FEC in the OTN hierarchy

The FEC information is added to the ODUk frame structure, resulting in OTUk frames as
shown in Figure A-10, “OTUk frame structure ” (p. A-18).
In applications where a number of SDH/SONET frames are multiplexed, the FEC
encoding function is performed at each SDH/SONET frame before the interleaving. At
the receiver, the error detection/correction has to be performed after de-interleaving the
frames.
In OTN, Reed-Solomon error detection/correction codes are used. These codes are
denoted as RS(n, k), where k is the number of output symbols (usually bytes) and n the
number of input symbols. Using Reed-Solomon codes it possible to detect a number of bit
errors and to correct a smaller number of them.
According to ITU-T Recommendation G.709, an RS(255, 239) code with a symbol size of
8 is used for FEC in OTN. Here, 239 input bytes are encoded in 255 output bytes. This
code enables the detection of 2t = (n – k) = 16 errors in a codeword and the correction of
t = (n – k)/2 = 8 of them.
Figure A-16 Basic FEC block diagram
data Reed-Solomon communication Reed-Solomon data

source encoder channel decoder sink
check
data block data block data block
symbols
k = 239 k = 239 2t = 16 k = 239
n = 255
g-pipg-0248
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Numerics
10XANY10G
10 × 10G ANY Port Unit
10XETH10G
10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit
10XOTH10G
10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit
16FS
16 columns with Fixed Stuff
24XANYMR
24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit
24XETH1G
24 × 1 GbE / SFPClient Port Card
2XANY40G
2 × 40G ANY Port Unit
3R
Reamplification, Reshaping and Retiming
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A ABN
Abnormal (condition)
ABS (Absent)
Used to indicate that a given circuit pack is not installed.
Accepted trace identifier

A received trace identifier is considered “accepted” if the same trace identifier value has been
received at least three times in sequence.
ACO (Alarm Cut-Off)

A button on the user panel used to clear the network element alarm indicators (LEDs on the active
FLC, rack top lamp interface, the remote alarms interface).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Alcatel-Lucent – Internal GL-1
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ACT (Active)
Used to indicate that a circuit pack or module is in-service and currently providing service
functions.
ACT
Activation (in the TCM ACT byte)
Adaptive-rate tributary operation of a port (Pipe mode)

Mode of operation of a port in which tributaries are not explicitly provisioned for the expected
signal rates. The signal rates are automatically identified.
AEL
Accessible Emission Limits
Agent
Performs operations on managed objects and issues events on behalf of these managed objects.
All SDH managed objects will support at least an agent. Control of distant agents is possible via
local “Managers”.
AGNE
Alarm Gateway Network Element
AI
Adapted Information
AID (Access Identifier)

A technical specification for explicitly naming entities (both physical and logical) of an NE using
a grammar comprised of ASCII text, keywords, and grammar rules.
AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)

A code transmitted downstream in a digital network that indicates that an upstream failure has
been detected and alarmed if the upstream alarm has not been suppressed.
AITS
Acknowledged Information Transfer Service: Confirmed mode of operation of the LAPD
protocol.
Alarm
An alarm is a human observable alerting indication, for example visually, to a condition that may
have immediate or potential negative impact on the state of the monitoring network element.
Alarm Correlation
The search for a directly-reported alarm that can account for a given symptomatic condition.
Alarm Severity
An attribute defining the priority of the alarm message. The way alarms are processed depends on
the severity.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Internal 1830 PSS
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Suppression
Selective removal of alarm messages from being forwarded to the GUI or to network management
layer OSs.
Alarm Throttling
A feature that automatically or manually suppresses autonomous messages that are not priority
alarms.
Aligning
Indicating the head of a virtual container by means of a pointer, for example, creating an
Administrative Unit (AU) or a Tributary Unit (TU).
AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)

A line code that employs a ternary signal to convert binary digits, in which successive binary ones
are represented by signal elements that are normally of alternative positive and negative polarity
but equal in amplitude and in which binary zeros are represented by signal elements that have
zero amplitude.
AMP
Asynchronous Mapping Procedure
Anomaly
A difference between the actual and desired operation of a function.
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
APD
Avalanche Photo Diode
API
Access point identifier
APS (Automatic Protection Switch)

A protection switch that occurs automatically in response to an automatically detected fault
condition.
ASN.1
Abstract Syntax Notation 1
ASON
Automatically switched optical network
Assembly
Gathering together of payload data with overhead and pointer information (an indication of the
direction of the signal).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Association
A logical connection between manager and agent through which management information can be
exchanged.
ASTN
Automatic Switched-Transport Network
ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode)

A high-speed transmission technology characterized by high bandwidth and low delay. It utilizes a
packet switching and multiplexing technique which allocates bandwidth on demand.
Attribute
Alarm indication level: critical, major, minor, or no alarm.
AUTO (Automatic)
One possible state of a port or slot. When a port is in the AUTO state and a good signal is
detected, the port automatically enters the IS (in-service) state. When a slot is in the AUTO state
and a circuit pack is detected, the slot automatically enters the EQ (equipped) state.
Autolock
Action taken by the system in the event of circuit pack failure/trouble. System switches to
protection and prevents a return to the working circuit pack even if the trouble clears. Multiple
protection switches on a circuit pack during a short period of time cause the system to autolock
the pack.
Autonomous Message
A message transmitted from the controlled Network Element to a management system which was
not a response to a management system originated command.
AVAIL
Available
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B Bandwidth
The difference in Hz between the highest and lowest frequencies in a transmission channel. The
data rate that can be carried by a given communications circuit.
Baud Rate
Transmission rate of data (bits per second) on a network link.
BDI
Backward Defect Indication
BDI-O
Backward Defect Indication Overhead
BDI-P
Backward Defect Indication Payload
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BEI
Backward Error Indication
BER (Bit Error Rate )

The ratio of error bits received to the total number of bits transmitted.
BI
Backward Indication
BIAE
Backward Incoming Alignment Error
Bidirectional Line
A transmission path consisting of two fibers that handle traffic in both the transmit and receive
directions.
Bidirectional Ring
A ring in which both directions of traffic between any two nodes travel through the same network
elements (although in opposite directions).
Bidirectional Switch
Protection switching performed in both the transmit and receive directions.
BIP-N (Bit Interleaved Parity-N)

A method of error monitoring over a specified number of bits (BIP-3 or BIP-8).
Bit Error Rate Threshold

The point at which an alarm is issued for bit errors.
BITS
Building Integrated Timing Supply
BMP
Bit-synchronous Mapping Procedure
Bridge a cross-connection
The setting up of a cross-connection leg with the same input tributary as that of an existing
cross-connection leg. Thus, forming a 1:2 bridge from an input tributary to two output tributaries.
Broadband Communications
Voice, data, and/or video communications at greater than 2 Mbit/s rates.
Broadband Service Transport

STM-1 concatenation transport over the 1675 LambdaUnite MSS for ATM applications.
BT3T8
Bus Termination Card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BTC3T8
Bus Termination Card CMISS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C C
Container
C-Bit-Parity Application
A DS3 format where 28 DS1s are directly multiplexed into a DS3, sometimes also called “M13”.
See also “M23 Application” (p. GL-22).
CAUI
Chip to 100Gb/s Attachment Unit Interface
CB
Control Block
CBR
Constant Bit Rate
CC (Clear Channel)
A digital circuit where no framing or control bits are required, thus making the full bandwidth
available for communications.
CC (Cross-connection)
Path-level connections between input and output tributaries or specific ports within a single NE.
Cross-connections are made in a consistent way even though there are various types of ports and
various types of port protection. Cross-connections are re-configurable interconnections between
tributaries of transmission interfaces.
Cell Relay
Fixed-length cells. For example, ATM with 53 octets.
Channel
A sub-unit of transmission capacity within a defined higher level of transmission capacity.
CI
Characteristic Information
Circuit
A set of transmission channels through one or more network elements that provides transmission
of signals between two points, to support a single communications path.
CL
Clear
CLEI ™ code
COMMON LANGUAGE ® equipment code
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Client
Computer in a computer network that generally offers a user interface to a server.
CLLI
Common Language Location Identifier
Closed Ring Network

A network formed of a ring-shaped configuration of network elements. Each network element
connects to two others, one on each side.
CM (Configuration Management)
Subsystem that configures the network and processes messages from the network.
Cm
number of m-bit client data entities
CM
Connection Monitoring
CMEP
Connection Monitoring End Point
CMGPON_D
Continuous Mode GPON Downstream
CMGPON_U2
Continuous Mode GPON Upstream 2
CMI
Coded Mark Inversion
CMOH
Connection Monitoring Overhead
Cn
number of n-bit client data entities
CnD
difference between Cn and (m/n x Cm)
CO (Central Office)
A building where common carriers terminate customer circuits.
Co-Resident
A hardware configuration where two applications can be active at the same time independently on
the same hardware and software platform without interfering with each others functioning.
Collocated
System elements that are located in the same location.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Command Group
An administrator-defined group that defines commands to which a user has access.
Concatenation
A procedure whereby multiple virtual containers are associated one with each other resulting in a
combined capacity that can be used as a single container across which bit sequence integrity is
maintained.
Correlation
A process where related hard failure alarms are identified.
CP
This abbreviation has the following possible expansions:
1. Circuit Pack
2. Control Plane.
CPE
Customer Premises Equipment
CPR (Control Plane Routing)

IP routing performed by an NE for RSVP notify messages, and for management traffic. OSPF is
used as routing protocol. A CPR domain contains NEs and Network Operation Centers (NOCs).
CPR domains can be decoupled from IP routing in the operator's DCN, by setting up IP-in-IP
tunnels between NEs attached to the Out-of-band DCN, and NOCs.
CPRI
Common Public Radio Interface
CR (Critical (alarm))
Alarm that indicates a severe, service-affecting condition.
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check
Crosstalk
An unwanted signal introduced into one transmission line from another.
CRU
Clock Recovery Unit
CS
Client Specific
CSF
Client Signal Fail
CSMA/CD
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CTRL
Control word sent from source to sink
Current Value
The value currently assigned to a provisionable parameter.
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)

Cyclic redundancy checking is a widespread error detection method based on parity bit
calculations.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D DAPI
Destination access point identifier
DAPI
Destination Access Point Identifier
Data
A collection of system parameters and their associated values.
Database Administrator
A user who administers the database of the application.
Databearer
A databearer represents a physical link connection between two nodes in the transport plane.
DCE (Data Communications Equipment)

The equipment that provides signal conversion and coding between the data terminating
equipment (DTE) and the line. The DCE may be separate equipment or an integral part of the
DTE or of intermediate equipment. A DCE may perform other functions usually performed at the
network end of the line.
DCF
Data Communications Function; Dispersion Compensation Fiber
DCM (Dispersion Compensation Module)

A device used to compensate the dispersion, the pulse spreading properties of an optical fiber.
DCMs are necessary for very-long-haul applications and high bit rates.
DCN
Data Communications Network
Default
An operation or value that the system or application assumes, unless a user makes an explicit
choice.
Default Provisioning
The parameter values that are pre-programmed as shipped from the factory.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Defect
A limited interruption of the ability of an item to perform a required function. It may or may not
lead to maintenance action depending on the results of additional analysis.
Demultiplexing
A process applied to a multiplexed signal for recovering signals combined within it and for
restoring the distinct individual channels of these signals.
DEMUX (Demultiplexer)
A device that splits a combined signal into individual signals at the receiver end of transmission.
Deprovisioning
The inverse order of provisioning. To manually remove/delete a parameter that has (or parameters
that have) previously been provisioned.
Digital Link
A transmission span such as a point-to-point 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, VC12, VC3 or VC4
link between controlled network elements.
Digital Multiplexer
Equipment that combines by time-division multiplexing several digital signals into a single
composite digital signal.
Digital Section
A transmission span such as an STM-N signal. A digital section may contain multiple digital
channels.
Disassembly
Splitting up a signal into its constituents as payload data and overhead (an indication of the
direction of a signal).
Dispersion
Time-broadening of a transmitted light pulse.
Dispersion Shifted Optical Fiber

1330/1550 nm minimum dispersion wavelength.
Divergence
When there is unequal amplification of incoming wavelengths, the result is a power divergence
between wavelengths.
DMp
Delay Measurement of ODUk path
DMti
Delay Measurement of TCMi
DNI (Dual Node Ring Interworking)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A topology in which two rings are interconnected at two nodes on each ring and operate so that
inter-ring traffic is not lost in the event of a node or link failure at an interconnecting point.
DNU
Do Not Use
Doping
The addition of impurities to a substance in order to attain desired properties.
Downstream
At or towards the destination of the considered transmission stream, for example, looking in the
same direction of transmission.
DPR
Data Plane Routing
DRAM
Dynamic Random Access Memory
Drop and Continue

A circuit configuration that provides redundant signal appearances at the outputs of two network
elements in a ring. Can be used for Dual Node Ring Interworking (DNI) and for video distribution
applications.
DS1
Digital Signal - Level 1 (1.544 Mbit/s)
DS3
Digital Signal - Level 3 (44.736 Mbit/s)
DSNE (Directory Service Network Element)

A designated Network Element that is responsible for administering a database that maps
Network Elements names (node names) to addresses (node Id). There can be one DSNE per
(sub)network.
DTE (Data Terminating Equipment)

The equipment that originates data for transmission and accepts transmitted data.
DUS
Do not Use for Synchronization
DWDM (Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing)

Transmitting two or more signals of different wavelengths simultaneously over a single fiber.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E EBCN
Ethernet-based communication network
EBER (Excessive Bit Error Rate)

The calculated average bit error rate over a data stream.
ECC
Embedded Control Channel
EDC
Error Detection Code
EEPROM
Electrically Erasable and Programmable Read-Only Memory
EIA (Electronic Industries Association)

A trade association of the electronic industry that establishes electrical and functional standards.
EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility)

A measure of equipment tolerance to external electromagnetic fields.
EMI (Electromagnetic Interference)

High-energy, electrically induced magnetic fields that cause data corruption in cables passing
through the fields.
EMS
Element Management System
Entity
A specific piece of hardware (usually a circuit pack, slot, or module) that has been assigned a
name recognized by the system.
Entity Identifier
The name used by the system to refer to a circuit pack, memory device, or communications link.
EOS
End of Sequence
EQ (Equipped)
Status of a circuit pack or interface module that is in the system database and physically in the
frame, but not yet provisioned.
ES (Errored Seconds)
A performance monitoring parameter. ES “type A” is a second with exactly one error; ES “type
B” is a second with more than one and less than the number of errors in a severely errored second
for the given signal. ES by itself means the sum of the type A and type B ESs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge
ESP
Electrostatic Protection
Establish
A user-initiated command, at the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC, to create an entity and its
associated attributes in the absence of certain hardware.
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
Event
A significant change. Events in controlled Network Elements include signal failures, equipment
failures, signals exceeding thresholds, and protection switch activity. When an event occurs in a
controlled Network Element, the controlled Network Element will generate an alarm or status
message and send it to the management system.
Event Driven
A required characteristic of network element software system: NEs are reactive systems, primarily
viewed as systems that wait for and then handle events. Events are provided by the external
interface packages, the hardware resource packages, and also by the software itself.
EXP
Experimental
Externally Timed
An operating condition of a clock in which it is locked to an external reference and is using time
constants that are altered to quickly bring the local oscillator’s frequency into approximate
agreement with the synchronization reference frequency.
ExTI
Expected Trace Identifier
Extra traffic
Unprotected traffic that is carried over protection channels when their capacity is not used for the
protection of working traffic.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F FAN3T8
Fan Unit
FAS
Frame alignment signal
FAS
Frame Alignment Signal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault
Term used when a circuit pack has a hard (not temporary) fault and cannot perform its normal
function.
Fault Management
Collecting, processing, and forwarding of autonomous messages from network elements.
FC
Flag Continuation
FCC
FDA/CDRH
The Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health.
FDDI (Fiber Distributed Data Interface)

Fiber interface that connects computers and distributes data among them.
FDI
Forward Defect Indication
FDI-O
Forward Defect Indication Overhead
FDI-P
Forward Defect Indication Payload
FE (Far End )
Any other network element in a maintenance subnetwork other than the one the user is at or
working on. Also called remote.
FEBE (Far-End Block Error)

An indication returned to the transmitting node that an errored block has been detected at the
receiving node. A block is a specified grouping of bits.
FEC (Forward Error Correction)

An error correction technique in which redundant bits are added to the payload signal enabling the
receiving station to detect and correct bit errors that unavoidably occur when an optical line signal
is transmitted over longer distances over an optical fiber. FEC is used to increase the transmission
span length.
FEPROM (Flash EPROM)

A technology that combines the non-volatility of EPROM with the in-circuit re-programmability
of EEPROM.
FERF (Far-End Receive Failure)

An indication returned to a transmitting Network Element that the receiving Network Element has
detected an incoming section failure. Also known as RDI.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FIT (Failures in Time)
Circuit pack failure rates per 109 hours as calculated using the method described in Reliability
Prediction Procedure for Electronic Equipment, BellCore Method I, Issue 6, December 1997.
Fixed-rate tributary operation of a port

Mode of operation of a port in which tributaries are provisioned for the expected signal rates. This
provisioning information is used for cross-connection rate validation and for alarm handling (for
example “Loss of Pointer”).
FLC
Folded Rings
Folded (collapsed) rings are rings without fiber diversity. The terminology derives from the image
of folding a ring into a linear segment.
Forced
Term used when a circuit pack (either working or protection) has been locked into a
service-providing state by user command.
FPS
Facility Protection Switching
FR (Frame Relay)
A form of packet switching that relies on high-quality phone lines to minimize errors. It is very
good at handling high-speed, bursty data over wide area networks. The frames are variable
lengths and error checking is done at the end points.
Frame
The smallest block of digital data being transmitted.
Framework
An assembly of equipment units capable of housing shelves, such as a bay framework.
Free Running
An operating condition of a clock in which its local oscillator is not locked to an internal
synchronization reference and is using no storage techniques to sustain its accuracy.
FTAM
File Transfer, Access, and Management (FTAM), defined by ISO Standard 8571, is an Application
Service Element (ASE) which facilitates file transfer and allows file manipulation across a
network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
G GCC
General Communications Channel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GCC
General Communication Channel
GID
Group Identification
Global Wait to Restore Time

Corresponds to the time to wait before switching back to the timing reference. It occurs after a
timing link failure has cleared. This time applies for all timing sources in a system hence the name
global. This can be between 0 and 60 minutes, in increments of one minute.
GMP
Generic Mapping Procedure
GMPLS (generalized multi-protocol label switching)

A protocol suite (defined by IETF) that extends the label switching paradigm introduced in MPLS
to include both packet-switched and circuit-switched networks and that provides the distributed
intelligence required to build efficient and resilient multi-layer networks.
GMRE
GMPLS Routing Engine
GNE (Gateway Network Element)

A network element that passes information between other network elements and management
systems through a data communication network.
GPON
Gigabit-capable passive optical networks
Grooming
In telecommunications, the process of separating and segregating channels, as by combing, such
that the broadest channel possible can be assembled and sent across the longest practical link. The
aim is to minimize de-multiplexing traffic and reshuffling it electrically.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
H Hard Failure
An unrecoverable non-symptomatic (primary) failure that causes signal impairment or interferes
with critical network functions, such as DCC operation.
HDB3 (High Density Bipolar 3 Code)

Line code for 2 Mbit/s transmission systems.
HDLC (High Level Data Link Control)

OSI reference model data link layer protocol.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HMI
Human Machine Interface
HML (Human Machine Language)

A standard language developed by the ITU for describing the interaction between humans and
dumb terminals.
HO
Higher Order
Holdover
An operating condition of a clock in which its local oscillator is not locked to an external
reference but is using storage techniques to maintain its accuracy with respect to the last known
frequency comparison with a synchronization reference.
Hot Standby
A circuit pack ready for fast, automatic placement into operation to replace an active circuit pack.
It has the same signal as the service going through it, so that choice is all that is required.
HPA (Higher Order Path Adaptation)

Function that adapts a lower order Virtual Container to a higher order Virtual Container by
processing the Tributary Unit pointer which indicates the phase of the lower order Virtual
Container Path Overhead relative to the higher order Virtual Container Path Overhead and
assembling/disassembling the complete higher order Virtual Container.
HPC (Higher Order Path Connection)

Function that provides for flexible assignment of higher order Virtual Containers within an
STM-N signal.
HPCFAP
High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel
HPT (Higher Order Path Termination)

Function that terminates a higher order path by generating and adding the appropriate Virtual
Container Path Overhead to the relevant container at the path source and removing the Virtual
Container Path Overhead and reading it at the path sink.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I I/O
Input/Output
IaDI
Intra-Domain Interface
IAE
Incoming Alignment Error
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IAO LAN
Intraoffice Local Area Network
ID
Identifier
IEC
International Electro-Technical Commission
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IMF
Infant Mortality Factor
Insert
To physically insert a circuit pack into a slot, thus causing a system initiated restore of an entity
into service and/or creation of an entity and associated attributes.
Interface Capacity
The total number of STM-1 equivalents (bidirectional) tributaries in all transmission interfaces
with which a given transmission interface subrack can be equipped at one time. The interface
capacity varies with equipage.
Intermediate System (IS)

A system which routes/relays management information. An SDH Network Element may be a
combined intermediate and end system.
IP
Internet Protocol
IPCP (IP Control Protocol)

IPCP is the Network Control Protocol for IPv4.
IrDI
Inter-Domain Interface
IS (In-Service)
A memory administrative state for ports. IS refers to a port that is fully monitored and alarmed.
IS-IS Routing
The Network Elements in a management network, route packets (data) between each other using
an IS-IS level protocol. The size of a network running IS-IS Level 1 is limited, and therefore
certain mechanisms are employed to facilitate the management of larger networks.
For STATIC ROUTING, the capability exists for disabling the protocol over the LAN
connections, effectively causing the management network to be partitioned into separate IS-IS
Level 1 areas. In order for the network management system to communicate with a specific
Network Element in one of these areas, the network management system must identify through
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
which so-called Gateway Network Element this specific Network Element is connected to the
LAN. All packets to this specific Network Element are routed directly to the Gateway Network
Element by the network management system, before being re-routed (if necessary) within the
Level 1 area.
For DYNAMIC ROUTING an IS-IS Level 2 routing protocol is used allowing a number of Level
1 areas to interwork. The Network Elements which connect an IS-IS area to another area are set to
run the IS-IS Level 2 protocol within the Network Element and on the connection between other
Network Elements. Packets can now be routed between IS-IS areas and the network management
system does not have to identify the Gateway Network Elements.
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
ITU
International Telecommunications Union
ITU-T
International Telecommunications Union — Telecommunication standardization sector. Formerly
known as CCITT: Comité Consultatif International Télégraphique & Téléphonique; International
Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
J JC
Justification Control
Jitter
Short term variations of amplitude and frequency components of a digital signal from their ideal
position in time.
JOH
Justification Overhead
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
L LAN (Local Area Network)

A communications network that covers a limited geographic area, is privately owned and user
administered, is mostly used for internal transfer of information within a business, is normally
contained within a single building or adjacent group of buildings, and transmits data at a very
rapid speed.
LBC
Laser Bias Current
LBFC
Laser Backface Currents
LBO (Lightguide Build-Out )

An attenuating (signal-reducing) element used to keep an optical output signal strength within
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
desired limits.
LCAS
Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCN
Local Communications Network
LCP
Link Control Protocol
LCS
Local Customer Support
LDC
Local Data Controller
LED
Light-Emitting Diode
LF
Local Fault
LH
Long Haul
Line
A transmission medium, together with the associated equipment, required to provide the means of
transporting information between two consecutive network elements. One network element
originates the line signal; the other terminates it.
Line Protection
The optical interfaces can be protected by line protection. Line protection switching protects
against failures of line facilities, including the interfaces at both ends of a line, the optical fibers,
and any equipment between the two ends. Line protection includes protection of equipment
failures.
Line Timing
Refers to a network element that derives its timing from an incoming STM-N signal.
Link
The mapping between in-ports and out-ports. It specifies how components are connected to one
another.
LLM
Logical Lane Marker
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LMP
Link Management Protocol
LO
Lower Order
Location
An identifier for a specific circuit pack, interface module, interface port, or communications link.
Lockout of Protection
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC command that prevents the system from switching traffic to the
protection line from a working line. If the protection line is active when a “Lockout of Protection”
is entered – this command causes the working line to be selected. The protection line is then
locked from any Automatic, Manual, or Forced protection switches.
Lockout State
The Lockout State is defined for each working or protection circuit pack. The two permitted states
are: None – meaning no lockout is set for the circuit pack, set meaning the circuit pack has been
locked out. The values (None & Set) are taken independently for each working or protection
circuit pack.
LOF (Loss of Frame)

A failure to synchronize an incoming signal.
LOM
Loss Of Multiframe
Loop Timing
A special case of line timing. It applies to network elements that have only one STM-N/OC-N
interface. For example, terminating nodes in a linear network are loop timed.
Loopback
Type of diagnostic test used to compare an original transmitted signal with the resulting received
signal. A loopback is established when the received optical or electrical external transmission
signal is sent from a port or tributary input directly back toward the output.
LOP (Loss of Pointer )

A failure to extract good data from a signal payload.
LOS (Loss of Signal)

The complete absence of an incoming signal.
Loss Budget
Loss (in dB) of optical power due to the span transmission medium (includes fiber loss and splice
losses).
LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation)

Function that adapts a PDH signal to a synchronous network by mapping the signal into or
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
de-mapping the signal out of a synchronous container.
LPC (Lower Order Path Connection )

Function that provides for flexible assignment of lower order VCs in a higher order VC.
LPT (Lower Order Path Termination)

Function that terminates a lower order path by generating and adding the appropriate VC POH to
the relevant container at the path source and removing the VC POH and reading it at the path sink.
LSB
Least Significant Bit
LTE
Line Terminating Equipment
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
M M23 Application
A DS3 format where DS1s are multiplexed into a DS3 in a two-stage process, four DS1 channels
into DS2 and seven DS2 channels into DS3. In a strict sense the first stage is an M12 multiplexing
and only the second stage is an M23 multiplexing.
See also “C-Bit-Parity Application ” (p. GL-6).
MAF
Management Application Function
Management Connection
Identifies the type of routing used (STATIC or DYNAMIC), and if STATIC is selected allows the
gateway network element to be identified.
Manager
Capable of issuing network management operations and receiving events. The manager
communicates with the agent in the controlled network element.
Manual Switch State

A protection group enters the Manual Switch State upon the initiation and successful completion
of the Manual Switch command. The protection group leaves the Manual Switch state by means
of the Clear or Forced Switch commands. While in the Manual Switch state the system may
switch the active unit automatically if required for protection switching.
Mapping
The logical association of one set of values, such as addresses on one network, with quantities or
values of another set, such as devices or addresses on another network.
MCF (Message Communications Function)

Function that provides facilities for the transport and routing of Telecommunications Management
Network messages to and from the Network Manager.
MD (Mediation Device)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Allows for exchange of management information between Operations System and Network
Elements.
MEC (Manufacturer Executable Code)

Network Element system software in binary format that after being downloaded to one of the
stores can be executed by the system controller of the network element.
MEM
Memory
MFAS
MultiFrame Alignment Signal
MFI
Multiframe Indicator
MJ (Major (alarm))
Indicates a service-affecting failure, main or unit controller failure, or power supply failure.
MMF
Multi-Mode Fiber
MMI
Man-Machine Interface
MML
Human-Machine Language
MN (Minor (alarm))
Indicates a non-service-affecting failure of equipment or facility.
MO
Managed Object
MPLS
Multi Protocol Label Switching
MPLS-FRR
MPLS Fast Re-Route
MS
Multiplex Section
MS
Maintenance Signal
MSB
Most Significant Bit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MSI
Multiplex Structure Identifier
MSOH (Multiplex Section Overhead)

Part of the Section Overhead. Is accessible only at line terminals and multiplexers.
MSP (Multiplex Section Protection)

Provides capability for switching a signal from a working to a protection section.
MST (Multiplex Section Termination)

Function that generates the multiplexer section overhead in the transmit direction and terminates
the part of the Multiplexer Section overhead that is acceptable in the receive direction.
MST
Member Status
MT1T9
1T9 Agnostic Matrix
MT3T8
3T8 Agnostic Matrix
MT960C
960G Agnostic Matrix
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failures
MTBMA
Mean Time Between Maintenance Activities
MTIE
Maximum Time Interval Error
MTPI
Multiplexer Timing Physical Interface
MTS (Multiplexer Timing Source)

Function that provides timing reference to the relevant component parts of the multiplex
equipment and represents the SDH Network Element clock.
MTTR
Mean Time To Repair
Multiplexer
A device (circuit pack) that combines two or more transmission signals into a combined signal on
a shared medium.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Multiplexing
A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path,
or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N NA
Not Applicable
naOH
non associated overhead
NE (Network Element)
A node in a telecommunication network that supports network transport services and is directly
manageable by a management system.
NEBS
Network Equipment-Building System
NMI
Network Management Interface
NMON (Not Monitored )

A provisioning state for equipment that is not monitored or alarmed.
NNI
Network-Network Interface
NNI
Network Node Interface
No Request State
This is the routine-operation quiet state in which no external command activities are occurring.
NOC
Network Operation Center
Node
A network element in a ring or, more generally, in any type of network. In a network element
supporting interfaces to more than one ring, node refers to an interface that is in a particular ring.
Node is also defined as all equipment that is controlled by one system controller. A node is not
always directly manageable by a management system.
Non-Revertive Switching
In non-revertive switching, an active and standby line exist on the network. When a protection
switch occurs, the standby line is selected to support traffic, thereby becoming the active line. The
original active line then becomes the standby line. This status remains in effect even when the
fault clears. That is, there is no automatic switch back to the original status.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Non-Synchronous
The essential characteristic of time-scales or signals such that their corresponding significant
instants do not necessarily occur at the same average rate.
NORM
Normal Operating Mode
NORM
Normal Operating Mode
NOS
Not Operational primitive Sequence
NPI
Null Pointer Indication
NPPA (Non-Preemptible Protection Access)

Non-preemptible protection access increases the available span capacity for traffic which does not
require protection by a ring, but which cannot be preempted.
NRZ
Non-Return to Zero
NSA
Non-Service Affecting
NSAP Address (Network Service Access Point Address)

Network Service Access Point Address (used in the OSI network layer 3). An automatically
assigned number that uniquely identifies a Network Element for the purposes of routing DCC
messages.
NVM (Non-Volatile Memory )

Memory that retains its stored data after power has been removed. An example of NVM would be
a hard disk.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
O O&M
Operation and Maintenance
OA
Optical Amplifier
OAM&P
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning
OC-12
Optical Carrier, Level 12 Signal (622.08 Mbit/s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OC-192
Optical Carrier, Level 192 (9953.28 Mbit/s) (10 Gbit/s)
OC-3
Optical Carrier, Level 3 Signal (155 Mbit/s)
OC-48
Optical Carrier, Level 48 (2488.32 Mbit/s) (2.5 Gbit/s)
OC-768
Optical Carrier, Level 768 (39813.12 Mbit/s) (40 Gbit/s)
OC, OC-n
Optical Carrier
OCC
Optical Channel Carrier
OCCo
Optical Channel Carrier – overhead
OCCp
Optical Channel Carrier – payload
OCCr
Optical Channel Carrier with reduced functionality
OCG
Optical Carrier Group
OCGr
Optical Carrier Group with reduced functionality
OCh
Optical channel with full functionality
OChr
Optical channel with reduced functionality
OCI
Open Connection Indication
ODTUG
Optical channel Data Tributary Unit Group
ODTUjk
Optical channel Data Tributary Unit j into k
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ODTUk.ts
Optical channel Data Tributary Unit k with ts tributary slots
ODU
Optical Channel Data Unit
ODUk (Optical Channel Data Unit – k)

According to the ITU-T Recommendation G.709, the ODUk is an information structure consisting
of the information payload (OPUk, Optical Channel Payload Unit) and ODUk related overhead.
ODUk capacities are defined for k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 3e2, and 4 where k indicates the bit rate of the
client signa (1.2 Gbit/s, 2.5 Gbit/s, 10.0 Gbit/s, 10.4 Gbit/s, 40.4 Gbit/s, 41.8 Gbit/s, 104.8 Gbit/s).
ODUk-Xv
X virtually concatenated ODUks
ODUkP
Optical Channel Data Unit-k Path Monitoring level
ODUkT
Optical Channel Data Unit-k Tandem Connection Monitoring level
OH
Overhead
OI (Operations Interworking)
The capability to access, operate, provision, and administer remote systems through craft interface
access from any site in an SDH network or from a centralized operations system.
OLS
Optical Line System
OMFI
OPU Multi-Frame Identifier
OMS
Optical Multiplex Section
OMS-OH
Optical Multiplex Section Overhead
OMU
Optical Multiplex Unit
ONNI
Optical Network Node Interface
OOB
Out of band
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OOBDCN
Out-of-band DCN
OOF
Out-of-Frame
OOS (Out-of-Service)
An equipment entity is not providing its normal service function (removed from either the
working or protection state) either because of a system problem or because the pack has been
removed from service.
OOS
OTM Overhead Signal
OOS-AU (Out-of-Service - Autonomous)

An equipment entity is in an out-of-service state caused solely by an autonomous event.
OOS-AUMA (Out-of-Service - Autonomous and Management)

An equipment entity is in an out-of-service state caused by both an autonomous event and a
management event.
OOS-MA (Out-of-Service - Management)

An equipment entity is in an out-of-service state caused solely by a management event.
Open Ring Network

A network formed of a linear chain-shaped configuration of network elements. Each network
element connects to two others, one on each side, except for two network elements at the ends
which are connected on only one side. A closed ring can be formed by adding a connection
between the two end nodes.
Open shortest path first (OSPF)

A hierarchical link-state protocol for network routing, developed by the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF).
Operations Interface
Any interface providing you with information on the system behavior or control. These include
the equipment LEDs, user panel, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC, office alarms, and all telemetry
interfaces.
Operator
A user of the system with operator-level user privileges.
OPS
Optical Physical Section
OPSM
Optical Physical Section Multilane
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical Channel
A STM-n wavelength within an optical line signal. Multiple channels, differing by 1.5 μm in
wavelength, are multiplexed into one signal.
Optical Line Signal

A multiplexed optical signal containing multiple wavelengths or channels.
OPU
Optical Channel Payload Unit
OPUk (Optical Channel Payload Unit – k)

According to the ITU-T Recommendation G.709, the OPUk is the information structure used to
adapt client information for the transport over an optical channel. It comprises client information
together with any overhead needed to perform rate adaptation between the client signal rate and
the OPUk payload rate and other OPUk overhead supporting the client signal transport. This
overhead is adaptation specific.
OPUk capacities are defined for k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 3e2, and 4 where k indicates the bit rate of the
OPUk-Xv
X virtually concatenated OPUks
Original Value Provisioning

Preprogramming of a system’s original values at the factory. These values can be overridden using
local or remote provisioning.
OS (Operations System)
A central computer-based system used to provide operations, administration, and maintenance
functions.
OSC
Optical Supervisory Channel
OSF
Open Software Foundation; Operations System Function
OSPF
Open shortest path first
OTH
Optical Transport Hierarchy
OTL
Optical channel Transport Lane
OTLC
Optical Transport Lane Carrier
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OTLCG
Optical Transport Lane Carrier Group
OTM
Optical Transport Module
OTN
Optical Transport Network
OTS
Optical Transmission Section
OTS-OH
Optical Transmission Section Overhead
OTU
Optical Channel Transport Unit
OTUk (Optical Channel Transport Unit – k)

According to the ITU-T Recommendation G.709, the OTUk is the information structure used for
the transport of an ODUk over one or more optical channel connections. It consists of the optical
channel data unit and OTUk related overhead (FEC and overhead for management of an optical
channel connection). It is characterized by its frame structure, bit rate, and bandwidth.
OTUk capacities are defined for k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 3e2, and 4 where k indicates the bit rate of the
OTUk-v
Optical Channel Transport Unit-k with vendor specific OTU FEC
OTUkV
Functionally standardized Optical Channel Transport Unit – k (acc. to ITU-T Recommendation
G.709)
OTUkV
functionally standardized Optical Channel Transport Unit-k
Outage
A disruption of service that lasts for more than 1 second.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
P P-CMEP
Path-Connection Monitoring End Point
Parameter
A variable that is given a value for a specified application. A constant, variable, or expression that
is used to pass values between components.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parity Check
Tests whether the number of ones (or zeros) in an array of binary bits is odd or even; used to
determine that the received signal is the same as the transmitted signal.
Pass-Through
Paths that are cross-connected directly across an intermediate node in a network.
Path
A logical connection between the point at which a standard frame format for the signal at the
given rate is assembled, and the point at which the standard frame format for the signal is
disassembled.
Path Terminating Equipment

Network elements in which the path overhead is terminated.
PCB
Printed Circuit Board
PCC
Protection Communication Channel
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation
PCS
Physical Coding Sublayer
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PI
Physical Interface
Pipe mode (Adaptive-rate tributary operation of a port)

Mode of operation of a port in which tributaries are not explicitly provisioned for the expected
signal rates. The signal rates are automatically identified.
Platform
A family of equipment and software configurations designed to support a particular application.
PLD
Payload
Plesiochronous Network
A network that contains multiple subnetworks, each internally synchronous and all operating at
the same nominal frequency, but whose timing may be slightly different at any particular instant.
PM (Performance Monitoring)
Measures the quality of service and identifies degrading or marginally operating systems (before
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
an alarm would be generated).
PM
Path Monitoring
PMA
Physical Medium Attachment sublayer
PMD (Polarization Mode Dispersion)

Output pulse broadening due to random coupling of the two polarization modes in an optical fiber.
PMI
Payload Missing Indication
PMOH
Path Monitoring OverHead
PMP
Performance monitoring process
PN
Pseudo-random Number
POH (Path Overhead)

Informational bytes assigned to, and transported with the payload until the payload is
de-multiplexed. It provides for integrity of communication between the point of assembly of a
virtual container and its point of disassembly.
POP
Point of Presence
Port (also called Line)

The physical interface, consisting of both an input and output, where an electrical or optical
transmission interface is connected to the system and may be used to carry traffic between
network elements. The words “port” and “line” may often be used synonymously. “Port”
emphasizes the physical interface, and “line” emphasizes the interconnection. Either may be used
to identify the signal being carried.
Port State Provisioning

A feature that allows a user to suppress alarm reporting and performance monitoring during
provisioning by supporting multiple states (automatic, in-service, and not monitored) for
low-speed ports.
POS
Position field
POTS
Plain Old Telephone Service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PP
Pointer Processing
PPP
Point to point protocol
PRBS
See “pseudo-random binary sequence ” (p. GL-35).
Preprovisioning
The process by which the user specifies parameter values for an entity in advance of some of the
equipment being present. These parameters are maintained only in NVM. These modifications are
initiated locally or remotely by a management system (such as Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC for
example). Preprovisioning provides for the decoupling of manual intervention tasks (for example,
install circuit packs) from those tasks associated with configuring the node to provide services
(for example, specifying the entities to be cross-connected).
PRI
Primary
Proactive Maintenance
Refers to the process of detecting degrading conditions not severe enough to initiate protection
switching or alarming, but indicative of an impending signal fail or signal degrade defect.
Protection Access
To provision traffic to be carried by protection tributaries when the port tributaries are not being
used to carry the protected working traffic.
Protection Group Configuration

The members of a group and their roles, for example, working protection, line number, etc.
Protection Path
One of two signals entering a path selector used for path protection switching or dual ring
interworking. The other is the working path. The designations working and protection are
provisioned by the user, whereas the terms active path and standby path indicate the current
protection state.
Protection State
When the working unit is currently considered active by the system and that it is carrying traffic.
The “active unit state” specifically refers to the receive direction of operation — since protection
switching is unidirectional.
PROTN (Protection)
Extra capacity (channels, circuit packs) in transmission equipment that is not intended to be used
for service, but rather to serve as backup against equipment failures.
PROV (Provisioned)
Indicating that a circuit pack is ready to perform its intended function. A provisioned circuit pack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
can be active (ACT), in-service (IS), standby (STBY), provisioned out-of-service (POS), or
out-of-service (OOS).
PSDN
Public Switched Data Network
pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS)

A sequence of bits commonly used for testing.
PSF3T8
Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card
PSI
Payload Structure Identifier
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network
PT
Payload Type
PTE
Path Terminating Equipment
PTF
Path termination function
PTR
Pointer
PWR
Power
PWR ON
Power On
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Q Q-LAN
Thin Ethernet LAN which connects the manager to Gateway Network Elements so that
management information between Network Elements and management systems can be
exchanged.
QL (Quality Level)
The quality of the timing signal(s) provided to synchronize a Network Element. In case of optical
line timing the level can be provided by the Synchronization Status Message (S-1 byte). If the
System and Output Timing Quality Level mode is “Enabled”, and if the signal selected for the
Station Clock Output has a quality level below the Acceptance Quality Level, the Network
Element “squelches” the Station Clock Output Signal, which means that no signal is forwarded at
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
all.
QOS
Quality of Service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R RAM
Random Access Memory
RDI (Remote Defect Indication)

An indication returned to a transmitting terminal that the receiving terminal has detected an
incoming section failure. [Previously called far-end-receive failure (FERF).]
Reactive Maintenance
Refers to detecting defects/failures and clearing them.
Receive-Direction
The direction towards the Network Element.
Regeneration
The process of reconstructing a digital signal to eliminate the effects of noise and distortion.
Regenerator Loop
Loop in a Network Element between the Station Clock Output(s) and one or both Station Clock
Inputs, which can be used to de-jitterize the selected timing reference in network applications.
Regenerator Section Termination (RST)

Function that generates the Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH) in the transmit direction and
terminates the RSOH in the receive direction.
Reliability
The ability of a software system performing its required functions under stated conditions for a
stated period of time. The probability for an equipment to fulfill its function. Some of the ways in
which reliability is measured are: MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) expressed in hours;
Availability = (MTBF)/(MTBF+MTTR)(%) [where MTTR = mean time to restore]; outage in
minutes per year; failures per hour; percentage of failures per 1,000 hours.
Remote Network Element

Any Network Element that is connected to the referenced Network Element through either an
electrical or optical link. It may be the adjacent node on a ring, or N nodes away from the
reference. It also may be at the same physical location but is usually at another (remote) site.
Restore Timer
Counts down the time (in minutes) during which the switch waits to let the worker line recover
before switching back to it. This option can be set to prevent the protection switch continually
switching if a line has a continual transient fault.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Revertive
A protection switching mode in which, after a protection switch occurs, the equipment returns to
the nominal configuration (that is, the working equipment is active, and the protection equipment
is standby) after any failure conditions that caused a protection switch to occur, clear, or after any
external switch commands are reset. (See “Non-Revertive”.)
Revertive Switching
In revertive switching, there is a working and protection high-speed line, circuit pack, etc. When a
protection switch occurs, the protection line, circuit pack, etc. is selected. When the fault clears,
service “reverts” to the working line.
RF
Remote Fault
Route
A series of contiguous digital sections.
Router
An interface between two networks. While routers are like bridges, they work differently. Routers
provide more functionality than bridges. For example, they can find the best route between any
two networks, even if there are several different networks in between. Routers also provide
network management capabilities such as load balancing, partitioning of the network, and
trouble-shooting.
RS
Regenerator Section
RS
Reed-Solomon
RS-Ack
Re-sequence acknowledge
RSOH
Regenerator Section OverHead; part of SOH
RST
Regenerator Section Termination
RSVP
Reservation Protocol
RZ (Return to Zero)
A code form having two information states (termed zero and one) and having a third state or an
at-rest condition to which the signal returns during each period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
S S3T8
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS subrack
SA
Service Affecting
SAPI
Source access point identifier
SASE
Stand-Alone Synchronization Equipment
SD
Signal Degrade
SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy)

A hierarchical set of digital transport structures, standardized for the transport of suitable adapted
payloads over transmission networks.
SDS
Standard Directory Service based on ANSI recommendation T1.245
SEC
SDH Equipment Clock
Section
The portion of a transmission facility, including terminating points, between a terminal network
element and a line-terminating network element, or two line-terminating network elements.
Section Adaptation
Function that processes the AU-pointer to indicate the phase of the VC-3/4 POH relative to the
STM-N SOH and assembles/disassembles the complete STM-N frame.
Self-Healing
A network’s ability to automatically recover from the failure of one or more of its components.
SEMF (Synchronous Equipment Management Function)

Function that converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into
object-oriented messages for transmission over the DCC and/or Q-interface. It also converts
object-oriented messages related to other management functions for passing across the S reference
points.
Server
Computer in a computer network that performs dedicated main tasks which generally require
sufficient performance.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service
The operational mode of a physical entity that indicates that the entity is providing service. This
designation will change with each switch action.
SES (Severely Errored Seconds)

This performance monitoring parameter is a second in which a signal failure occurs, or more than
a preset amount of coding violations (dependent on the type of signal) occurs.
SFP (small form-factor pluggable)

An SFP is a hot-pluggable compact transceiver used for data communications and
telecommunications. It interfaces a so-called “parent board” to a fiber optic. The SFP layout has
been standardized by a consortium of leading suppliers of telecommunications equipment.
SH
Short Haul
Single-Ended Operations
Provides operations support from a single location to remote Network Elements in the same SDH
subnetwork. With this capability you can perform operations, administration, maintenance, and
provisioning on a centralized basis. The remote Network Elements can be those that are specified
for the current release.
Site Address
The unique address for a Network Element.
Sk
Sink
SLC
Second-level controller, functional unit of the agnostic matrix cards.
Slot
A physical position in a subrack designed for holding a circuit pack and connecting it to the
backplane. This term is also used loosely to refer to the collection of ports or tributaries connected
to a physical circuit pack placed in a slot.
SM
Section Monitoring
SM or SMF (Single-Mode Fiber)

A low-loss, long-span optical fiber typically operating at either 1310 nm, 1550 nm, or both.
SMN
SDH Management Network
SMOH
Section Monitoring OverHead
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SNC
Subnetwork Connection
SNC/I
Subnetwork Connection (protection) / Inherent monitoring
SNC/N
Subnetwork Connection (protection) / Non-intrusive monitoring
SNC/S
Subnetwork connection protection with sublayer monitoring
SNR (Signal-to-Noise Ratio)

The relative strength of signal compared to noise.
So
Source
Software Backup
The process of saving an image of the current network element’s databases, which are contained
in its NVM, to a remote location.
Software Download
The process of transferring a software release generic from a remote file server to the network
element’s memory.
Software ID
Number that provides the software version information for the system.
SOH (Section Overhead)

Capacity added to either an AU-4 or assembly of AU-3s to create an STM-1. Contains always
STM-1 framing and optionally maintenance and operational functions. SOH can be subdivided in
MSOH (multiplex section overhead) and RSOH (regenerator section overhead).
SONET (Synchronous Optical Network)

The North American standard for the rates and formats that defines optical signals and their
constituents.
Span
An uninterrupted bidirectional fiber section between two network elements.
Span Growth
A type of growth in which one wavelength is added to all lines before the next wavelength is
added.
SPE
Synchronous Payload Envelope
SPF (Single point of failure)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A single failure in the OSI-network (DCC, LAN or node), that causes isolation of more than one
node in the OSI-network. The use of IS-IS areas, without obeying all rules & guidelines, increases
the risk of a single point of failure in the network.
SPI
SDH Physical Interface
SQ
Sequence Indicator
Squelch Map
This map contains information for each cross-connection in a ring and indicates the source and
destination nodes for the low-speed circuit that is part of the cross-connection. This information is
used to prevent traffic misconnection in rings with isolated nodes or segments.
SSM
Synchronization Status Message
SSU_L
Synchronization Supply Unit — Local
SSU_T
Synchronization Supply Unit — Transit
Standby Path
One of two signals entering a constituent path selector, the standby path is the path not currently
being selected.
State
The state of a circuit pack indicates whether it is defective or normal (ready for normal use).
Station Clock Input

An external clock may be connected to a Station Clock Input.
Status
The indication of a short-term change in the system.
STBY (Standby)
The circuit pack is in service but is not providing service functions. It is ready to be used to
replace a similar circuit pack either by protection or by duplex switching.
STM
Synchronous Transport Module (SDH)
STM-N (Synchronous Transport Module, Level N)

A building block information structure that supports SDH section layer connections, where N
represents a multiple of 155.52 Mbit/s. Normally N = 1, 4, 16, 64 or 256.
Stream (Line; aggregate)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A synchronous high rate connection between multiplexers, typically 10 or 40 Gbit/s.
STS
Synchronous Transport Signal (SONET)
Subnetwork
A group of interconnected/interrelated Network Elements. The most common connotation is a
synchronous network in which the Network Elements have data communications channel (DCC)
connectivity.
Supervisor
A user of the application with supervisor user privileges.
Suppression
A process where service-affecting alarms that have been identified as an “effect” are not displayed
to a user.
SYNC
Synchronizer
Synchronization Messaging
Synchronization messaging is used to communicate the quality of network timing, internal timing
status, and timing states throughout a subnetwork.
Synchronous
The essential characteristic of time scales or signals such that their corresponding significant
instances occur at precisely the same average rate, generally traceable to a single Stratum 1
source.
Synchronous Network
The synchronization of transmission systems with synchronous payloads to a master (network)
clock that can be traced to a reference clock.
Synchronous Payload
Payloads that can be derived from a network transmission signal by removing integral numbers of
bits from every frame. Therefore, no variable bit-stuffing rate adjustments are required to fit the
payload in the transmission signal.
System Administrator
A user of the computer system on which the system’s OS software application can be installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T TC
Tandem Connection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TC-CMEP
Tandem Connection-Connection Monitoring End Point
TCA (Threshold-Crossing Alert)

A message type sent from a Network Element that indicates that a certain performance monitoring
parameter has exceeded a specified threshold.
TCM
Tandem Connection Monitoring
TCMOH
Tandem Connection Monitoring OverHead
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol
TDM (Time Division Multiplexing)

A technique for transmitting a number of separate data, voice, and/or video signals simultaneously
over one communications medium by interleaving a portion of each signal one after another.
Through (or continue) cross-connection

A cross-connection within a ring, where the input and output tributaries have the same tributary
number but are in lines opposite each other.
Through Timing
Refers to a network element that derives its transmit timing in the east direction from a received
line signal in the east direction and its transmit timing in the west direction from a received line
signal in the west direction.
TID (Target Identifier)

A provisionable parameter that is used to identify a particular Network Element within a network.
It is a character string of up 20 characters where the characters are letters, digits, or hyphens (-).
TIM
Trace identifier mismatch
TL1 (Transaction Language One)

A management protocol developed by Bellcore in 1984 for man-machine and machine-machine
communications. TL1 is defined in Telcordia ® Requirement GR-831-CORE.
TM (Terminal multiplexer)
An Add/drop multiplexer with only one stream interface.
TMN
Telecommunications Management Network
TPID (Tag protocol identifier, Ethertype)

Indicates the presence of a VLAN tag in a MAC frame. Furthermore, it indicates that the
length/type field can be found at a different position in the frame (moved by 4 bytes).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transmit-Direction
The direction outwards from the Network Element.
Tributary
This term may refer to the following definitions:
1. A signal of a specific rate (2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, STM-1 or
STM-4) that may be added to or dropped from a line signal.
2. A path-level unit of bandwidth within a port, or the constituent signal(s) being carried in this
unit of bandwidth, for example, an STM-1 tributary within an STM-N port.
Tributary Unit pointer (TU pointer)

Indicates the phase alignment of the VC with respect to the TU in which it resides. The pointer
position is fixed with respect to the TU frame.
TS
Tributary Slot
TSA (Time Slot Assignment)

A capability that allows any tributary in a ring to be cross-connected to any tributary in any
lower-rate, non-ring interface or to the same-numbered tributary in the opposite side of the ring.
TSI (Time Slot Interchange)

The ability of the user to assign cross-connections between any tributaries of any lines within a
Network Element. Three types of TSI can be defined: Hairpin TSI, Interring TSI (between rings),
and intra-ring TSI (within rings).
TSOH
Tributary Slot Overhead
TTI
Trail trace identifier
TTP
Trail Termination Point
TTT
Timing Transparent Transcoding
TU (Tributary Unit)
An information structure which provides adaptation between the lower order path layer and the
higher path layer. Consists of a VC-n plus a tributary unit pointer (TU PTR).
TUG
Tributary Unit Group
Two-Way Point-to-Point Cross-Connection

A two-legged interconnection, that supports two-way transmission, between two and only two
tributaries.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TxTI
Transmitted Trace Identifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
U UAS (Unavailable Seconds )

In performance monitoring, the count of seconds in which a signal is declared failed or in which
10 consecutively severely errored seconds (SES) occurred, until the time when 10 consecutive
non-SES occur.
UITS (Unacknowledged Information Transfer Service)

Unconfirmed mode of LAPD operation.
UNEQ
Path Unequipped
UNI
User-to-Network Interface
Upstream
At or towards the source of the considered transmission stream, for example, looking in the
opposite direction of transmission.
User Privilege
Permissions a user must perform on the computer system on which the system software runs.
UTC (Universal Time Coordinated )

A time-zone independent indication of an event. The local time can be calculated from the
Universal Coordinated Time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
V Value
A number, text string, or other menu selection associated with a parameter.
Variable
An item of data named by an identifier. Each variable has a type, such as int or Object, and a
scope.
VC (Virtual Container)
Container with path overhead.
VCG
Virtual Concatenation Group
VCOH
Virtual Concatenation Overhead
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vcPT
virtual concatenated Payload Type
very short reach (VSR)
VF
Voice frequency
Virtual
Refers to artificial objects created by a computer to help the system control shared resources.
Virtual Circuit
A logical connection through a data communication (for example, X.25) network.
VM
Violation Monitoring
VMR
Violation Monitoring & Removal
Voice Frequency (VF) Circuit

A 64 kilobit per second digitized signal.
Volatile Memory
Type of memory that is lost if electrical power is interrupted.
VSR
See “very short reach ” (p. GL-46).
VT (Virtual Tributary)
In SONET technology, a VT is a virtual channel to transport a specific type of payload.
Typical types of VT’s are:
• VT1.5 (DS-1: 1.544 Mbit/s)
• VT2 (E-1: 2.048 Mbit/s)
• VT3 (DS-1C: 3.152 Mbit/s)
• VT6 (DS-2: 6.312 Mbit/s)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
W WAD
Wavelength add/drop
WAN (Wide Area Network )

A communication network that uses common-carrier provided lines and covers an extended
geographical area.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wander
Long term variations of amplitude frequency components (below 10 Hz) of a digital signal from
their ideal position in time possibly resulting in buffer problems at a receiver.
Wavelength Interchange
The ability to change the wavelength associated with an STM-N signal into another wavelength.
WDCS
Wideband Digital Cross-Connect System
WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplexing)

A means of increasing the information-carrying capacity of an optical fiber by simultaneously
transmitting signals at different wavelengths.
Wideband Communications
Voice, data, and/or video communication at digital rates from 64 kbit/s to 2 Mbit/s.
Working
Label attached to a physical entity. In case of revertive switching the working line or unit is the
entity that is carrying service under normal operation. In case of non-revertive switching the label
has no particular meaning.
Working State
The working unit is currently considered active by the system and that it is carrying traffic.
WRT (Wait to Restore Time)

Corresponds to the time to wait before switching back after a failure has cleared, in a revertive
protection scheme. This can be between 0 and 15 minutes, in increments of one minute.
WS
Work Station
WTR (Wait to Restore)

Applies to revertive switching operation. The protection group enters the WTR state when all
Equipment Fail (EF) conditions are cleared, but the system has not yet reverted back to its
working line. The protection group remains in the WTR state until the Wait-to-Restore timer
completes the WTR time interval.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
X XC
Cross-connect
XFP (extended form-factor pluggable)

An XFP is a hot-pluggable compact transceiver used for data communications and
telecommunications. It interfaces a so-called “parent board” to a fiber optic. The XFP layout has
been standardized by a consortium of leading suppliers of telecommunications equipment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Z Zero Code Suppression

A technique used to reduce the number of consecutive zeros in a line-coded signal (B3ZS, B8ZS).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Index
Numerics 1T9 Agnostic Matrix (MT1T9), 300-mm ETSI One Rack, 4-6, 4-8,
10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit 4-6, 4-39, 5-42 4-11, 4-14
(10XETH10G), 4-6, 4-8 equipment protection, 2-26, 3R
front view, 4-61 4-41, 4-42, 5-55 See: reamplification,
reshaping, and retiming (3R)
LEDs, 5-71 LEDs, 5-69
3T8 Agnostic Matrix (MT3T8),
10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit 2 × 40G ANY Port Unit
5-42
(10XOTH10G), 4-58 (2XANY40G), 4-6, 4-8, 4-63
equipment protection, 2-26
10 × 10G ANY Port Unit front view, 4-67
(10XANY10G), 4-6, 4-8, 4-45 LEDs, 5-69
LEDs, 5-71
front view, 4-50 7-feet Seismic Network Bay frame
24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit
rack, 4-6, 4-8, 4-11, 4-14
LEDs, 5-71 (24XETH1G), 4-6, 4-8, 4-73
floorplan guidelines, 7-20
10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit front view, 4-75
(10XOTH10G), 4-6, 4-8, 4-52 960G Agnostic Matrix (MT960C),
LEDs, 5-71
4-8, 4-39, 5-42
front view, 4-56 24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit
equipment protection, 2-26,
LEDs, 5-71 (24XANYMR), 4-6, 4-8, 4-68
4-41, 5-55
1000BLXU, 4-9, 4-77 front view, 4-71
front view, 4-43
1000BSXU, 4-9, 4-77 LEDs, 5-71
LEDs, 5-69
1000BZXU, 4-9, 4-77 24XANYMR
.............................................................
See: 24 × Multirate ANY Port
10XANY10G Unit (24XANYMR) A ACO button, 5-15
See: 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit
(10XANY10G) 24XETH1G addresses
See: 24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port
10XETH10G Unit (24XETH1G) MAC, 4-94
See: 10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port
2XANY40G agnostic matrix cards, 4-39
Unit (10XETH10G)
See: 2 × 40G ANY Port Unit equipment protection, 2-26,
10XOTH10G (2XANY40G) 4-41
See: 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port
Unit (10XOTH10G) 300-mm 4G ETSI One Rack, 4-11, front view, 4-42, 4-43
4-14
LEDs, 5-69
floorplan guidelines, 7-20
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Alcatel-Lucent – Internal IN-1
Issue 1 July 2011
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
alarm, 5-11 ............................................................. buttons
management, 5-10 B backup database ACO, 5-15
alarm notification, 5-11 primary, 5-37 .............................................................
alarm severity assignment profiles secondary, 5-37 C CCAL

(ASAP), 5-14 See: command community
bit rates
alarms, 5-14 authorization levels (CCAL)
ODU, A-8
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Class 1 laser statements
Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC), OPU, A-7
Canada, 9-4
5-59 OTU, A-9
China, 9-5
domains, 5-59 blank front plates, 4-6, 4-8, 4-8,
European Union, 9-8
user interface, 5-59 4-8, 4-11, 4-14, 7-6, 7-18, 7-19
United States, 9-13
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC blocking, 5-11
See: Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS clear validation time, 5-11
bonding points
Zero Installation Craft CLEI ™ codes, 5-39
Terminal (ZIC) ESD, 2-10
climatic conditions
interfaces, 4-92 BT36
See: Bus Termination Card stationery operation, 7-11
LAN interface, 4-35 (BT36)
command community
anomaly, 5-11 BT3T8 authorization levels (CCAL), 5-4
APS channel See: Bus Termination Card
compatibility
(BT3T8)
format, A-29 electromagnetic, 7-15, 9-7
BTC3T8
APS/PCC See: Bus Termination Card conditions, 5-13
See: automatic protection CMISS (BTC3T8)
switching coordination conditions severities, 5-13
channel (APS/PCC) Bus Termination Card (BT36), configuration
4-23
ASAP management, 5-37
See: alarm severity assignment Bus Termination Card (BT3T8),
4-6, 4-21, 5-42 conformance statements
profiles (ASAP)
Bus Termination Card CMISS Canada, 9-3
autodiscovery, 2-31
(BT36), 4-8 eco-environmental, Canada,
automatic protection switching
Bus Termination Card CMISS 9-4
coordination channel
(APS/PCC), A-29 (BTC3T8), 4-6, 4-21, 5-42 eco-environmental, China, 9-6
automatic switched optical Bus Termination Cards CMISS eco-environmental, European
network (ASON), 1-14 (BTC3T8) Union, 9-9
automatically switched optical front view, 4-22 eco-environmental, United
network (ASON), 2-38 Bus Terminations Card (BT36) States, 9-13
autoprovisioning, 5-43 front view, 4-24 Federal Communications
Commission, United States,
Bus Terminations Card (BT3T8) 9-12
front view, 4-22
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Internal 1830 PSS
Issue 1 July 2011
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
indoor applications, Canada, correlated fault cause, 5-11 United States, 9-13
9-3
correlation, 5-11 EFEC
indoor applications, China, 9-5 See: enhanced forward error
CSF
correction (EFEC)
indoor applications, European
Client Signal Fail indication,
Union, 9-8 electrical connectors, 7-25, 7-25
2-16
indoor applications, United electromagnetic compatibility,
.............................................................
States, 9-12 7-15, 9-7
D data communication channel
Industry Canada, 9-3 embedded communication
(DCC) channels (ECC)
laser warning, Canada, 9-4
termination, 4-91 protection, 4-91
laser warning, China, 9-6
data communications network termination, 4-91
laser warning, European (DCN), 2-36
Union, 9-9 embedded control channel (ECC)
interfaces, 4-92
laser warning, United States, protection, 2-36
9-13 protection, 2-36, 4-91
engineering services; installation
material content compliance, database
services, 7-2
China, 9-6 download performance, 5-39
enhanced forward error correction
material content compliance, upload performance, 5-39 (EFEC), 2-20
European Union, 9-10
volatile, 5-37 environmental conditions
optical transmitter, Canada, 9-3
default users, 5-4 storage, 7-7
optical transmitter, China, 9-5
defect, 5-11 transportation, 7-9
optical transmitter, European
Union, 9-8 domains equipment, 2-28
optical transmitter, United Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero equipment entities
Installation Craft Terminal
States, 9-12
(ZIC), 5-59 mandatory, 5-42
packaging collection and non-mandatory, 5-42
download
recovery, China, 9-6
software, 5-33 equipment protection
packaging collection and
recovery, European Union, drop ports, 2-42 1T9 Agnostic Matrix, 2-26,
9-9 4-41, 4-42, 5-55
dust filter, 4-7, 4-8, 9-18
product safety, Canada, 9-3 3T8 Agnostic Matrix, 2-26
.............................................................
recycling / take-back / disposal 960G Agnostic Matrix, 2-26,
of products and batteries, E E-NNI-G ports, 2-42 4-41, 5-55
European Union, 9-9 EC_HC agnostic matrix cards, 2-26,
connectors See: First-Level Controller 4-41
(FLC)
electrical, 7-25, 7-25 First-Level Controller, 2-26,
eco-environmental statements 4-35, 5-55
optical, 7-25
Canada, 9-4 error correction
consequent actions, 5-11
China, 9-6 Optical Transport Network,
control plane, 2-38 A-32
European Union, 9-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ESD Federal Communications 2 × 40G ANY Port Unit
See: electrostatic discharge Commission (FCC) (2XANY40G), 4-67
(ESD)
conformance statements, 24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit
bonding points, 2-10 United States, 9-12 (24XETH1G), 4-75
Ethernet performance monitoring First-Level Controller (FLC), 4-6, 24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit
parameters, 5-27 4-8, 4-34, 5-32, 5-42 (24XANYMR), 4-71
events, 5-14 equipment protection, 2-26, 960G Agnostic Matrix, 4-43
4-35, 5-55
extended form-factor pluggables agnostic matrix cards, 4-42,
(XFP), 2-27 front view, 4-37 4-43
IR211G1AU, 4-9, 4-77 LEDs, 5-66 Bus Termination Cards CMISS
(BTC3T8), 4-22
LR211G1AU, 4-9, 4-77 solid-state disk, 4-34, 5-33,
5-37, 9-18 Bus Terminations Card
LRT11G1TU, 4-9, 4-77
(BT36), 4-24
FLC
SR111G1AU, 4-9, 4-77, 5-42
See: First-Level Controller Bus Terminations Card
............................................................. (FLC) (BT3T8), 4-22
F facility loopbacks, 2-34, 5-18 FLC slots, 4-11, 4-14 Fan Unit (FAN3T8), 4-20
failure, 5-11 floorplan guidelines, 7-20 First-Level Controller (FLC),

4-37
Tandem connection monitoring forward error correcting (FEC),
(TCM), 2-33 A-32 High Power Connection Fuse
and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP),
failure-in-time rates, 9-20 frame structures
4-32
Fan Unit, 9-18 ODU, A-16
Power Distribution Unit
Fan Unit (FAN3T8), 4-6, 4-8, Optical Transport Network, (PDU1C, PDU2C), 4-33
4-17, 5-42, 7-5 A-12
power filter card (PFC), 4-30
front view, 4-20 OPU, A-13
Power Supply, Filter, and
LEDs, 5-60 OTU, A-18 Clock Interface Card
(PSF3T8), 4-27
FAN3T8 front plates
See: Fan Unit (FAN3T8) .............................................................
blank, 4-6, 4-8, 4-8, 4-8, 4-11,
fault, 5-11 4-14, 7-6, 7-18, 7-19 G GC slots, 4-11, 4-14
detection, 5-10 full-size, 7-6, 7-18, 7-19 unused, 7-6, 7-18, 7-19
management, 5-10 GC slot, 7-6, 7-18, 7-19 general communication channel
reporting, 5-10 front views (GCC)
fault management process, 5-11 10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit protection, 2-36, 4-91
(10XETH10G), 4-61 termination, 4-91
FCC
See: Federal Communications 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit general planning information, 7-2
Commission (FCC) (10XANY10G), 4-50
generalized multi-protocol label
FEC 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit switching (GMPLS), 1-14, 2-1,
See: forward error correcting (10XOTH10G), 4-56 2-38
(FEC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GMPLS conformance statements, laser statements
See: generalized multi-protocol China, 9-5
Canada, 9-4
label switching (GMPLS)
conformance statements,
China, 9-5
GMPLS Routing Engine (GMRE), European Union, 9-8
2-38 European Union, 9-8
features, 2-40 United States, 9-12 United States, 9-13
port types, 2-42 Industry Canada laser warning statements
standardized network conformance statements, 9-3 Canada, 9-4
interfaces, 2-44
information structures China, 9-6
GMRE
Optical Transport Network, European Union, 9-9
See: GMPLS Routing Engine
A-12
(GMRE) United States, 9-13
initial software installation, 5-32
............................................................. layers
installation
H heat dissipation, 7-5, 7-5 Optical Transport Network,
software, 5-32 A-5
High Power Connection Fuse and
inter-domain ports, 2-42 LEDs
Alarm Panel (HPCFAP), 4-6,
4-31, 5-42 interfaces 10 × 10 GbE / XFP Port Unit,
front view, 4-32 5-71
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC,
LEDs, 5-61 4-92 10 × 10G ANY Port Unit, 5-71
HPCFAP data communications network 10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit,

See: High Power Connection (DCN), 4-92 5-71
Fuse and Alarm Panel management communication 10 × STM-64/OC-192 / XFP
(HPCFAP) network (MCN), 4-92 Port Unit, 5-71
............................................................. signaling communication 1T9 Agnostic Matrix
network (SCN), 4-92 (MT1T9), 5-69
I I-NNI ports, 2-42
timing, 2-7 2 × 40G ANY Port Unit, 5-71
I/O card slots, 4-11, 4-14
Internet Engineering Task Force 24 × 1 GbE / SFP Port Unit,
unused, 7-6, 7-18, 7-19 5-71
(IETF), 2-1
I/O cards, 4-6, 4-8, 5-42 24 × Multirate ANY Port Unit,
intra-domain ports, 2-42
IETF 5-71
inventory, 2-28
See: Internet Engineering Task 24 × STM-16/OC-48 / SFP
Force (IETF) IP addresses, 4-94
Port Unit, 5-71
in-service upgrade, 5-34 IR12G7AU, 4-9, 4-77
3T8 Agnostic Matrix, 5-69
indications IR12G7TU, 4-9, 4-77
960G Agnostic Matrix
visual, 5-17, 5-60, 5-61, 5-62, IR211G1AU, 4-9, 4-77 (MT960C), 5-69
5-64, 5-66 ............................................................. agnostic matrix cards, 5-69
indoor applications statements color hierarchy, 5-17
L LAN interface
conformance statements, Fan Unit, 5-60
Canada, 9-3 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC,
4-35 First-Level Controller, 5-66
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
High Power Connection Fuse mapping OMS
and Alarm Panel, 5-61 See: optical multiplex section
Optical Transport Network,
(OMS)
power filter card, 5-64 A-21
OPS
Power Supply, Filter, and masking, 5-11
See: optical physical section
Clock Interface Card, 5-62
material content compliance (OPS)
link pass through (LPT), 2-16 statements
optical channel (OCh), A-4
loopbacks China, 9-6
structure, A-19
controlling, 5-18 European Union, 9-10
optical channel data unit (ODU)
facility, 2-34, 5-18 matrix slots, 4-11, 4-14
bit rates, A-8
terminal, 2-34, 5-18 mean time between failures
capacities, A-8
(MTBF), 9-19
LPT
frame structures, A-16
See: link pass through (LPT) modules
types, A-8
LR12G7TU, 4-9, 4-77 optical, 4-9, 5-42
optical channel data unit (OPU),
LR211G1AU, 4-9, 4-77 MT1T9
A-4
See: 1T9 Agnostic Matrix
LR22G7TU, 4-9, 4-77
(MT1T9) optical channel payload unit
LRT11G1TU, 4-9, 4-77 (OPU), A-4
MT960C
............................................................. See: 960G Agnostic Matrix frame structures, A-13
(MT960C)
M MAC addresses, 4-94 optical channel transport unit
MTBF (OTU), A-4
maintenance signals See: mean time between
bit rates, A-9
Optical Transport Network, failures (MTBF)
A-27 capacities, A-9
multiplexing
management frame structures, A-18
Optical Transport Network,
alarm, 5-10 A-21 types, A-9
configuration, 5-37 ............................................................. optical connectors, 7-25
fault, 5-10 N network element alarm indicators, optical modules, 4-9, 5-42
software, 5-32 5-15 1000BLXU, 4-9, 4-77
management communication non-mandatory equipment entities, 1000BSXU, 4-9, 4-77

network (MCN) 5-42
1000BZXU, 4-9, 4-77
interfaces, 4-92 notification codes, 5-13
IR12G7AU, 4-9, 4-77
.............................................................
management communications IR12G7TU, 4-9, 4-77
network (MCN), 2-36 O OCh
IR211G1AU, 4-9, 4-77
mandatory equipment entities, See: optical channel (OCh)
5-42 LR12G7TU, 4-9, 4-77
ODU
manual provisioning, 5-43 See: optical channel data unit LR211G1AU, 4-9, 4-77
(ODU) LR22G7TU, 4-9, 4-77
LRT11G1TU, 4-9, 4-77
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SR111G1AU, 4-9, 4-77 tandem connection monitoring, PDU2C
A-25 See: Power Distribution Unit
SR12G7TU, 4-9, 4-77
(PDU2C)
OPU
optical multiplex section (OMS),
See: optical channel payload performance
A-4
unit (OPU)
database download, 5-39
optical payload unit (OPU)
OTH
database upload, 5-39
bit rates, A-7 See: optical transport hierarchy
(OTH) software download, 5-34
capacities, A-7
OTM performance monitoring (PM),
types, A-7
See: optical transport module 5-23
optical physical section (OPS), (OTM) data storage, 5-28
A-4
OTN data transfer, 5-28
optical transmission section See: Optical Transport
(OTS), A-4 Network (OTN) process, 5-23
optical transmitter statements OTN performance monitoring performance monitoring
parameters, 5-24 parameters
Canada, 9-3 OTS Ethernet, 5-27
conformance statements, See: optical transmission OTN, 5-24
China, 9-5 section (OTS)
persistency check, 5-11
conformance statements, OTU
See: optical channel transport PFC, 4-28
European Union, 9-8
unit (OTU) planning
United States, 9-12 overhead considerations, 7-2
optical transport hierarchy (OTH), Optical Transport Network Power Distribution Unit (PDU),
A-4 (OTN), 2-22 4-8, 4-8
............................................................. Power Distribution Unit (PDU1C,
optical transport module (OTM),
A-4 PDU2C)
P packaging collection and recovery
Optical Transport Network (OTN), front view, 4-33
China, 9-6
A-2 Power Distribution Unit (PDU1C),
packaging collection and recovery
error correction, A-32 4-33
statements
frame structures, A-12 Power Distribution Unit (PDU2C),
Canada, 9-4
4-33
information structures, A-12
China, 9-6
Power Filter (PFC), 4-28
layers, A-4, A-5
European Union, 9-9
power filter card (PFC)
maintenance signals, A-27
United States, 9-13
front view, 4-30
mapping, A-21
passwords, 5-5
LEDs, 5-64
multiplexing, A-21
PDU1C
Power Supply Filter (PFC), 4-8
overhead, 2-22 See: Power Distribution Unit
(PDU1C)
protection, A-28
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power Supply, Filter, and Clock provisioning remote file system, 5-37
Interface Card (PSF3T8), 4-6,
modes, 5-43 .............................................................
4-25, 5-42
Provisioning modes, 5-42 S S3T8
external interfaces, 4-26, 4-29
pseudo-random binary sequence, See: subrack
front view, 4-27
GL-35 safety statements
LEDs, 5-62
PSF3T8 laser warning, Canada, 9-4
PRBS See: Power Supply, Filter, and
See: pseudo-random binary Clock Interface Card laser warning, China, 9-6
sequence (PSF3T8) laser warning, European
preprovisioning, 5-43 PSS-36 Union, 9-9
See: subrack laser warning, United States,
primary backup database, 5-37
PSS-36 subrack (CMSHF), 4-14 9-13
product
............................................................. secondary backup database, 5-37
development, 9-16
security, 5-4
product safety statements Q quality policy, 9-15
security log, 5-6
conformance statements, .............................................................
Canada, 9-3 Shelf ID, 4-21, 4-23
R Rack Alarm Unit, 4-6
protection signal fail (SF) condition, 5-11
Rack Alarm Unit (RAU), 4-31
data communications network signaling communication network
rack top lamps, 5-15, 5-61 (SCN), 2-36
(DCN), 2-36, 4-91
rack types interfaces, 4-92
embedded communication
channels (ECC), 4-91 ANSI, 4-6, 4-8, 4-11, 4-14 slot numbering, 4-12, 4-15
embedded control channel ETSI, 4-6, 4-8, 4-11, 4-14 slot types
(ECC), 2-36
raise validation time, 5-11 FLC, 4-11, 4-14
general communication
RAU GC, 4-11, 4-14
channel (GCC), 2-36, 4-91
See: Rack Alarm Unit (RAU)
Optical Transport Network, matrix, 4-11, 4-14
reamplification, reshaping, and
A-28 slots
retiming (3R), A-19
protection architectures GC, 4-11, 4-14
records
1:1, A-28 I/O cards, 4-11, 4-14
circuit provisioning, 2-34
1:n, A-28 recycling / take-back / disposal of LC, 4-11, 4-14
1+1, A-28 products and batteries statements matrix, 4-11, 4-14
protection groups European Union, 9-9 small form-factor pluggables
embedded communication Reed-Solomon error (SFP), 2-27, 5-42
channels (ECC), 4-91 detection/correction codes, A-32 1000BLXU, 4-9, 4-77
protection switching reliability 1000BSXU, 4-9, 4-77
bidirectional, A-28 product, 9-15 1000BZXU, 4-9, 4-77
unidirectional, A-28 remote alarm interface, 5-15 IR12G7AU, 4-9, 4-77
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IR12G7TU, 4-9, 4-77 synchronization, 10-12 .............................................................
LR12G7TU, 4-9, 4-77 ............................................................. U UCAL

LR22G7TU, 4-9, 4-77 See: user community
T tandem connection monitoring
authorization levels (UCAL)
SR12G7TU, 4-9, 4-77 Optical Transport Network,
UNI-N ports, 2-42
SNC/I A-25
See: subnetwork connection USB
Tandem connection monitoring
protection with inherent (TCM) connector, 5-32
monitoring (SNC/I)
failure, 2-33 flash drive, 5-32
SNC/N
See: subnetwork connection TCA user community authorization
protection with non-intrusive See: threshold crossing alert levels (UCAL), 5-4
monitoring (SNC/N) (TCA)
user IDs, 5-4
SNC/S TCA modes, 5-30
user interface
See: subnetwork connection standing condition method,
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero
protection with sublayer 5-31
Installation Craft Terminal
monitoring (SNC/S)
transient condition method, (ZIC), 5-59
software 5-30
user privilege categories, 5-4
download, 5-33 TCA profiles, 5-29
.............................................................
download performance, 5-34 terminal loopbacks, 2-34, 5-18
V validation, 5-11
in-service upgrade, 5-34 threshold crossing alert (TCA)
very short reach, GL-46
initial installation, 5-32 TCA mode, 5-30
virtual drop ports, 2-42
management, 5-32 TCA profile, 5-29
visual indications, 5-17, 5-60,
Software management, 5-30 thresholding, 5-30 5-61, 5-62, 5-64, 5-66
spare parts, 10-22 standing condition method, VSR
SR111G1AU, 4-9, 4-77 5-31 See: very short reach
SR12G7TU, 4-9, 4-77 transient condition method, .............................................................
5-30
subnetwork connection protection Z ZIC
with inherent monitoring timing, 10-12
See: Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
(SNC/I), A-28 interfaces, 2-7 Zero Installation Craft
subnetwork connection protection Terminal (ZIC)
Timing interfaces, 10-2
with non-intrusive monitoring
(SNC/N), A-28 TL1
subnetwork connection protection features, 2-31

with sublayer monitoring interface, 2-31
(SNC/S), A-28
Top Rack Unit (TRU), 4-33
subrack (S3T8), 4-6, 4-11
TRU
super users, 5-4 See: Top Rack Unit (TRU)
Synchronization, 4-79
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 July 2011

Manual ALCATEL DWDM

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Manual ALCATEL DWDM

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) |

About this document

Documented feature set ............................................................................................................................................................ xxi

Safety information ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxi

Optical safety .............................................................................................................................................................................. xxii

Intended audience .................................................................................................................................................................... xxiii

Conventions used .................................................................................................................................................................... xxiii

Related information ................................................................................................................................................................ xxiv

Technical support ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxv

How to comment ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxvi

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-2

The Alcatel-Lucent optical networking products family ............................................................................................ 1-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) profile ................................................................................... 1-8

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-3

OTN interfaces ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-4

SDH/SONET interfaces .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-5

Data interfaces ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-6

Operations interfaces ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-8

Power interfaces and grounding ........................................................................................................................................ 2-10

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-11

Supported mappings .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-12

Cross-connection features ................................................................................................................................................... 2-14

Ethernet features ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-15

Forward error correction ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-20

Path protection ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-21

Overhead access and monitoring ...................................................................................................................................... 2-22

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-24

Environment, ecology, and safety .................................................................................................................................... 2-25

Equipment protection ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-26

Optical interface modules .................................................................................................................................................... 2-27

Equipment reports .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-28

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning features

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-29

Operation and management ................................................................................................................................................ 2-30

Monitoring and diagnostic functions .............................................................................................................................. 2-32

Stability ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-35

External communications features ................................................................................................................................... 2-36

Control plane features

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-37

The control plane concept ................................................................................................................................................... 2-38

Port types ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-42

Standardized network interfaces ....................................................................................................................................... 2-44

3 Topologies and configurations

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

Backbone applications ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-2

Metro core/regional applications ......................................................................................................................................... 3-4

Interworking and interoperability ....................................................................................................................................... 3-7

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

System configuration ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-3

Part lists ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-6

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack (S3T8) ..................................................................................................... 4-11

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack (CMSHF) ............................................................................................... 4-14

Fan Unit (FAN3T8) ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-17

PSS-64 Bus Termination Cards (BT3T8, BTC3T8) .................................................................................................. 4-21

PSS-36 Bus Termination Card (BT36) ........................................................................................................................... 4-23

PSS-36 Power filter card (PFC) ........................................................................................................................................ 4-28

PSS-36 Power Distribution Unit (PDU1C, PDU2C) ................................................................................................ 4-33

First-Level Controller (FLC) .............................................................................................................................................. 4-34

Agnostic matrix cards (MT960C, MT1T9) .................................................................................................................. 4-39

10 × 10G ANY Port Unit (10XANY10G) ..................................................................................................................... 4-45

10 × OTU2 / XFP Port Unit (10XOTH10G) ................................................................................................................ 4-52